Benchmarking Report - OTT Applications 1.3

WWW.ANITE.
COM/NEMO
NEMO ANALYZE 7.30

USER MANUAL
NEMO ANALYZE USER MANUAL
Copyright
The information contained in this document is confidential and no part of it may be
copied or
reproduced in any form without the written consent of Anite Network Testing.
Additionally, this
document is not to be passed to or discussed with third parties without the prior
written permission of
Anite Network Testing.
Anite’s products are subject to continual development and specifications may
change. Users of Anite’s
products and documentation should exercise their own independent judgement to
evaluate the
suitability of Anite’s products and documentation for their particular use. Anite
does not accept any
liability arising from the application or use of the product or this documentation.
All reasonable care has been made to ensure that this document is accurate. If you
have any
comments on this document, or would like details of any Anite products, services or
equipment,
please contact us through the Anite website.
Revision 7.30.00
Last Edited April 2015
Page 2
CONTENTS
1 QUICK
GUIDE .............................................................................
..................... 11
1.1
Setting up the
system ............................................................................
... 11
2 BEFORE YOU
BEGIN .............................................................................
............. 12
2.1
End-User License
Agreement ...................................................................... 12
2.2
Notes .............................................................................
......................... 12
3 INSTALLING NEMO
ANALYZE ...........................................................................
... 13
3.1
Hardware and software

requirements .......................................................... 13
3.2
Nemo Analyze
installation ......................................................................
.... 13
3.3
Licensing .........................................................................
........................ 16
3.3.1
License Server (Floating

License) ........................................................ 16
3.3.2
HASP USB
key ...............................................................................
... 21
3.3.3
Technical support
expiration ............................................................... 24
4 STARTING NEMO
ANALYZE ...........................................................................
..... 25
5 USING NEMO
ANALYZE............................................................................
.......... 26
6
WORKSPACE .........................................................................
........................... 27
6.1
Exporting/importing favorite
parameters ..................................................... 30
6.2
Workspace
filters ...........................................................................
........... 31
7 CREATING THE
DATABASE ..........................................................................
....... 34
7.1
Adding files to the

database ....................................................................... 34
7.1.1
Migrating Nemo Analyze database to a new laptop ................................ 35
7.1.2
Importing image files as

maps ............................................................ 36
7.2
Organize
measurements ......................................................................
...... 38
7.2.1
Drag & drop

folders ...........................................................................
41
7.2.2
Search
folders ...........................................................................
....... 42
7.2.3
Hiding
measurements ......................................................................
.. 50
7.2.4
Query
folders ...........................................................................
........ 50
7.2.5
Voice Quality
folders .........................................................................
52
7.2.6
Refresh All
Folders ...........................................................................
. 54
7.3
Joined
measurements ......................................................................
......... 55
7.4
Adding descriptions to measurement files and

folders .................................... 56
7.5
Delete Folder
Contents ..........................................................................
.... 58
7.6
Retrieving original files from the

database ................................................... 59
7.7
Database
CleanUp ...........................................................................
......... 60
8 VIEWING MEASUREMENT
DATA .......................................................................... 61
Page 3
8.1
Parameters ........................................................................
...................... 61
8.1.1
Statistics/Statistics with filters over

parameter ..................................... 64
8.1.2
Statistics by/Statistics with Filters By: No

Grouping............................... 64
8.1.3
Statistics by: Fixed Geographical Bin

Area............................................ 67
8.1.4
Lee’s criteria sampling for scanner measurements ................................

70
8.1.5
Parameter
launchpad ........................................................................
72
8.1.6
Change
Defaults ..........................................................................
..... 74
8.2
Viewing measurement data in

graphs .......................................................... 77
8.3
Viewing measurement data on

map ............................................................ 79
8.3.1
Changing default
map ....................................................................... 80
8.3.2
Opening measurement files on

map .................................................... 81
8.3.3
Opening BTS files on

map .................................................................. 82
8.3.4
Viewing notification icons on

map ....................................................... 85
8.3.5
Use Case 1: Viewing cell footprints, RSCP footprints, and LTE footprints .. 86
8.3.6
Use Case 2: Viewing uplink voice quality server data .............................

89
8.3.7
Use Case 3: Viewing IP/UDP packet trace data .....................................

92
8.4
Parameter
filtering .........................................................................
........... 99
8.4.1
Filtering based on polygon

area ........................................................ 100
8.4.2
Use Case 4: Global parameter filtering based on a secondary parameter 104
8.5
Filtering data and creating custom

KPIs ..................................................... 111
8.6
Drill-
down ..............................................................................
................ 115
8.6.1
Drilling Down from Map Data

view .................................................... 117
8.6.2
Drilling down from event type parameters in Map Data view ................ 120
8.7
Exclude
events ............................................................................
........... 122
8.8
Data
views .............................................................................
................ 124
8.9
Graphs ............................................................................
...................... 124
8.9.1
Graph Tools
menu ...........................................................................
124
8.9.2
Graph popup
menu ......................................................................... 125
8.9.3
Change Graph
Type ........................................................................ 125
8.9.4
Reset .............................................................................
............... 126
8.9.5
Query .............................................................................
............... 126
8.9.6
Pick
Parameter .........................................................................
...... 126
8.9.7
Add
Function ..........................................................................
........ 127
8.9.8
Add Reference
Line ......................................................................... 128
8.9.9
Tool ..............................................................................
................ 128
8.9.10
Mode ..............................................................................
............... 128
8.9.11 Side
Panel .............................................................................
......... 130
8.9.12 3D
Mode ..............................................................................
.......... 132
Page 4
8.9.1
Line Graph
Filled ............................................................................
. 132
8.9.2
Group
Values.............................................................................
..... 133
8.9.3
Graph
Properties ........................................................................
..... 134
8.9.4
Layer
Properties ........................................................................
..... 135
8.9.5
Layer properties for line

graphs ........................................................ 137
8.9.6
Layer properties for bar

graphs ........................................................ 138
8.9.7
Layer properties for scatter

graphs ................................................... 138
8.9.8
Use Case 5: Multiple graph
layers ..................................................... 139
8.9.9
Use Case 6: Notification icons in

graphs............................................. 142
8.9.10 Use Case 7: Correlating parameters using color grids and surface graphs143
8.10
Grids .............................................................................
........................ 145
8.10.1 Side
Panel .............................................................................
......... 146
8.10.2 Row
Details ...........................................................................
......... 148
8.10.3 Export Data
to ................................................................................
148
8.10.4 Grid
Properties ........................................................................
....... 149
8.10.5 Use Case 8: Color sets in
grids ......................................................... 151
8.10.6 Use Case 9: Play audio
sample ......................................................... 154
8.10.7 Use Case 10: Using L3 and RRC message search parameters ............... 156
8.11
Maps ..............................................................................
....................... 158
8.11.1 Viewing in live
maps........................................................................ 158
8.11.2 Google Street
View ......................................................................... 161
8.11.3 Google
Earth .............................................................................
..... 162
8.11.4 Map Tools
menu .............................................................................
163
8.11.5 Map popup
menu ............................................................................
165
8.11.6
Add ...............................................................................
................ 165
8.11.7
Find ..............................................................................
................ 166
8.11.8 Generate color
set .......................................................................... 167
8.11.9 Export to KML
file ...........................................................................
167
8.11.10 Zoom to
Layers ............................................................................
.. 169
8.11.11 Create New Folder From This
Area .................................................... 169
8.11.12 Set As Default
Location.................................................................... 169
8.11.13 Show Street View on
Location .......................................................... 169
8.11.14 Hide Street
View .............................................................................
169
8.11.15 Side Panel -
Map .............................................................................
169
8.11.16 Drawing
options............................................................................
.. 172
8.11.17
Tool ..............................................................................
................ 172
8.11.18
MapX...............................................................................
.............. 172
8.11.19 Map
Properties ........................................................................
....... 174
8.11.20 Route
Properties ........................................................................
..... 174
8.11.21 Draw route as
symbols .................................................................... 178
8.11.22 BTS
files .............................................................................
........... 180
8.11.23 BTS
properties.........................................................................
....... 184
8.11.24 Use Case 11: Adding map layers and saving layer combinations as geosets188
8.11.25 Use Case 12: Coloring routes based on BTS
coverage.......................... 190
8.11.26 Use Case 13: Performing area
binning ............................................... 192
8.11.27 Use Case 14: Comparing two groups of measurements from the same route
on
map ...............................................................................
..................... 200
8.11.28 Use Case 15: Displaying base station cell beam range on map .............
205
8.11.29 Use Case 16: Synchronizing base station map overlay with grid rows .... 211
8.11.30 Use Case 17: Using BTS reference
parameters ................................... 213
8.11.31 Use Case 18: Displaying base station connections on map based on pilot
pollution .........................................................................
........................... 216
8.12
Spreadsheets ......................................................................
................... 219
8.12.1 Editing cell
format ...........................................................................
223
Page 5
8.12.2 Filtering
data ..............................................................................
.... 227
8.12.3 Creating
formulas ..........................................................................
. 229
8.12.4 Adding
functions .........................................................................
.... 230
8.12.5 Use Case 19: Retrieving data from minimized data
sets ....................... 232
8.12.6 Use Case 20: Creating reports and report templates using spreadsheets 233
8.13 Processing uplink voice quality
data .......................................................... 240
8.14 Indoor
measurements ......................................................................
....... 241
8.15 Numerical data
views .............................................................................
. 244
8.16 Info
views .............................................................................
................. 246
8.17 Timeline
view ..............................................................................
........... 247
8.17.1 Highlight Parameter in Timeline
view ................................................. 248
8.17.2 Notifications in Timeline
view ........................................................... 250
8.17.3 Range selection in Timeline
view ....................................................... 251
8.18 Other
views .............................................................................
.............. 252
8.18.1 Network
Parameters ........................................................................
252
8.18.2 Measurement
Settings ..................................................................... 253
8.18.3
Properties ........................................................................
.............. 254
8.18.4 Query
Clipboard..........................................................................
.... 254
8.18.5
Activity ..........................................................................
................ 256
8.18.6 Window
Browser ...........................................................................
.. 257
8.18.7 Log
window ............................................................................
........ 257
9
WORKBOOKS .........................................................................
........................ 259
9.1
Adding data
views..............................................................................
..... 262
9.2
Adding
pages .............................................................................
............ 266
9.3
Saving a
workbook ..........................................................................
....... 268
9.4
Exporting
workbooks .........................................................................
...... 269
9.4.1
Exporting workbooks as PDF/MS Word/MS PowerPoint files .................. 269
9.4.2
Exporting workbooks as image

files ................................................... 270
9.5
Copying a
workbook ..........................................................................
...... 271
9.6
Workbook
Properties ........................................................................
....... 272
9.7
Page
Properties ........................................................................
.............. 273
9.8
Example
workbook ..........................................................................
........ 274
10 REPORTS
...................................................................................
................. 278
10.1 Spreadsheet report templates

(.srt) .......................................................... 278
10.2 SIRIQ AKIA
reports ...........................................................................
...... 278
10.3
Workbooks .........................................................................
.................... 278
10.3.1 Generating
reports ..........................................................................
279
10.3.2 Generating reports from multiple
files ............................................... 282
10.3.3 Running
reports ...........................................................................
... 284
10.4 Creating custom reports with Spreadsheet Report
Designer ......................... 286
10.4.1 Creating and opening a report
template ............................................. 286
10.4.2 Column
group..............................................................................
... 289
10.4.3 Insert
columns ...........................................................................
.... 290
10.4.4 Cumulation and density for specific
parameters .................................. 291
Page 6
10.4.5 Modifying a spreadsheet report

template ........................................... 291
10.4.6 Handling of deleted or renamed
worksheets ....................................... 296
10.4.7 Using VBA macros in Analyze Spreadsheet
reports .............................. 296
10.4.8 Showing PDF/CDF charts in
reports ................................................... 300
10.4.9 Showing map plots in report
templates .............................................. 305
10.5 Reporting with Microsoft
Excel .................................................................. 307
10.6 Reporting with Crystal
Reports ................................................................. 317
10.6.1 Exporting
reports ...........................................................................
. 317
10.6.2 Configuring
reports .........................................................................
318
10.7 Reporting with
PowerPoint .......................................................................
320
10.7.1 PowerPoint 2007
setup .................................................................... 324
10.8 Creating Custom
Queries .........................................................................
329
10.9 SQL
queries ...........................................................................
................ 330
10.9.1 Getting
started ...........................................................................
.... 330
10.9.2 Nemo Analyze database
schema ....................................................... 331
10.9.3 Relations between
tables ................................................................. 331
10.9.4 Mapping of Nemo log file events to database
tables ............................ 331
10.9.5 Views – Automatically joined
tables ................................................... 334
10.9.6 Database
timestamps ......................................................................
336
10.9.7 Filtering log
files .............................................................................
337
10.9.8 Value
enumeration .......................................................................
... 338
10.9.9
Connections .......................................................................
............ 339
10.9.10 Correlating tables based on
time ....................................................... 340
10.9.11 Time range
correlation.....................................................................
341
10.9.12 Guidelines for creating SQL
queries ................................................... 342
10.9.13 Unique features of Nemo Analyze SQL
interface .................................. 343
10.9.14 SQL vs. KPI
workbench .................................................................... 343
10.10
Query
Manager ...........................................................................
........ 344
10.10.1 Pick Measurement

Parameter ........................................................... 345
10.10.2 Generic Query
Wizard ...................................................................... 349
10.10.3 Manual
Query .............................................................................
.... 354
10.10.4 Correlate
parameters ......................................................................
355
10.11
Database
Browser ...........................................................................
.... 356
10.12
Custom KPI
Workbench ........................................................................
356
10.12.1 Designing custom KPIs and adding input data

sets .............................. 357
10.12.2
Parameter .........................................................................
............. 359
10.12.3 Combining input data
sets................................................................ 360
10.12.4 Correlation: Previous/Current/Next
Value .......................................... 362
10.12.5 Correlation: Previous Or Current Value/Next Or Current Value ..............
364
10.12.6 Correlation: All Values Within Time
Range.......................................... 366
10.12.7 Join: Inner
Join...............................................................................
367
10.12.8 Join: Left Outer
Join ........................................................................ 369
10.12.9 Join:
Union .............................................................................
....... 372
Page 7
10.12.10
Join: Cartesian
Product ................................................................ 374
10.12.11
Adding
operations .......................................................................
375
10.12.12
Operation:
Case .......................................................................... 376
10.12.13
Operation: Moving
Average .......................................................... 377
10.12.14
Operation:
Conversion ................................................................. 378
10.12.15
Operation: State
Machine............................................................. 379
10.12.16
Operation: Group
By/Binning ........................................................ 385
10.12.17
Aggregate
Functions .................................................................... 388
10.12.18
Sort
elements ..........................................................................
... 390
10.12.19
Filters ...........................................................................
............. 391
10.12.20
Filters: Top-N, Bottom-N, Nth Best, and Nth Worst ......................... 396
10.12.21
Mathematical
functions ................................................................ 398
10.12.22
Time functions:
Resample ............................................................ 400
10.12.23
Time functions: Time

Shift ........................................................... 401
10.12.24
Running and testing
KPIs ............................................................. 403
10.12.25
Saving KPIs as
components .......................................................... 404
10.12.26
Saving Custom
KPIs .................................................................... 405
10.12.27
Reopening custom KPIs for editing ................................................

407
10.12.28
Defining KPI execution method and value constants ........................ 408
10.12.29
Use Case 21: Creating complex filters using multiple conditions ........ 409
10.12.30 Use Case 22: Creating a KPI for dropped calls resulting from a missing
handover ..........................................................................
...................... 417
10.13
Analytics .........................................................................
................... 441
10.14
(S)FTP Log File

Autoload ...................................................................... 442
11 OTHER
TASKS .............................................................................
................... 444
11.1 Editing color
sets ..............................................................................
...... 444
11.2 Importing color
sets ..............................................................................
.. 445
11.2.1 Automatic generation of color
sets .................................................... 446
11.2.2 Use Case 23: Automatic generation of color set for a value range .........
449
11.2.3 Use Case 24: Creating a color
set ..................................................... 452
11.2.4 Use Case 25: Creating and applying a color set on
map ....................... 454
11.2.5 Use Case 26: Creating and applying a color set in
grid ........................ 459
11.3 Scheduling
events.............................................................................
...... 463
11.3.1 Report
events ............................................................................
..... 467
11.3.2 Workbook
events ............................................................................
471
11.3.3 Load folder
events ..........................................................................
472
11.3.4 KPI Threshold Alarm
events ............................................................. 473
11.3.5 Defining recurring
events ................................................................. 476
11.4 Task Manager and Problem
Repository ...................................................... 476
11.4.1 Configuring and editing a
task .......................................................... 478
11.5 Managing Workspace with
Projects ........................................................... 482
11.6 Managing users and user
groups .............................................................. 489
11.6.1 User
groups ............................................................................
....... 491
11.7 Viewing Server
statistics ........................................................................
.. 493
11.7.1 Managing
tasks .............................................................................
. 495
11.8 Editing Operator
Settings .........................................................................
497
11.9 Editing CDMA operator
settings ................................................................ 498
11.10
Page 8
Configuring notification
icons ................................................................ 499
11.10.1 Configuring notifications using the Parameters

view ............................ 499
11.10.2 Notification
configuration ................................................................. 501
11.11
Menu
Editor ............................................................................
............ 501
11.12
Configuring system
settings .................................................................. 505
11.12.1 Options –
Environment ....................................................................
505
11.12.2 Options –
Database .........................................................................
511
11.12.3 Options –
Color..............................................................................
. 513
11.12.4 Options –
Scheduler ........................................................................
514
11.12.5 Options –
Statistics ........................................................................
. 515
11.12.6 Options – IP
Trace ..........................................................................
516
11.12.7 Options –
Graph .............................................................................
517
11.12.8 Options –
Map ...............................................................................
. 518
11.12.9 Options –
BTS ...............................................................................
. 521
11.12.10
11.13
Importing custom
settings ........................................................... 524
Exporting custom
settings .................................................................... 525
11.13.1 Importing MapInfo

polygons ............................................................. 527
11.14
Viewing log on system performance and SQL functions ............................

528
11.15
Loading Nemo CEM

logfiles ................................................................... 529
12 USER
INTERFACE..........................................................................
.................. 532
12.1
Menus .............................................................................
...................... 532
12.1.1 File
menu...............................................................................
........ 533
12.1.2 View
menu ..............................................................................
....... 534
12.1.3 Tools
menu ..............................................................................
...... 534
12.1.4 Utilities
menu ..............................................................................
... 535
12.1.5 Commander
menu .......................................................................... 535
12.1.6 Live Map
menu ..............................................................................
. 535
12.1.7 Layout
menu ..............................................................................
.... 536
12.1.8 Help
menu ..............................................................................
....... 537
13 SHORTCUT
KEYS ..............................................................................
.............. 538
14
TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................
.................... 539
15 FAQ
...................................................................................
................. 540
16 TECHNICAL
SUPPORT ...........................................................................
........... 541
16.1 User
Club...............................................................................
................ 541
16.2 Nemo Support
Portal ............................................................................
... 541
16.3 Phone and Email
support .........................................................................
541
17 APPENDIX
1 .................................................................................
.................. 543
17.1 Making MapInfo®
maps........................................................................... 543
17.1.1 Registering a raster
map.................................................................. 543
18 APPENDIX
2 .................................................................................
.................. 545
18.1 Adding CSV files to the
database .............................................................. 545
18.1.1 Opening CSV files from the
database ................................................. 549
Page 9
18.1.2 Opening CSV files without database

import ........................................ 551
18.1.3 Creating custom queries for CSV
files ................................................ 553
19 APPENDIX
3 .................................................................................
.................. 556
19.1 Event-based data recording principle of Nemo
Tools .................................... 556
20 APPENDIX
4 .................................................................................
.................. 558
20.1 Difference between Nemo call events and ETSI call
events ........................... 558
21 APPENDIX
5 .................................................................................
.................. 560
End-User License
Agreement .........................................................................
... 560
Page 10
1 QUICK GUIDE
The instructions given in this quick guide have been designed to get you started in
a few easy steps.
Please, note that these instructions do not give a full picture of the software.
Consequently, every step
has a cross-reference to the place in the manual where the topic in question will
be explained in more
detail.
1.1 Setting up the system

Installing the software. Check the manual for hardware requirements if necessary
(see Hardware and
software requirements). Run the Nemo Analyze installation program Nemo
Analyze.x.xx.xx.exe from
the Nemo Analyze USB flash drive.
Loading files to database. Start by loading your measurement and BTS files in the
Nemo Analyze
database (See Creating the Database). This may take a few minutes, but once files
have been added,
they will remain in the database until you remove them.
You are now ready to start analyzing. You can, for example, generate a report from
the data (See
Reports) and view measurements in graphs and maps (See Viewing Measurement Data).
Page 11
2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN
Nemo Analyze is a powerful post-processing and reporting tool for planning,

optimizing, and
maintaining cellular networks. Nemo Analyze serves many purposes from network
overview to
problem solving and report generation. Some of its features include:
Post-processing of Nemo Outdoor, Nemo Commander, Nemo Invex, and Nemo Handy
measurement
files
Full support for the latest Nemo measurement file format in real time
SQL interface to the database engine
User-defined KPIs with custom queries
Open ODBC interface for third-party software
Fully customizable user interface
Statistical analysis and reporting
Predefined, customizable report templates
2.1 End-User License Agreement

The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may
be used only in
accordance with the terms of that agreement. For full details of this agreement,
refer to page 560.
2.2 Notes
Nemo Analyze users must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the
signaling behind
wireless technologies depending on their usage needs.
The user is expected to have basic knowledge on mobile networks and their
terminology.
A working knowledge of computers and Microsoft® Windows® is required for using the
Nemo Analyze
software. The user should know how to use the mouse as well as standard Windows®
menus and
commands. To review these techniques, see your Microsoft® Windows® documentation.
Page 12
3 INSTALLING NEMO ANALYZE
3.1 Hardware and software requirements

Intel i7, 4 core or similar
8 GB RAM minimum
256GB SSD hard drive (faster than normal HD)
Nemo Analyze HASP USB key
One USB port for HASP USB key
24 inch monitor, resolution 1920 x 1080
Internet Explorer 9 with Windows® 7- Windows® 8.1 64-bit
Crystal Reports Professional edition for creating custom-made report templates
(optional)
3.2 Nemo Analyze installation

∇
Installing Nemo Analyze

Microsoft® Network Monitor 3.4 must be installed BEFORE Nemo Analyze to enable
complete IP/UDP
trace details to be displayed in Nemo Analyze. For installing the Microsoft®
Network Monitor 3.4, see
Installing Microsoft® Network Monitor 3.4 on page 93. If Microsoft® Network Monitor
3.4 is
nevertheless installed after Nemo Analyze, Nemo Analyze’s Microsoft® Network
Monitor 3.4
functionality can be activated by copying the file NMAPI.dll from the folder
C:\Program
Files\Microsoft Network Monitor 3\ to the folder C:\Program Files\Anite\Nemo
Analyze. If
Microsoft® Network Monitor 3.4 is not found on the PC or Nemo Analyze has been
installed before
Microsoft® Network Monitor 3.4, Nemo Analyze will display only a limited set of
IP/UDP trace details.
♦
Note: With PCAP log file decoding, the Microsoft Network Monitor that is installed
must be 32-bit, even if the Windows is 64-bit.
To begin Nemo Analyze installation, insert the setup USB flash drive into the USB
port.
♦
Note: The user performing the installation must have administration rights.
Installation without administration rights could result in a database error. Start
installation by right-clicking the setup executable and select "Run as
administrator" from the menu.
Note: Before installation, uninstall the previous version of Nemo Analyze using
Add/Remove Programs from the Windows Control Panel.
Select Run from the Windows Start menu. Type D:\Nemo Analyze\ x.xx.xx.exe and press
the return
key. This command starts the Nemo Analyze installation software. Follow the
instructions given by the
installation program.
Page 13
Once the installation of Nemo Analyze Setup Prerequisites has been completed, the
Welcome to the
Nemo Analyze Setup Wizard dialog opens. Click Next.
The License Agreement dialog opens. Select I accept the terms of the license
agreement, and click
Next.
Page 14
The Custom Setup view opens. Click Browse and select the location where you want to
install Nemo
Analyze. After this, click Next.
The Ready to Install the Program dialog opens. Select Install.
Page 15
The Completed the Nemo Analyze Setup Wizard dialog opens. Click Finish and restart
the computer.
When starting, Nemo Analyze checks if the database is correct, i.e. has the same
version as Nemo
Analyze. If the database does not match, a warning is displayed. The warning does
not prevent you
from using Nemo Analyze but may cause it not to function properly.
3.3 Licensing
For Nemo Analyze you can select between two licensing options: License Server or a
HASP USB key.
3.3.1 License Server (Floating License)

Licensing is separate from the product itself, therefore four options exist:
Nemo Analyze Standalone with HASP USB key
Nemo Analyze Standalone with floating license
Client/Server (Enterprise) Nemo Analyze with HASP USB key
Client/Server (Enterprise) Nemo Analyze with floating license
The license server option enables the use of floating license, allowing more
efficient usage of
purchased licenses. When using the floating license, users do not need to have a
physical HASP USB
key attached into their PCs. Instead, there is only one physical USB key in the
floating license server
containing multiple licenses. When Nemo Analyze is started, it reserves a license
over the network
from the floating license server.
Floating license can be used both with Standalone and Client/Server options:
Page 16
An unlimited amount of users in different physical locations can install Nemo

Analyze, floating license
only limits the amount of concurrent users. Continuous network connection is needed
when floating
license is used.
Installing the floating license server

Install the HASP control center runtime software on the floating license server
hardware. The server
setup can be found from the Nemo Analyze installation USB flash drive or downloaded
from the Nemo
User Club´s Nemo Analyze section.
In case of Nemo Analyze Enterprise the HASP control center runtime software does
not have to be
installed because it is included in the Analyze Enterprise setup, just plug in the
floating license dongle
to server.
Plug the floating license key into the license server computer. You can verify the
installation by going
to http://localhost:1947/ with a web browser on the floating license server
computer. You should see
a red USB key in the Sentinel Keys section of the Sentinel Admin Control Center:
Page 17
You are now able install Nemo Analyze. Nemo Analyze should find the floating
license key
automatically from the network. After installing Nemo Analyze, go to
http://localhost:1947/ with a
web browser on the same computer you are installing Nemo Analyze. You should see
the floating
license key available over the network in the Hasp Keys and Products sections:
If you cannot see the key in Sentinel Admin Control Center, go to the Access to
Remote License
Managers page in the Configuration section. In the Search Parameters box, enter the
IP address
of the license server. Click Submit and wait for a while - the key should appear in
HASP Keys
section. Also check firewall settings of the license server.
Page 18
Start Nemo Analyze. A dialog box informing that the key is not found appears.
Note: The license server uses a TCP/UDP port to communicate with the computers
running Nemo
Analyze. Please make sure that communication is allowed in the following port:
TCP/UDP 1947.
Enter the IP address of the license server into Nemo Analyze. Nemo Analyze will now
start with the
floating license.
Page 19
Configuring the floating license server.

The floating license server can be configured via web browser. The address of the
control center is
http://localhost:1947/ when accessed from the floating license computer itself. The
server can also be
accessed over the network: http://<enter here the IP address of the floating
license
server>:1947/.
Licenses that are currently in use can be monitored and disconnected under
Sessions. Note that while
one user is able to use multiple sessions, only one license is consumed per
machine. To force a user to
release a license, disconnect all sessions.
Under Configuration, you are able to access logging settings, set restrictions for
users and configure
remote access settings to the Sentinel HASP Admin Control Center. Detailed
description of the license
management interface can be found under Help in the side panel of the Sentinel HASP
Admin Control
Center.
Page 20
3.3.2 HASP USB key

Nemo Analyze software license is tied to a HASP USB key and it is not possible to
install Nemo Analyze
without it. Software-based license is not available. A HASP USB key will be
delivered in the Nemo
Analyze package.
Note that the new key introduced in Nemo Analyze 6.0 will not be backwards
compatible with the older versions of Nemo Analyze. A new key with a valid
technical support and maintenance agreement option will be in use with Nemo
Analyze 6.0 and later versions.
If you have problems starting Nemo Analyze, and if the following error messages
appear, please
contact Nemo Technical Support at nemosupport@anite.com.
♦
Note: HASP USB keys are not needed when using floating license.
Connecting the HASP USB key in the USB port:

Plug the HASP USB key into your computer's USB port.
Do not plug the HASP USB key into any other port. It may damage your computer.
♦
If the following error message appears, please contact Nemo Technical Support at
nemosupport@anite.com. The USB key battery has run out and needs to be changed.
Page 21
3.3.2.1 No valid license detected

If the error message “Error: No valid license detected….” appears when the
application is started,
either the USB key is not plugged in or the key is an unsupported model.
Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the
existing key. To be able
to use the Nemo Analyze application supported by the old HASP USB key, it is
recommended that you
uninstall Nemo Analyze version 5.80. After un-installation reboot the computer and
re-install the
previous version.
3.3.2.2 No valid technical support agreement

If an error message stating that the version of Nemo Analyze is not supported by
the technical
support appears, it means that the HASP USB key type is correct, but that the key
is missing valid
technical support & maintenance agreement information.
Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the
existing key with the
Remote Update Utility. To be able to use the Nemo Analyze application supported by
the HASP USB
key without information about the technical support agreement, it is recommended
that you uninstall
Nemo Analyze version 5.80. After uninstallation, reboot the computer and re-install
the previous
version.
The old HASP USB key
The new HASP USB key
The HASP USB keys are updated using the Remote Update Utility software. Before
updating Nemo
Analyze application please make sure that new key is available. Note that you must
use the latest
version of the software which comes with Nemo Analyze version 6.00, or it can
alternatively be
downloaded from Nemo User Club. See the instructions below for updating your Nemo
Analyze USB
key.
Updating the HASP USB key (Nemo Analyze version 5.80 and later)
Connect your HASP USB key and start the SecureUpdate by selecting Start | All
Programs | Nemo
Tools | Remote Update Utility.
The Collect Key Status Information tab opens.
Page 22
Click Collect Information. If the Select HASP Key dialog appears, select the HASP
HL item and click
OK.
Define the location where the C2V file is saved and send the C2V file to Nemo
Technical Support at
nemosupport@anite.com.
Please add the following information to the e-mail using the following subject
“Nemo Analyze HASP
USB key update”:
Company name
First name
Surname
Page 23
Street address
Zip/ Postal Code
Country
Telephone number
Mobile number
After you have received the V2C file containing the update, select the Update File
in the Apply License
Update tab and click Apply Update.
The HASP USB key is now updated. Nemo Analyze can be installed and is ready for
use.
3.3.3 Technical support expiration

The new dongle keys used with Nemo Analyze 6.0 and later versions include a
compulsory technical
support and maintenance agreement option. The technical support expiration date
defines the date
the agreement ends. After this date it is not possible to start the new version of
the Nemo Analyze
application. For example: A customer has purchased Nemo Analyze version 6.0 with a
1-year technical
support maintenance agreement in October 2011. The customer is entitled for free
updates until
October 2012. Nemo Analyze versions released after October 2012 cannot be used with
the dongle
key without renewing the technical support & maintenance agreement. After the
technical support &
maintenance agreement is renewed, the dongle key can be updated remotely and the
customer can
update the application to the latest version.
Page 24
4 STARTING NEMO ANALYZE
After running Setup, you will see a new Nemo Tools program group under the Programs
selection in
the Windows® Start menu.
To start Nemo Analyze:
Double-click the Nemo Analyze.exe icon in My Computer or select it from the Start
menu
(StartProgramsNemo ToolsNemo Analyze).
When Nemo Analyze is starting, hold down the Shift key to prevent Nemo Analyze from
loading a
previously used workspace.
When the program starts, the window below will open. In the Welcome to Nemo Analyze
workbook
you will find useful information about Nemo Analyze, links to related documents,
and shortcuts to
loading measurement and BTS files.
Ribbonbar
Workspace
Parameters
view
Page 25
Workbook
area
5 USING NEMO ANALYZE
In Nemo Analyze you can view measurement data in multiple ways. The most convenient
way,
however, is to focus on the Workspace user interface since it is quick and easy.
For example, in the
workspace you can double-click a parameter, and Nemo Analyze opens the parameter
automatically in
the default data view. Furthermore, you can go to View | Workbook | Add Data View,
choose a
particular data view, select a measurement, and drag a parameter from the
Parameters view in the
data view. You can also view several parameters in the same data view by dragging
them in it. If you
drag a parameter in an empty workbook, a dialog box appears and asks you to select
a data view
type.
If you drag a measurement file to a workbook with a data view, a dialog box emerges
asking you to
select the parameter you wish to view. The filter field above the Parameters view
is useful when
looking for a specific parameter in a long list.
All data views are synchronized with each other based on time. Consequently, if you
open two or more
data views on the same measurement file but on different parameters simultaneously,
and switch
from one point of time in one data view to another point in time, the data in the
other data views
change accordingly.
Page 26
6 WORKSPACE
The Workspace forms the basis of the user interface in Nemo Analyze. All
measurements and
parameters can be found in the workspace, and from there it is convenient to drag
them in various
data views. See also Using Nemo Analyze. The Workspace view is by default attached
to the left-hand
side of the Analyze main window. You can also drag it elsewhere in the window, and
if you want to
dock it back to the side of the main window, double-click on the Workspace.
The Workspace view consists of eight pages: Measurements, Commander, IP Traces,
Base
Stations, Maps, Polygons, Data Source Files, and Reports pages, respectively. You
can switch
between these pages via the icon tabs at the bottom of the Workspace view.
The Measurements page in the Workspace is divided into three sections: Folders,
Measurements,
and Parameters. The folders include the All Measurements folder, which shows all
the files that are
currently in the database, and other user-defined folders. The current database
connection is also
identified next to the All Measurements folder, e.g. Analyze Local Database.
Measurements
displays a list of all measurements in the folder selected in the Folders section.
The name of the
measurement device is also displayed when the mouse is hovered over a measurement
file.
Parameters shows all available parameters and KPIs for the selected file,
measurement, or folder,
depending on the selections in the other two sections. The KPIs can be displayed in
graphs, maps, and
other data views, and statistics can also be calculated from the Parameters view.
Page 27
You can add parameters to Favorites by right-clicking on a parameter and selecting

Add to Favorites
from the popup menu. To toggle between the Favorites view and the Parameters view,
click the
Favorites
Page 28
button in the upper right corner of the Parameters view.

Page 29
6.1 Exporting/importing favorite parameters

It is possible to export and import favorite (starred) parameters by
exporting/importing identifiers of
all favorite parameters.
To Export favorite parameters, select File | Settings.
The Save As dialog opens. Name the file and click Save.
The Export Settings dialog opens.
Page 30
Select the parameter favorites you want to export and click OK.
To import parameter favorites, select File | Settings.
The Open dialog opens. Open the export file (*aex) where you have saved the
exported favorite
parameters by selecting Open.
Select the parameter favorites you want to import and click OK.
A dialog box appears asking if you want to replace existing favorites.
If user selects Yes, all favorites are cleared and new ones are imported. If user
selects No, existing
favorites are remembered and imported ones are added.
6.2 Workspace filters

Workspace filters enable the user to locate measurement files, parameters, maps,
base stations, etc.
more quickly. Below you can find some usage examples for the filters.
Above the measurement files you can find the filter for measurement files. Type the
name of the
measurement file in the filter field to find the desired measurement file. Above
the Parameters view
you can see the filter field for parameters. Type in the name of the parameter, and
only parameters
matching the name will be viewed in the Parameters view.
Page 31
In the Base Stations view of the Workspace, the filter can find base stations based
on any content
in the BTS file, allowing base stations to be filtered based on e.g. channel
number.
Page 32
Page 33
7 CREATING THE DATABASE
When you start Nemo Analyze for the first time, the database is empty. Adding files
- measurements,
BTS files, and maps - to the database may take a while, but once files have been
added, they will
remain in the database until you remove them.
For instruction on how to add CSV files to the database, see APPENDIX 2.
7.1 Adding files to the database

Select File | Measurement | Open [Measurement /Map/BTS/Report/Data Source File].
The Open dialog opens.
Page 34
Select the file(s) you want to add to the database and click Open. You can select
several files by
holding down the Shift key.
From the Files of type drop down menu you can define the type of file that you want
to open.
Supported network measurement tools of Nemo Analyze include Nemo Outdoor, Nemo
Commander,
Nemo Handy, Ascom TEMS Investigation, Ascom TEMS Pocket, Ascom TEMS Symphony Suite,
EADS
REMS TETRAPOL, and R&S ROMES. Measurement data in CSV (Character-Separated Value)
ASCII
format is also supported. Marker file and map are loaded automatically from Nemo
Handy embedded
indoor file when downloading the file to Nemo Analyze.
♦
Note that adding files to the database may take several minutes depending on the
number and the size of the files.
Note that all the files need to have unique file names.
Note that the file names of Nemo measurement files must follow the format
filename.devicenumber.nmf (for example, t5gsm.1.nmf). Device number signifies
the number of the device in case of simultaneous measurements with multiple
devices. Device number must always be separated with an extra dot in the file
name. With one device, the value is 1.
Note that the marker file and map are loaded automatically from Handy embedded
indoor file when downloading the file to Analyze.
The Activity (see Activity) displays the progress of file upload, file conversion,
and file upload queue.
The added measurement files will appear in the All Measurements folder in the
Workspace |
Measurements view in the left-hand side of the Nemo Analyze main window.
7.1.1 Migrating Nemo Analyze database to a new laptop

When changing your laptop, it is possible to migrate existing Nemo Analyze database
to the new
laptop once you have Analyze already installed on it. To achieve this, copy the
following two
subfolders from Nemo Tools folder on the C:
Nemo Analyze, with the exception of the Logs folder under Nemo Analyze (DO NOT copy
the
Logs folder or the database might get corrupted), and
Nemo Analyze Datastore
Page 35
7.1.2 Importing image files as maps

In addition to adding map files in the database through File | Measurement | Open
Map, you can
import image files to be used as maps. Select File | | Import | Image as map. In
the Open dialog,
select the image that you want to use as a map. It can be, for example, a floorplan
from a test site.
After selecting the image file you need to define either the width and the length
of the map area in
meters, or the GPS coordinates for two map corners. After you click OK in the Map
Import
Parameters dialog, the map is added in the database and it will appear in the Maps
folder in the
workspace.
Page 36
You can also create black and white copies of raster maps by right-clicking on a
map in the workspace
and selecting Create Black & White Copy. The map is saved with the same name with
‘BW’ added at
the end of the file name.
Page 37
7.2 Organize measurements

By default, all added measurement files go into the All Measurements folder.
If you have a lot of files, it may be convenient to categorize measurement files

into custom-made
subfolders. In the Organize Measurements dialog you can conveniently handle and
organize large
sets of measurement files. Go to File in the Ribbonbar and select Organize, or
right-click on the All
Measurements folder in the Workspace and select Organize.
Page 38
In the Organize Measurements dialog you can create new folders and subfolders, make
joined
measurements, and remove files from drag & drop folders. Right-click on a folder in
the left-hand
panel to create new folders. See the following chapters for information on the
different folder types.
Select measurements, right-click on them, and click the Join measurements button on
the Tools
toolbar
to create joined measurements. See Joined measurements for more information on

joined
measurements.
You can also organize measurements in the Workspace. Right-click on the All
Measurements item
and select Add Folder.
Page 39
There are four types of folders you can add: Drag & Drop, Search, Query, and Voice
Quality.
Page 40
7.2.1 Drag & drop folders

Drag & Drop folders are folders where you can drag files from the All Measurements
folder. You can
organize files, for example, by technology, time or place. When you drag and drop
files from the All
Measurements folder to the custom-made sub-folders, the files are only copied,
i.e., the files will
appear in two folders. The drag & drop folders are identified with a
symbol.
The example shows a Workspace with

two custom-made drag & drop folders
named Dropped calls and January 2013.
The Dropped calls folder has eight files,
and the January 2013 folder has one
file. The same files are also in the All
Measurements folder.
Page 41
7.2.2 Search folders

Search folders are folders where files are copied based on user-defined search
criteria. The search
folders are identified with a
symbol.
To create a new search folder, right-click on the All Measurements folder, and
select Add Folder |
Search… from the popup menu.
If you have an existing search folder and you have loaded new files to the
database, you must refresh
the folder to display also the newly added files. To refresh a folder, right-click
on the folder, and select
Refresh from the popup menu.
The Search Folder Properties dialog opens by selecting Properties from the previous
menu. The
dialog allows you to define search criteria for the folder using the Measurement,
Date,
Notifications, Network, System, Applications, Packet technologies, LTE and System
lock
tabs. You can combine multiple search criteria and create search folders for, e.g.,
WiMAX scanners
from specific dates and from specific polygon-defined geographical area.
Page 42
Name defines the search folder name.
Title, extension and description options allow you to search for specific
measurement files based on
the filename, file extension, and file description.
Device type enables you to search for mobile or scanner measurements.
Area enables you to search for measurements made on a defined area. To define the
area, click the
Define Area button. This opens the Select Polygon Area dialog below.
Parameter and value allow searching for specific parameters and their values.
Page 43
Clicking the Define Area button on the Properties dialog Measurement tab (see
above) opens the
Select Polygon Area dialog.
With Area | Name you can select a polygon area you have previously saved.
By clicking polygon icon
you are able to select a polygon on the map. After selection, Add
polygon dialog opens, in which you can give the polygon a name.
You can zoom in
and zoom out
By clicking the hand icon

By clicking
to change the map view.
you can move the map by dragging it.
you can erase the area selection made.
Size of measured area defines the size of measured area in square kms.
Page 44
Start date and End date allow you to define a time range from which all measurement
files will be
searched.
Search last allows you to search a defined number of the most recent measurement
files based on
the following parameters:
Days, Weeks, and Months finds measurement files from an N number of previous days,
weeks, and
months.
Measurements finds measurement files from an N number of the most recent
measurement
sessions.
Duration allows you to search for specific measurement files based on their
duration.
Hour from N to N allows you to filter files based on the hour of day when they were
recorded
In the Notifications page you can select the events you want to include in the
search.
Page 45
With the Mobile country code option you can search for measurements made in a
certain country.
With the Mobile network code option you can search for measurements made in a
certain network.
Page 46
With the System option you can search for measurements made in a certain system.
With the Band option you can search for measurements made in a certain band.
With the Applications option you can perform searches based on tests performed in
the log file.
With the Packet Technologies option you can perform searches based on packet
technologies.
Page 47
With the LTE option you can perform searches based on LTE-related events.
With the System lock option you can perform searches based on system locks.
Page 48
Finally click OK and the measurements that match the search criteria are copied to
the search folder.
Page 49
7.2.3 Hiding measurements

When there are 20000+ log files in the database, it is recommended to hide
measurements to
improve the responsiveness of the Nemo Analyze user interface.
To hide measurements, right-click on the All Measurements folder and select Hide
Measurements
from the popup menu.
7.2.4 Query folders

Query folders are folders where files are added based on user-defined criteria,
that is, queries. Once
the query is defined, Nemo Analyze will go through the measurement files in the
database and
automatically add all relevant files to the query folder.
To create a new query folder, right-click on the All Measurements folder and select
Add Folder |
Query from the popup menu.
If you have an existing query folder and you have loaded new files to the database,
you must refresh
the folder to display also the newly added files. To refresh a folder, right-click
on the folder, and select
Refresh from the popup menu.
Page 50
The Properties dialog opens. In the Query field, select the criteria according to
which the files will be
copied to the folder, e.g., Last Year. The folder will be named automatically, but
if you wish to name
the folder manually, clear the option and type a name. Click OK.
Page 51
Nemo Analyze creates the new folder, and the files that match the query criteria
are copied to the
folder. The query folders are identified with a
symbol.
The example shows a Workspace with one query folder named Edge.
7.2.5 Voice Quality folders

Voice quality folders can be used to automatically find the server side log files
of selected mobile log
files. Note that displaying the UL MOS of a selected mobile log file is done
automatically; this feature
is not needed for that purpose. See Use Case 2: Viewing uplink voice quality server
data.
To create a new voice quality folder, right-click on the All Measurements folder
and select Add
Folder | Voice Quality from the popup menu.
Page 52
The Properties dialog opens. The folder will be named automatically, but if you
wish to name the
folder manually, clear the option and type a name. Select mobile measurements for
which to find
corresponding voice quality server files through the Browse button and click OK.
Page 53
7.2.6 Refresh All Folders

To refresh all folders, right-click on the All Measurements folder and select
Refresh All Folders
Page 54
7.3 Joined measurements

With Nemo Analyze it is possible to join separate measurement files into a single
joined measurement.
Joined measurements will be handled as one measurement file.
Right-click on All Measurements and select Add Joined Measurement.
In the Add Joined Measurement dialog, type a name for the joined measurement, e.g.,
January 10
2014.
To allow joining of overlapping measurements, to View | Options | Database |

Queries | Allow
overlapping when joining measurements.
The joined measurements appear in the Workspace | Measurements. You can now drag &
drop
measurement files into the folder in the Measurements section. Joined measurements
are identified
with a
Page 55
symbol.
It is also possible to remove all measurements from the joined measurement file by
right-clicking on
the joined measurement file and selecting Remove All Joined Measurements.
7.4 Adding descriptions to measurement files and folders

Custom descriptions can be added to measurement files and folders. These
descriptions can be used,
for instance, to further individualize particular files or folders for the purposes
of later searches.
To add a description, right-click on the file or folder, and select Set Description
from the popup
menu.
Page 56
The Measurement Description dialog opens.
Enter the description to the Measurement file description field and click OK. The
description is
displayed as a tooltip when hovering over the measurement file or folder.
Measurement files and
folders can also be searched based on the description using Search Folders (see
page 42).
To add a description to several measurement files or folders, right-click on the
measurement files or
folders while holding down the shift key, and select Set Description from the popup
menu.
To edit an existing description, right-click on the measurement file or folder and
select Set
Description from the popup menu.
By hovering a mouse over a measurement in the workspace, also the device labels are
shown in a
tooltip window. Labels are shown if a #DL header with the label text is found from
the measurement
file.
Page 57
7.5 Delete Folder Contents

To permanently delete the contents of a particular folder from the database, right-
click on the folder
and select Delete Folder Contents from the popup menu.
The following prompt appears.
Select Yes to permanently delete the measurement files from the database.
Page 58
7.6 Retrieving original files from the database

♦
Note: This feature is supported by Nemo Analyze Enterprise Edition only.
To retrieve original measurement files from the database, right-click on a

measurement folder or file
in the Workspace, and select Retrieve Original Files from the popup menu.
The Retrieve Files dialog opens.
Retrieve to folder defines the folder to which the retrieved files will be saved.
Retrieving file displays the file that is currently being processed.
File N/NNN displays the progress of the retrieval process.
Retrieve begins the retrieval process.
Define a target location for the retrieved files with the Retrieve to folder
control and click the
Retrieve button.
Page 59
7.7 Database CleanUp

To clean up old files from the database, right-click on All Measurements in the
Workspace and
select Clean Up from the popup menu.
The Clean Up dialog opens.
Define the time range from which the measurements are to be deleted and click
Delete.
Page 60
8 VIEWING MEASUREMENT DATA
Measurement data can be viewed in different kinds of data views, such as graphs,
grids, numerical
views, and maps. A workbook is a collection of data views and Nemo Analyze offers
some ready-made
workbooks for analyzing measurement data. You can also easily make your own
workbooks and save
them for later use.
8.1 Parameters
The fastest way to view measurement data is through the Parameters view. To open a
parameter in
its default view, select the relevant measurement files in the Workspace and then
double-click a
parameter in the Parameters view.
Page 61
The selected parameter is opened in the default view. If you want to open the
parameter in some
other type of view, right-click on a parameter in the Parameters view and select
the view type from
the popup menu.
You can also drag and drop parameters in data views from the Parameters view. Nemo
Analyze will
display a green icon
view is unsuitable.
if the data view is suitable for the parameter, and a red icon
if the data
In the Parameters view you can search and filter parameters by typing the parameter
name in the
field at the top of the Parameters view. The Parameters view will display only the
defined parameters.
Some parameters require further definition before they can be viewed in any given
data view. When
opening these parameters in a data view, a dialog box appears asking for
specifications applicable to
the selected parameter. For example, if you want to view RX level full selected
BSIC in a graph, in the
Fill Parameters dialog you can select a BSIC value from the drop-down menu in the
Value field.
Click Finish, select the graph type, and the parameter is displayed in a graph
according to the BSIC
specifications.
Page 62
The RX level full parameter values are shown according to BSIC value 18.
Page 63
8.1.1 Statistics/Statistics with filters over parameter

In addition to running reports on measurement files, it is also possible to run
statistics on a single
parameter straight from the Parameters view. The statistics and statistics with
filters can be run
over a single measurement file, or over a folder containing several measurement
files (e.g., the All
Measurements folder).
You can run parameter statistics over a single measurement file by accessing the
Parameter
Launchpad. To do this, select a measurement file in the Workspace, select a
parameter in the
Parameters view, and click on the
button displayed at the bottom left corner of the Parameters
view. For more information on the Parameter Launchpad, see page 72.
Alternatively, you can run statistics over a single measurement file by selecting a
measurement file in
the Workspace, then right-clicking on a parameter in the Parameters view, and
selecting
Statistics By or Statistics With Filters By.
8.1.2 Statistics by/Statistics with Filters By: No Grouping

To run statistics over a single measurement file without grouping the data in any
way, select a
measurement file in the Workspace, right-click on a parameter in the Parameters
view, and select
Statistics by | No Grouping.
To run statistics with filters over a single measurement file without grouping the
data in any way,
select a measurement file in the Workspace, right-click on a parameter in the
Parameters view,
and select Statistics With Filters By | No Grouping.
Page 64
Page 65
Below is a workbook with statistics on RSCP best active set when run on a single
file, based on No
Grouping.
Benchmarking can be done by dragging parameter statistics on different files or

folders in the same
graph.
Page 66
8.1.3 Statistics by: Fixed Geographical Bin Area

Statistics by Fixed Geographical Bin Area and Bounding Geographical Bin Area make
it possible to view
statistics on map in area bins. With Fixed Geographical Bin Area, the user can
select an area (e.g. a
portion of the measurement route) and perform area binning on it. With Bounding
Geographical Bin
Area, area binning will be automatically performed on the entire measurement route.
To produce statistics by fixed geographical area, select a measurement, right-click
on a parameter,
and select Statistics by | Fixed Geographical Bin Area.
The Select Rectangular Area dialog box appears.
With Area | Name you can select a rectangular area you have previously saved.
you are able to select a rectangle on the map. After selection, Add
rectangle dialog opens, in which you can give the polygon a name.
You can zoom in
and zoom out
The bins show the average value according to the color set in each bin.
Page 67
It is also possible to view statistics based on Minimum, Maximum, Sample count,

Std. deviation and
Variance. The statistics are by default calculated based on Average. Go to the side
panel, right-click on
the parameter in the Layers view, and select Properties from the popup menu.
Page 68
The Properties dialog opens.
Move to Color tab and select a statistics type from the Statistics drop-down menu
and click OK.
The area binning layer is drawn based on the selected statistics type.
8.1.3.1 Statistics by: Bounding Geographical Bin Area

Statistics by Fixed Geographical Bin Area and Bounding Geographical Bin Area make
it possible to view
statistics on map in area bins. With Fixed Geographical Bin Area (see page 67), the
user can select an
area (e.g. a portion of the measurement route) and perform area binning on it. With
Bounding
Geographical Bin Area, area binning will be automatically performed on the entire
measurement route.
To produce statistics by bounding geographical bin area, select a measurement,
right-click on a
parameter, and select Statistics by | Bounding Geographical Bin Area.
It is also possible to view statistics based on Minimum, Maximum, Sample count,
Std. deviation and
Variance. The statistics are by default calculated based on Average. Go to the side
panel, right-click on
the parameter in the Layers view, and select Properties from the popup menu.

Move to Color tab and select a statistics type from the Statistics drop-down menu
and click OK.
Page 69
The area binning layer is drawn based on the selected statistics type.
8.1.4 Lee’s criteria sampling for scanner measurements

The Lee’s criteria sampling for scanner measurements feature enables distance-based
aggregation for
scanner data.
Note that Lee’s criteria sampling is available only if your license supports this
option.
Double-click on a parameter in the Measurements view.
The Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog opens. Define the distance in meters and select
the carrier(s)
included. Click Finish.
Note that distance 40λ should be used when running a query for the band. The
formula for wave
length =
Page 70
where v = the speed of light (about 3x108m/s) and f = frequency.

The average of the selected parameter is calculated for each aggregated distance
bin. Each bin
receives a time stamp and location based on the first event’s time stamp and
latitude/longitude of the
bin.
The distance-based aggregation is available for Ec/N0, RSCP, RX-level (RSSI), RSRP,
and RSRQ
metrics of a scanner.
Two mobile-related parameters give a distance-based value from the scanner

measurements to the
same cell the mobile device is using at a certain point.
Page 71
8.1.5 Parameter launchpad

To produce parameter statistics, such as Cumulation & density, Count, Average,
Minimum, Maximum,
Standard deviation, Variance, Mode, Median, Midrange, and Histogram, based on
measurement data,
select a parameter and click on the
view.
Page 72
button displayed at the bottom left corner of the Parameters

The Parameter Launchpad view opens.

Open in data view opens the parameter with
the settings defined in the sections
Presentation, Statistics and Details.
Apply filters, if selected, opens a dialog for
defining filters for the parameter after you have
defined all the parameter settings and selected
Open in data view.
Open in defines the data view type used in
displaying the parameter data.
Statistics (see below)
Details displays the parameter description if it
exists.
From the Statistics submenu, you can open

various parameter statistics in spreadsheet
format. To include more than one parameter
statistics type on the same spreadsheet, drag
and drop each statistics type on the
spreadsheet. Available statistics types include
Cumulation & density, Count, Average,
Minimum, Maximum, Standard deviation,
Variance, Mode, Median, Midrange,
Histogram, and Percentile.
Percentile value can be defined by entering a
number..
Apply filters, if selected, opens a dialog for
defining parameter filters once the parameter
is dragged and dropped onto a data view.
Weight by defines whether the statistics are
to be weighted by distance, by time, or by
sample (no weight).
Group by defines how the statistics are to be
grouped.
Page 73
8.1.6 Change Defaults

Through the Parameters view you can change the default color set and default graph
scales for each
parameter. Right-click on a parameter and select Change Defaults. Alternatively,
you can also
change defaults using the Parameter Launchpad (see Parameter launchpad).
The General tab of the Change Defaults dialog enables you to select a default color
set for the
parameter, select the image, and set the graph scale top and bottom values.
Page 74
The View tab of the Change Defaults dialog enables you to set the default data view
for the
parameter.
The Statistics tab of the Change Defaults dialog enables you to set the default
statistics for the
parameter. The settings displayed on the Statistics view depend on the selected
parameter. The
image below is an example of the Statistics view with Velocity as the selected
parameter. In this
example, Threshold and Condition are tied together, and Minimum, Maximum, Interval,
and
Direction dictate how the CDF/PDF is calculated. With the Up/Down setting you
define which end of
each interval is included, e.g. >0 and <= 25 or alternatively >= 0 and < 25. The
end that is included
is printed in the X axis of the graph.
The Drill down tab of the Change Defaults dialog enables you to select the drill
down workbook that
is being used by default when double-clicking on a parameter in the Parameters
view.
Some parameters’ Change Defaults dialog also include Parameters tab. In Parameters
tab you can
enter a default value which will be shown in filters.
Page 75
The CSV tab of the Change Defaults dialog enables you to choose if selecting map
output preference
is available for a CSV file parameter.
If this option is selected, when right-clicking on a CSV file parameter in the

Parameters view and
selecting Open In Map, the Select Columns dialog opens, allowing you to select
Route or Route
Coloring to be shown on the map. If the option is not selected, the Select Column
dialog will not
appear.
Page 76
8.2 Viewing measurement data in graphs

This use case describes the steps for viewing measurement data in various graphs.
It is assumed that
there are measurement files in the database.
Select a measurement in the workspace. You can locate a measurement file quickly by
typing the
name of the measurement file in the Filter field, which is marked by the red frame
below. This
filtering functionality for measurement files in the Workspace is especially useful
with a large number
of measurement files in the database, or in a specific folder.
Page 77
Select a measurement in the Workspace, right-click on a parameter and select Open |

In, e.g.
Graph.
¨
In the Choose Graph Type dialog, select the graph type in which you want to show
the parameter, in
this case a line graph.
Page 78
The BLER parameter is opened in a line graph.
8.3 Viewing measurement data on map

This use case describes the steps for viewing measurement data on map. For the
purposes of this use
case, it is assumed that there are measurement files with coordinates, BTS files,
and corresponding
maps in the database. For loading files to the database, see Adding files to the
database on page 34.
Page 79
8.3.1 Changing default map

To change default map (displayed in bold), right-click on the tootltip name on
Workspace view and
select Default Map from the menu.
Default map can also be changed from View | Options | Map | Default map type.
Default maps
include MapX, Live Map and Google Earth.
Page 80
8.3.2 Opening measurement files on map

In the Maps Folder
of the Workspace window, double-click on a map to open it. The map file is
loaded to the Analyze database.
The map view opens.
For adding more map layers to map view, see Use Case 11: Adding map layers and
saving layer
combinations as geosets.
Go to the Measurement file page in the Workspace view, and select a measurement
file. Then select a
parameter from the Parameters view, and drag it on the map.
Page 81
The measurement is shown on the map.
The route is opened on the map and colored using the default color set for the
selected parameter.
You can zoom in and out on the map with the mouse wheel. The side panel displays
the selected color
set.
8.3.3 Opening BTS files on map

Click the base station icon
the Base Stations view.
at the bottom of Workspace to switch from the Measurements view to
Drag a BTS file from the Workspace to the map.
Click OK when Nemo Analyze asks if the added BTS should be associated with the
route. The base
station icons are drawn.
BTS sites search (highlighted with a red box in the screenshot above) allows
entering several different
search criteria. For example, if you are looking for a site with certain scrambling
code and get many
results, you can fine down the search by leaving a space and entering another value
in the search,
such as the cell name. The search could look like this: 61 RY2.
Page 82
Note that BTS icons show differently depending on zoom level. When zooming
outwards, base stations
are no longer shown as BTS icons but as red dots:
To change the parameter color set used for coloring the BTS icons, right-click on
the BTS layer in the
side panel under Layers, and select Properties.
Page 83
The Properties dialog opens. Select the Color tab, change the setting of both
Parameter and Color
set drop-down menus, and click OK.
The BTS icons are colored based on the selected color set.
Page 84
8.3.4 Viewing notification icons on map

Notification icons enable specific measurement events to be viewed on map. Right-
click on the route
layer in the side panel (or directly on the measurement route on map) and select
Properties from the
popup menu.
The Properties dialog opens. Go to the Notifications tab. Select all notifications
that you are
interested in. For example, we might want to view Cell reselections.
Select the notifications you want to be displayed and click OK.

If the selected notifications occur in the measurement file, they are drawn on the
map as small icons.
Page 85
You can now zoom in on the map and move the current location marker on the
notifications. If all the
different views (line graphs, grids, maps, etc.) are synchronized, all data views
will jump to the same
point in the measurement, allowing you to analyze all relevant parameter data
before, during and
after the notification was logged.
8.3.5 Use Case 1: Viewing cell footprints, RSCP footprints, and LTE
footprints
Nemo Analyze can automatically create a cell footprint, an RSCP footprint, or an
LTE footprint map
plot for every cell measured. Cell/RSCP/LTE footprint is displayed for every cell
whose signal has been
among the three strongest at some point during the measurement session. The
footprint of each cell
is displayed on map on a separate page, allowing you to browse from footprint to
another and
immediately see both the footprint and the cell. Cell footprint/RSCP/LTE analysis
can be performed on
both UMTS scanner and mobile data.
Analysis will not work properly if there will be hundreds of pages in the results.
Therefore, it is
advisable to use filters to limit the amount of results. To view cell/RSCP/LTE
footprints, right-click a
measurement file in Workspace | Measurements | Measurements, and select Analyses |
Ec/NO
Cell Footprints (mobile) / Ec/NO Footprints (scanner) / RSCP Cell Footprints
(mobile) /
RSCP Cell Footprints (scanner) / RSRP Cell Footprints (mobile) / RSRP Cell
Footprints
(scanner) / RSRQ Cell Footprints (mobile) / RSRQ Cell Footprints (scanner) from the
popup
menu.
Page 86
The Analyses submenu also lists all workbooks listed in workbooks folder.
A dialog box allowing you to choose between Scrambling code filter and Channel
number filter
appears. You are also able to select if the color legend and the entire route is
shown.
Page 87
Select the filter of your choice and click OK.

The footprints view opens, displaying the footprint of each cell as a separate
page.
You can browse from cell to cell by selecting pages from the tabs below the map
view.
Page 88
8.3.6 Use Case 2: Viewing uplink voice quality server data

This use case describes the steps for viewing uplink voice quality server data
together with mobile
terminal (downlink) data from the same measurement session.
Step 1: Loading Voice Quality Measurement Data into the Database

Nemo Analyze correlates the UL MOS scores automatically from the server log file to
the mobile log
file. A prerequisite for this functionality is that both files are loaded into the
Nemo Analyze database,
and that the time in server and mobile log files is synchronized in the log files.
This can be
accomplished by using GPS time in the measurement tool and in the server using time
synchronization
services available online. See Nemo Server and Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Handy User
Manuals for more
information. Time synchronization can also be done manually. In time
synchronization, an accuracy of
around three seconds in the time sync is sufficient.
To load an uplink voice quality measurement session into the database, select File
| Measurement |
Open Measurement from the Ribbonbar.
Page 89
Select both the server measurement file and the mobile terminal measurement file.
You can do this
(by holding down the Shift key while selecting the files. Once both files have been
selected, click
Open.
Note: In order for the uplink server data to be displayed correctly, the database
must contain both the
server (UL) measurement file and the mobile terminal (DL) measurement file. Nemo
Analyze will
correlate these files automatically.
The files are loaded into the database. You can monitor loading progress by using
Activity.
Step 2: Running Queries on Uplink Voice Quality Server Data

Once both files have been loaded into the database, select the downlink mobile
terminal file (i.e. do
not select the uplink server file) in the Workspace, right-click on a relevant
audio quality parameter,
and right-click on a relevant audio quality parameter and select Open In | [Data
view].
Page 90
Page 91
A workbook is opened based on the measurement file.
8.3.7 Use Case 3: Viewing IP/UDP packet trace data

♦
Note: Microsoft® Network Monitor 3.4 must be installed BEFORE Nemo Analyze to
enable complete IP/UDP trace details to be displayed in Nemo Analyze. For
installing the Microsoft® Network Monitor 3.4, see Installing Microsoft® Network
Monitor 3.4 below.
Note: If Microsoft® Network Monitor 3.4 is nevertheless installed after Nemo

Analyze, Nemo Analyze’s Microsoft® Network Monitor 3.4 functionality can be
activated by copying the file NMAPI.dll from the folder C:\Program Files\Microsoft
Network Monitor 3\ to the folder C:\Program Files\Anite\Nemo Analyze.
Note: If Microsoft® Network Monitor 3.4 is not found on the PC or Nemo Analyze
has been installed before Microsoft® Network Monitor 3.4, Nemo Analyze will
display only a limited set of IP/UDP trace details.
With IP packet capturing, network packets sent between IP addresses are stored in
log files and can
be post-processed with a third party application such as Ethereal®. The IP packet
data is stored in a
separate file (.pcap) for each measurement terminal for which IP capturing is
enabled.
This use case describes the steps for viewing IP trace data based on a measurement
file and the
corresponding IP trace (.pcap) file. Both files must be from the same measurement
session with
identical time stamps. First, a relevant workbook (e.g. HSDPA full details) is
opened on the
measurement file. Next, a separate workbook on the IP trace file corresponding with
the measurement
Page 92
file. The two workbooks are automatically synchronized, enabling the correlation of
events on the
parameter level with events on the IP trace level.
♦
Note: In order for the synchronization of the two files to work, the time stamps of
the measurement file and the IP trace (.pcap) file must be identical, i.e. both
files
have to be from the same exact measurement session.
Step 1: Installing Microsoft® Network Monitor 3.4

Go to Microsoft website at <http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?
LinkID=103158&clcid=0x409> to
download the free Network Monitor installation package. Click the Download button
and select the
NM34_x64.exe installation file.
Once the installation file has been successfully downloaded, double-click on the
file.
The Open File – Security Warning dialog opens.
Select Run.
The Microsoft Network Monitor dialog box opens.
Click Yes to continue installation.
Page 93
The Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 Setup – Welcome… dialog opens.
Click Next.
The Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 Setup – End-User License Agreement dialog opens.
Select I accept the terms in the License Agreement option and click Next.
The Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 Setup – Choose Setup Type dialog opens.
Page 94
Select Typical.
The Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4 Setup – Ready to Install dialog opens.
Select Install.
Once the installation procedure has finished, the Microsoft Network Monitor 3.4
Setup – Completing
the Setup Wizard dialog opens. Select Finish.
Step 2: Open a Workbook Based on a Measurement File

Open a workbook based on a measurement file by right-clicking on the measurement
file in the Device
Menu and selecting a relevant workbook (e.g. HSDPA full details) from the popup
menu.
A workbook is opened based on the measurement file.
Page 95
Step 3: Load IP Trace Files (.pcap) into the Database

Next, select the IP Traces
icon from the panel below the Parameters view. The IP Traces page of
the Workspace opens. If there are no IP trace files on the IP Traces page, right-
click on the page
background and select Open from the popup menu.
Page 96
Browse for .pcap files, select the files you want to load to the database, and
click Open.
Step 4: Open an IP Trace Information Workbook Based on the Corresponding IP

Trace File (.pcap)
The IP Traces page displays all .pcap files stored in the database. Double-click on
the IP trace file that
corresponds with the measurement you opened the measurement file workbook based on
in Step 1.
The IP trace file is opened in a separate IP trace information workbook that is

automatically
synchronized with the measurement file workbook.
Page 97
Step 5: View Synchronized Measurement and IP Trace Data

Go to the measurement file workbook and select an event that is of interest to you
(e.g. a point in
time where Throughput suddenly drops).
Switch back to the IP trace workbook and observe the IP trace messages surrounding
the selected
event (i.e. the possible problem causes on the IP level).
Page 98
8.4 Parameter filtering

It is also possible to filter all parameters based on, for example, time and
region. Select a
measurement file, right-click a parameter in the Parameters view, and select Open
With Filters in |
[dataview]. Here we will use L3 signaling as an example.
An empty workbook, and the Filters dialog box to define the filtering criteria
appear.
Page 99
In the Filters dialog you can further limit the query results by adding different
filters. Filters can be
applied to parameters that are part of the query.
After selection, click Finish.

A grid with the parameter according to the specifications appears.
8.4.1 Filtering based on polygon area

With parameter filtering it is also possible to limit a query based on a user-
defined area, i.e. by
Polygon area selection. As a consequence, the results of a query will be limited to
a user-defined part
of a measurement route in the chosen data view. This is useful, for example, when
you want the
values of a parameter to be viewed with a value-based color set only on a part of
the route on a map.
In this case, the rest of the measurement route will be colored with a default
color. In this example we
will select Ec/N0 best active set as the parameter.
Page 100
Select a measurement file in the Workspace and type Ec/N0 best active set in the
Parameters view
filter field. Right-click on the parameter and select Open With Filters In | Map.
An empty workbook and the Analyze Wizard - Filters dialog box appear. In the dialog
box select
Add and then Area under Name. Finally, press the … tab.
Page 101
The Select Area dialog box appears.
Page 102
You can zoom in
and zoom out

By clicking
The Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog box appears. Click Finish.
A new workbook opens. The measurement route on the map is colored with the Ec/N0
color set over
the section of the route specified with the polygon area. The rest of the route is
colored with the
default color, here blue.
Page 103
8.4.2 Use Case 4: Global parameter filtering based on a secondary

parameter
Service providers often define the extent of coverage area using a specific
parameter as a threshold
value. In Nemo Analyze, it is possible to use this threshold value for filtering
out the irrelevant data
coming from outside coverage area. By setting a threshold condition for a parameter
value, you can
define a global filter that will be applied to all subsequent Nemo Analyze
operations (apart from
Crystal Reports report templates).
For the purposes of this use case, all data with Received Signal Code Power (RSCP)
of -100 or higher
will be considered measurement data from coverage area. The global filter created
based on this
condition will exclude all data with RSCP values lower than -100 from all
subsequent Nemo Analyze
operations. In other words, all Nemo Analyze operations will be filtered based on a
secondary
parameter, RSCP best active set. Filtering by secondary parameter enables the
filtering of a primary
parameter data set based on a selected secondary one. The resulting data set will
contain only those
values from the primary data set that coincide with the values in the secondary
one. All parts of the
primary data set that do not contain RSCP value of -100 or higher will not be
considered measurement
data from coverage area and thus will be excluded from the processed data set.
To define a global filter, select Utilities | Global Filters from the Ribbonbar.
The Global Filters dialog opens.
Page 104
To add a new filter, click Edit.

The Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog opens.
To add a filter, click Add.

An empty filter line is added.
Page 105
Select <Secondary parameter> from the Name drop-down menu. Click the … button in
the Value
column to browse for a secondary parameter.
The Analyze Wizard – Secondary Measurement Parameters dialog opens. Select the
parameter
RSCP best active set and click Next.
Another Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog opens.
Page 106
To add a filter, click Add. An empty filter line is added. Select the parameter
RSCP from the Name
drop-down menu. Next, select the operator >= (i.e. greater or equal) from the
operator drop-down
menu. Finally, enter the value -100 in the Value field.
Click Finish.
This returns you to the first Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog. Click Finish.
The Active global filters field of the Global Filters dialog now displays the
defined filter.
Page 107
All subsequent operations performed with Nemo Analyze during this session will be
filtered based on
the set threshold condition. To save the filter for use also during subsequent Nemo
Analyze sessions,
click Save.
The Save Filter dialog opens.
Click OK.
The Saved global filter sets field now displays the saved filter.
Page 108
To activate a saved filter set, select a saved filter set in the Saved global
filter sets and click the Set
Active button.
To remove a global filter, select the filter in the Saved global filter sets field
and click Delete.
It is also possible to set a particular cell as filter by right-clicking on map on

top of base station sector
and selection Create Global Filter From Cell ID... From then on, all workbooks and
queries will be
Page 109
limited in the way that results are returned only from those points where the cell
in question has been
serving.
Page 110
8.5 Filtering data and creating custom KPIs

Custom KPIs can be created either by correlating parameters using the Query Manager
or, to create
more complex KPIs, by using the KPI Workbench (see p. 356).
With the correlate parameters functionality it is possible to create events based
on complex search
criteria, create events showing problems and reasons for problems, and create a CSV
table from the
measurement data for export purposes.
You can create new Correlate parameters KPIs in the Query manager. In the
Ribbonbar, select Tools
| Query manager | Add… | Correlate parameters. The created KPI will be added to the
Userbranch in the Parameters view in the Workspace. The correlate parameters
functionality can also be
used for creating a custom KPI by right-clicking on a device in the Workspace, and
selecting
Correlate Parameters, and Next. In this case the new KPI will not be saved.
Right-click on a device in the Workspace, and select Correlate Parameters.
In the Correlate Parameters dialog, select the parameters that you want to
correlate. You can add
two or more parameters in the Selected view.
There are three different Modes available: Show values when first parameter changes
(left outer join),
Show values when any of the parameters changes (outer join), and Show values when
all parameters
are valid (inner join).
Page 111
The Show values when first parameter changes (left outer join) mode creates an
output row
for every value of the first selected parameter. For other selected parameters, it
gives the current,
previous, or next value from the time stamp of the first parameter. This mode can
used to find all
events of a certain type in the measurement data, and the values of other
parameters at the time the
event occurred. For example, it can be used to find all dropped calls (the first
parameter), the last TX
power, Best active Ec/N0, and Best active RSCP values prior to each drop.
After selecting the parameters to be correlated, click Next. In this example you
can find six different
parameters in the Selected view, Call dropped, Percentage of “DL power up”
commands, Percentage
of “UL power up” commands, Ec/N0 best active set, and RSCP best active set.
Select the data view in which the data will be displayed, for example, a grid, and
click Finish. The
correlation data is opened in the selected data view.
The Show values when any of the parameters changes (outer join) mode creates an
output row
when any of the selected parameters changes. This mode can also be used when
exporting data to
Page 112
Excel. In the example below, there are three parameters in the Selected view, RX
level full, Ec/N0
best active set, and BLER DL. Click Next. The correlation data is opened in the
selected data view.
As you can see, there are no values for RX level full and RAC in rows 4600-4616,
and no values for
Ec/N0 and BLER DL in rows 4614-4620.
Page 113
The Show values when all parameters are valid (inner join) mode creates an output
row when
any of the selected parameters changes, and all the parameters are valid. This mode
can be used
when generating input for scatter graph, or when creating events based on custom
search criteria. In
the example below you can see a custom KPI: all rows where Ec/N0 < -7, BLER DL, and
RSCP < -79
are shown.
Page 114
8.6 Drill-down
The Troubleshooting toolkit with drill-down is an optional component of Nemo
Analyze. When a query
has been performed with one of the Troubleshooting parameters from the Parameters
view, it is
possible to drill down into further event detail from the data view created by the
query.
With pie charts, you can do this by double-clicking a sector of the pie chart or a
sector color in the pie
chart legend. As each sector represents a problem cause, double-clicking a sector
will open a grid with
a list of all problem events caused by that particular problem cause. Each drill-
down from the same
chart will open a new tab in the same window. These tabs are displayed on the left
side of the window
with the colors of the corresponding sectors.
Open tabs representing results of drill-downs

from different sectors of this pie chart. The colors
correspond with the pie chart sector colors.
For example, green color represents RACH Failure, unknown reason on the pie chart
above. To drill
down to the details of events where a RACH failure has occurred because of an
unknown reason,
double-click either the green sector on the chart or the text Failure, unknown
reason on the chart
legend.
This opens a grid where all failure events in the measurement data resulting from
an unknown reason
are gathered (see below). This grid will be represented by a green tab on the left
of the window in the
pie chart view.
Page 115
Click blue arrow to return to

the pie chart.
Click green tab to return to

this grid from the pie chart.
Before drilling down into a single row of a grid, you can set a time range for log
entries before and
after the selected event that are to be included in the drill-down. To set a time
range, select Utilities
| Drill-down from the Ribbonbar and enter the time range in seconds in the Before
and After fields.
To drill down into a single row of a grid, either double-click or right-click on

the selected row. Doubleclick will perform the drill-down if there are default
drill-down parameters that are compatible with the
measurement data on that particular row. If however there are not, you can either
right-click on the
selected row and select Drill-Down | Pick Parameter to drill down into the data on
that row with
other parameters, or open the row in a separate workbook by right-clicking on the
row and selecting
Drill-Down | [workbook] (e.g. UMTS | UMTS Troubleshooting.)
Page 116
Each drill-down opens the selected time range of measurement data with the selected
new parameters
in new tabs on the second tab row.
Drill-down tab
The selected time
range
8.6.1 Drilling Down from Map Data view

The Troubleshooting toolkit with drill-down is an optional component of Nemo
Analyze. When a
parameter is on opened on map, it is possible to drill down into further event
detail by opening a
workbook on a selected point of the measurement route.
Page 117
To drill-down from map data view, select a point of a route you want to see details
on by left-clicking
the position icon. Right-clicking enables you to pick a parameter you wish to drill
down further. This
way you can also drill down multiple parameters for comparison.
To further define the extent or the time range of the target portion of the route
(i.e. a time range
surrounding the time stamp of the current location of the position icon), select
Utilities | Drill-down
from the Ribbonbar, and enter the time range in seconds in the Before and After
fields.
Page 118
Right-click on the position icon, and select Drill-Down | [select system] | [Select
workbook]
The drill-down workbook is added as a tab to the original map data view.
Page 119
To return to the map view, click the
tab in the upper left corner of the workbook.
8.6.2 Drilling down from event type parameters in Map Data view
When an event type parameter is on opened on map, it is possible to drill down into
further event
detail on a failure event displayed on map.
To open an event query on map, select a measurement file in the Measurements
section and a
relevant failure-related parameter from the Parameters view.
To search for failure-related event parameters from the Parameters view, type the
word drop or
failure in the filter field above the Parameters view.
Right-click on the relevant failure parameter and select Open In | Map from the
popup menu.
The results of the event query are opened on map.
Page 120
To drill down to a failure event, double click on the event symbol.

The drill-down workbook added as a tab to the original map data view.
To return to the map view, click the
Page 121
tab in the upper left corner of the workbook.

8.7 Exclude events

With Nemo Analyze it is possible to exclude events from the results that do not
want to be included.
Right-click on the top of a measurement and a pop-up will open. Select Exclude
Events.
Page 122
Exclude Events dialog opens.
Next, go to Utilities | Edit. Global Filters dialog opens.
Click Edit….
Analyze Wizard filters dialog opens. Select Add. Then select Exclude Event from the
drop down
menu, <>, and 1 for value. Exclude event <> 1 is added to Global Filters.
When you run results for parameters, those events that you are not interested in
will not be included
in the results.
For example, it is possible to remove calls that have failed due to a measuring
system error, from a
file.
Page 123
8.8 Data views

In this chapter are explained the various types of data views available in Nemo
Analyze. In Nemo
Analyze synchronization is used to keep the different data views in sync. When you
click any view
containing data, all the other views jump to the same point of time. Nemo Analyze
also offers the
convenience of the so-called drag & drop function. You can easily drag measurements
or
measurement parameters from the Workspace in the various data views. Thus, one data
view can
contain many different parameters from one or more measurement files.
When you right-click on any of the data views, a popup menu will open up. The menu
offers access to
all functions and tools related to that data view. The contents of the menu vary
depending on the data
view type (graph, grid, map, etc.) but some of the items are common to all data
views.
8.9 Graphs
8.9.1 Graph Tools menu
♦
Note: The Graph menu is displayed as part of the Ribbonbar only when a graph is
open and in current use in Nemo Analyze. When you select another workbook or
window, the Graph menu is closed automatically.
Reset empties the data view. All the data and layout settings are removed.
Properties enables you to edit the graph layout.
Side panel enables you to hide and display the side panel on the right-hand side of
the grid. For more
information, see Side Panel on page 130.
Graph type enables you to change the type of a graph.
enables you to change the mouse cursor to an arrow and scroll the view. The same
function
Scroll
is available in the graph side panel.
Zoom
enables you to zoom the view. Hold down the left mouse button and drag to the right
to
zoom in. Hold down the left mouse button and drag to the left to zoom out. The same
function is
available in the graph side panel.
Zoom In
and Zoom Out
enable you to zoom in and out one step at a time. The same functions
are available in the graph side panel. You can also zoom in and out on the view
with the mouse wheel.
Optimization reduces the time needed for the drawing of the graph. This function is
enabled in
Options | Graph by default.
Mode
defines how the different layers in the graph are displayed

(single/stacked/automatic).
enables you to switch the 3D mode on/off. The same function is available in the
graph
3D mode
toolbar. Note that this function is available for bar graphs only.
Filled
enables you to fill the graph with color.
Pick parameter enables you to add more data in data views.

Page 124
Add function enables you to add an averaging function.

Add task enables you to add a new task.
Bin data
enables you to define data bins for scatter graphs and color grids. In the Bin Data
dialog, select the Enabled option to activate data binning. When data binning is
activated, the scatter
graph or color grid is divided into four data bins (defined by bin limits). For
each data bin, the
percentage of the samples out of all samples, or the number of samples in that bin
is displayed.
Reference Lines | Horizontal
and Reference Lines | Vertical
enable you to add a vertical
or horizontal reference line in the graph. You can move the line by dragging with
your mouse. The
same functions are available in the graph side panel.
8.9.2 Graph popup menu

From the graph popup menu you will find all graph-related tools and functions.
Right-click on a graph
to access the menu.
8.9.3 Change Graph Type

With the Change Graph Type function you can change the type of a graph.
In the Choose Graph Type dialog, select the graph type, line, bar, scatter, pie,
color grid, or surface
graph, from the selection and the graph is opened
Page 125
8.9.4 Reset
With the Reset function you can empty the data view. All the data and layout
settings are removed.
8.9.5 Query
With the Query tool you can change the data displayed in the data view. With the
Cut, Copy, and
Paste functions you can copy or cut an existing query from one data view and paste
it to another. This
is especially useful if you want to open another view with the same data but with a
different graph
type or copy data from a graph to a grid. The copied queries are available in the
Query Clipboard.
8.9.6 Pick Parameter

With the Pick Parameter tool you can add more data in data views. In graphs a new
layer is added,
in grids the new parameter is added in the same grid, and in maps a new route is
added. Right-click
on the graph and select Pick Parameter.
In the Pick Parameter dialog, select the measurement file that you are currently
viewing and then
select the new parameter that will be displayed in the data view. Click OK to add
the new parameter.
In the Filter field you can type the name of a specific parameter so that only that
parameter will be
shown. For example, in the picture below, you can see all the parameters starting
with ´Missing
Neighbor. This is useful for locating a parameter when the list is long.
Page 126
8.9.7 Add Function

With the Add Function feature you can add some averaging functions in graphs.
Color defines the color of the function line.

Source defines the parameter for which the averaging function is performed.
Function defines what kind of averaging function is added.
Average calculates the average value for the selected parameter.
Exponential moving average calculates the average value using the following
formula:
2 / Period value + 1. Period refers to the number of samples included in the
calculation.
High calculates the highest value for the selected parameter.
Low calculates the lowest value for the selected parameter.
Median calculates the median value for the selected parameter.
Page 127
Mode calculates the mode value, i.e., the most common value for the selected
parameter.
Moving average calculates the moving average value for the defined period (number
of samples).
Trend calculates the trend line for the selected parameter.
Period refers to the number of samples included in the calculation.
Line width defines the line width of the function layer.
8.9.8 Add Reference Line

With the Add Reference Line tools
you can add a vertical or horizontal reference line in the
graph. You can move the line by dragging with your mouse. The same functions are
available in the
graph side panel.
8.9.9 Tool
Under the Tool item you will find two graph viewing tools: scroll and zoom. With
the Scroll tool you
can change the mouse cursor to an arrow and scroll the view. The same function is
available in the
graph side panel
With the Zoom tool you can zoom the view. Hold down the left mouse button and drag
to the right to
zoom in. Hold down the left mouse button and drag to the left to zoom out. The same
function is
available in the graph side panel
With the Zoom In

and Zoom Out
toolbar buttons you can zoom in and out one step at a time.
The same functions are available in the graph side panel. You can also zoom in and
out on the view
with the mouse wheel.
8.9.10
Mode
When you have several layers open in a graph, you can change the layout of the
page. Mode defines
how the different layers in the graph are displayed.
In Single mode, the layers are displayed overlapping each other as in the example
below. The scale is
displayed only for the active layer (highlighted with light-blue color in the
Layers panel on the right).
Page 128
In Stacked mode, the layers are displayed one layer after another and the scale is
displayed for each
parameter. You can change the order of layers in graph by right-clicking a layer in
the Layers panel
on the right and selecting Move Up or Move Down.
In Automatic mode, all layers that have the same Y-axis are automatically stacked
into one graph
(similar to “Single” mode). Layers that have different scale are shown in “Stacked”
mode.
Page 129
8.9.11
Side Panel
With the Side Panel option you can hide and display the side panel on the right-
hand side of the
graph.
The Tools panel contains tools for viewing graphs. See page 128 for more
information on the zooming
tools and page 128 on the reference line tools.
Page 130
With the Bin data

tool you can define data bins for scatter graphs and color grids. In the Bin
Data dialog, select the Enabled option to activate data binning. When data binning
is activated, the
scatter graph or color grid is divided into four data bins (defined by bin limits).
For each data bin, the
percentage of the samples out of all samples, or the number of samples in that bin
is displayed.
Bin limits defines the horizontal and vertical limits for the data bins.
Output format defines if the data binning values are shown in percentages or the
number of
samples.
In the example below, the horizontal bin limit is 50, vertical limit -12, and the
output format is
percentage. The percentage values are displayed in the corners.
The Layers panel displays the layers that are currently open in the view. When you
add more
parameters in the view, a new layer is created for each parameter. You can remove
layers from the
view by clicking the Close button (x) and hide layers by clearing the respective
option.
The Numerical Data panel displays selected information from the measurement.
Page 131
8.9.12
3D Mode
With the 3D Mode function you can switch the 3D mode on/off. The same function is
available in the
graph toolbar
. Note that this function is available for bar graphs only.
8.9.1 Line Graph Filled

In line graphs, select the Filled option in the graph popup menu to show the graph
as "filled".
Page 132
8.9.2 Group Values

Group Values enables you to group bars in bar graphs by parameter rather than by x
axis values.
To enable/disable Group Values, right-click on the bar graph and select Group
Values from the popup
menu.
If Group Values is disabled, bars are sorted based on their x axis values. In the
screenshot below, the
bars are sorted based on their x axis values, i.e. Scrambling Code/Channel Number.
If Group Values is enabled, bars are sorted by parameter. In the screenshot below,
the bars are
sorted based on parameter, i.e. Ec/N0 Active Set and Ec/N0 Monitored Set).
Page 133
8.9.3 Graph Properties

In the Graph Properties dialog you can edit the graph layout. These settings are
the same for all
graph types.
Mode defines if the layers are
stacked, in single, or in automatic
mode.
Show side panel hides/displays
the data panel on the right-hand
side of the data view.
Group values defines the grouping
of values belonging to the same
layer when multiple layers are
displayed in the same chart.
Applicable for bar graph only.
Axes defines the scales for the left
and right x axis.
3D defines the 3D view of the
chart.Orthogonal and Angle define
Coloring mode defines the

coloring mode for the graph.
Transparency defines the
transparency of the graph.
Chart color defines the color for
the chart.
Margin color defines the color for
the margin.
Gradient enables gradient coloring
of the chart background and
margin areas.
Page 134
The Layers tab displays a list of

all layers open in the graph. You
can add and remove layers.
Double-click a layer name or
select the layer from the list and
click Modify to access the Layer
Properties dialog.
8.9.4 Layer Properties

Right-click on a graph and select Properties. In the Graph Properties dialog, go to
the Layers tab and
double-click the layer name.
The Layer tab in the Layer Properties dialog is common for all graph types but some
of the options
might be missing for some graph types. If there are graph type specific settings,
they are found in the
second tab. Note that all graph types do not have any special settings so there
might be only one tab
in the Layer Properties dialog. The graph type specific settings are explained in
the following chapters.
Name defines the layer name. The
name is displayed at the bottom of
the data view.
Show marks displays the
parameter values in small labels on
the graph.
Title (on x-tab) defines a name
for the axis.
When the Scale automatically to
values option is selected, the
software checks what values exist
for the parameter in the file and
scales the axes accordingly.
Alternatively you can define the
Top and Bottom scales manually.
Page 135
Parameter tab allows you to add

filters, and modify existing filters and
user-definable attributes. For
instance, with N parameters (e.g.
Ec/N0 Nth best), an N-based filter
such as N = 1 is automatically set. To
display the 2nd best cell instead of
the default 1st best, change the filter
value from N = 1 to N = 2.
Default color defines the default

color for the line or bar.
Color set colors the line/bar
according to the selected color set.
Page 136
8.9.5 Layer properties for line graphs
Line width defines the line thickness

in pixels.
When the Hold value constant until
next option is selected, the line is
drawn at the same level until the
value changes. See examples
below.
When the Show value points option
is selected, value points are shown
in the line graph.
In the example below, the Hold value constant until next option is not selected.
In the example below, the Hold value constant until next option is selected.
Page 137
8.9.6 Layer properties for bar graphs

Style defines the shape (rectangle,
ellipse, diamond, etc.) in which bars
are displayed in the graph.
Sorting defines the order in which
the bars are displayed in the graph.
The bars can be sorted in ascending
or descending order based on the
values on the X or Y axis.
8.9.7 Layer properties for scatter graphs
Mode defines which results are

displayed in the scatter graph.
Style defines the scatter shape.
Page 138
8.9.8 Use Case 5: Multiple graph layers

You can have as many layers as you like open in a graph. The example graph below
has three layers
open in stacked mode.
If you have many layers open, it may come in handy to resize the page to fit even
more layers in the
graph. Right-click on the graph and select Page | Properties.
Page 139
In the Page Properties dialog, go to the Page tab. With the Fixed Size setting you
can define the
size of the page.
If the Fit to window option is selected, all the layers are displayed in the
visible area of the page.
This means that when a new layer is added, the space for each layer gets smaller.
With the Fixed size option you can define an exact size in pixels for the page.
This will give more
space for each layer. With the scroll bar you can scroll up and down the page to
view all layers.
When you have two layers in single mode you can select to view the scale for both
of them. Right-click
on the graph and select Properties.
Page 140
In the Graph Properties dialog, go to the Graph tab. In the left and right Axes
setting select the
two layers.
In this graph the

left axis displays
scales for Ec/No
best active set, and
the right axis for RX
level full.
Page 141
8.9.9 Use Case 6: Notification icons in graphs

You can view notification icons in graphs to notify you of special measurement
events. Right-click on a
graph and select Pick Parameter.
From the Pick Parameter dialog, select Notifications and markers and click OK.
From the Notifications Properties dialog, select the notifications that you want to
view in the graph
and click OK. It is also possible to define the pixel offset.
Page 142
The notification icons are displayed in the graph.
8.9.10
Use Case 7: Correlating parameters using color grids and

surface graphs
Color grid and surface graphs are graph types designed for correlating two
parameters. For the
purposes of this use case, we will describe correlating parameters in a color grid.
However, all of this
information is also applicable with surface graphs. In addition to the default
parameter pairs (such as
Rx quality sub vs. Rx level sub) that are suggested when you right-click on an
empty color grid and
select Pick parameter, you can also define your own parameter pairs.
Page 143
To do this, create a new color grid by selecting View | Add Workbook | Graph from
the Ribbonbar
and once the empty data view opens, right-click on it, select Change Graph Type
from the popup
menu and select Color grid from the available graphs. Alternatively, if you already
have a graph
open, you can right-click on it, select Change Graph Type from the popup menu and
select Color
grid.
Next, right-click on the empty color grid, select Correlate Parameters from the
popup menu and a
Correlate Parameters dialog opens.
Scope defines the measurement data included in the color grid.

Color set defines the color set for the color grid.
X Parameter page defines the properties of X parameter.
Parameter defines the X parameter.
With Filters, you can define additional filters for the parameter.
Minimum defines the minimum value for the parameter (see using filters).
Page 144
Maximum defines the maximum value for the parameter.

Steps defines the number of steps on the color grid scales.
Y Parameter page (see X parameter)
After defining all the relevant values in the Correlate Parameters dialog, click OK
and a color grid is
created.
8.10 Grids
Grids can be used to display all sorts of data. The data is displayed in numerical
format in userdefined columns. You can export grid data to MS Excel or to a text
file. You can also use color sets to
highlight certain data in the grid.
The first three items in the grid popup menu, Reset, Query, and Pick Parameter, are
the same as
in the graph popup menu. See page 126 for more information on them. Play Audio
Sample is
displayed only with grids containing an audio quality sample file column.
Page 145
8.10.1
Side Panel
hand side of the grid.
With the Search function, you can perform searches in grid views for text and
values. Boolean
operators are supported. You can highlight, filter in, or filter out matches.
Type in the search string in the Find field, select the columns that will be
included in the search, and
define if the search results should have matching case. Select the Highlight
matches option if you
want the matching cells highlighted. When the Filter in option is selected, only
the search matches
will be visible. When the Filter out option is selected, the search matches will be
hidden.
With the Search decoded messages option, you can search for grid entries based on a
value in the
decoded entry data (displayed in the Information panel). In the example below, both
Search
decoded messages and Filter in options are selected. Thus, only the two grid rows
containing the
searched decoded information are displayed.
Page 146
add more
parameters in the view, a new layer is created for each parameter. You can remove
layers from the
view by clicking the Close button (x).
The Information panel displays the selected message in decoded format. If you want
to view the
decoded data in a separate view, double-click the message or right-click on the
message and select
Row Details.
Page 147
8.10.2
Row Details
With the Row Details function you can decode grid data. The decoded data is opened
in an Info View.
You can also use double-click to decode grid data.
8.10.3
Export Data to
With the Export Data to function you can export grid data to MS Excel, text file,
MapInfo Tab file,
and Google KML-File. When you export data to a MapInfo Tab or Google KML-file, you
can then open
the file as a route on a map.
Select the appropriate option, and the exported data is saved on a file. Below is
an example of
exported data in an Excel sheet.
If you want to export multiple parameters so that each parameter is in its own
column in an Excel
sheet, first correlate the parameters and view the results in a grid. Then export
the data. Note that
only visible data is exported. In the Grid Properties dialog, you can select the
visible parameters, e.g.,
latitude and longitude.
Additionally, you can copy and paste any query from any control into a grid control
where it can be
exported. Right-click on a control and select Query | Copy. Then go to the grid,
right-click on the grid
and select Query | Paste.
Page 148
8.10.4
Grid Properties
In the Grid Properties dialog you can make various settings to the grid layout and
select a color set.
From the Visible columns list, you can select the columns to be displayed.
To change the order of columns, select the column you want to move and use the
arrow buttons on
the right to move it.
When Use coordinate projection is selected it is possible to choose which
coordinate projection is
used from the dropdown menu. The default coordinate projection is EPSG: 4326 WGS84.
Nemo
Analyze supports more than 4000 coordinate projections, such as Lambert 2, EPSG:
27572 (see the
screenshot above).
Add adds a parameter to the grid.

Delete removes a parameter from the grid.
Page 149
To define a color set for a grid column, select the column name, click the
button that appears, and
select a color set for the grid column from the drop-down menu. For more
information, see use case
Use Case 8: Color sets in grids
Show heading hides/displays the column titles at the top of the grid view.
Vertical text in heading option turns the column headings vertically.
Show row numbers hides/displays the row numbers at the beginning of each row.
Show time intervals hides/displays also the time interval in the Time column on
each row.
Font defines the font, font style, and font size used in the grid.
Page 150
8.10.5
Use Case 8: Color sets in grids
In addition to maps, you can use different color sets for different columns in
grids to make the data
presentation more visual. In grids the color sets work as bar graphs. This use case
describes how to
use a color set in a grid.
Right-click on the grid and select Properties.
In the Properties dialog, select the Color Sets tab. Next, select the column you
want to apply a color
set to and click the
Page 151
button.
Select the appropriate color sets for the columns from the drop-down menu and click
OK.
In the example below, Scr. Code and Ec/N0 columns are colored with the appropriate
color sets.
Page 152
The selected columns display the selected color sets. The size and color of the bar
in each cell
correlates with the parameter value.
Alternatively you can select the Color whole cell option in the Color Sets tab of
the Grid Properties
dialog. Using this setting, the whole cell will be colored and only the color of
the cell will indicate the
value.
Page 153
8.10.6
Use Case 9: Play audio sample
Nemo audio quality measurement files include a sample of received audio quality.
This makes it
possible to compare the audio quality of the received sample with that of the
original sent sample.
To play the audio sample, select an audio quality measurement from the measurements
and the
parameter Audio Quality Sample File Name UL from the Parameters view. Right-click
on the parameter
and select Open In | Grid from the popup menu.
Page 154
The measurement opens on a grid. Right-click on the row with the audio sample you
want to hear and
select Play Audio Sample from the popup menu.
Page 155
8.10.7
Use Case 10: Using L3 and RRC message search

parameters
To search values of particular type from decoded L3 and RRC signaling messages,
first select a
measurement file in Workspace | Measurements | Measurements. Then, select a search
parameter depending on your need, e.g. L3 signaling parameter search.
Double-click on the selected search parameter.
Page 156
Enter search text (e.g. Short MAC value) and search message (e.g. SERVICE_REQUEST)
and select
finish.
Parameter name allows the user to define a name for the column that displays the
searched values
in the result data set (see below).
Page 157
8.11 Maps
Nemo Analyze incorporates the following mapping methods; MapInfo-format (.tab) maps
based on the
MapX engine, KML format-based live maps, Nokia Maps with Street, Satellite and
Terrain maps (part
of the Nemo Analyze Professional package), WMS map sources, WMTS map sources, and
ArcGIS
MapServer sources. Maps can be used to display the measurement route, base station
icons, and
notification icons. The route can be colored based on parameter values.
8.11.1
Viewing in live maps
Nemo Analyze allows you to view measurements on KML format-based live maps, Google
Maps,
Google Earth, Nokia maps, and OpenStreetMaps. An internet connection is required
for viewing
measurements on live maps. The map tiles are retrieved as needed when map is
opened, zoomed, or
panned.
It is also possible to use some additional map services that are available with the
Nemo Analyze setup
package. The additional services, Web Map Service (WMS), Web Map Tile Service
(WMTS), and ArcGIS
map sources, make it possible to utilize more than 100 high-resolution aerial image
and terrain
elevation data sources, including US Geological Service and several other GIS
servers worldwide.
Import the settings configurations for these map services by selecting in Nemo
Analyze Settings | C:
|Nemo Tools | Nemo Analyze | Map Configurations. Select a map service from the list
and click
Open. Finally, select OK in the Import Settings dialog. The imported map services
can be found from
the Maps tab of the Workspace.
In Live maps it is possible to set a default “home” location. This can be done by
zooming into
particular place, then right-clicking and selecting Set As Default Location.
Live maps can be used the same way as regular MapInfo maps. Data and base stations
can be plotted
on the map and data can be dragged to the map as in MapInfo maps. When playing back
Page 158
measurement data, the cursor is seen on the map and lines are drawn to the
connected base stations.
Live maps can be found from the Maps tab of the Workspace.
Maps can be used to display the measurement route, base station icons, and
notification icons. The
route can be colored based on parameter values.
OpenStreetMap is included in the Nemo Analyze Professional feature package.
OpenStreetMap is a
free map resource available globally. The maps are updated with the same open
source principle as,
for example, Wikipedia. At the moment, the level of details in OpenStreetMap is
similar to Google
Maps with Street View for the most part. The following figure illustrates
OpenStreetmap data overlay:
Google Maps is an optional feature. It incorporates a street view, a satellite

view, a hybrid map of
satellite and streets, and a physical map with terrain elevation illustrated.
Page 159
Google Hybrid map with route overlay:
With WMS maps you need to first import the settings from the file used.
After importing the settings the WMS maps are visible on the Maps workspace.
Open a WMS map and go to Properties | Modify to see the necessary steps for map
configuration.
However, it is recommended to use ArcGIS services if available as they are simpler
to configure.
Page 160
8.11.2
Google Street View
If a problem has occurred during data gathering, it is possible to check

measurement route spots with
the help of Google Street View. Google Street View enables exploring the route
spots through 360degree street-level imagery.
Select Maps page from the Workspace and double-click Google Streets to open the
Google Street
View. After this, drag and drop a measurement file from Workspace | Measurements
onto the map.
Right-click on the route and select Show Street View On Route Point from the popup
menu.
Page 161
The view is split into two parts as illustrated below:
Hide Google Street View by right-clicking on the route and selecting Hide Street
View from the pop
up menu.
With Google maps you are also able to view elevation on visible part of the active
route. Right-click on
active route, and select Show Route Elevation from the pop up menu.
8.11.3
Google Earth
Google Earth enables ground-level navigation with 3D models of buildings on the

route spot. Google
Earth has three 'modes': normal sky view, Street View (pegman) and ground-level
view.
Select Maps page from the Workspace and double-click Google Earth. After this, drag
and drop a
measurement file from Workspace | Measurements onto the map to show the route on
the map in
sky view.
To see view street view of the route, drag the pegman to the route. To toggle
between Street View
and a ground-level view that allows for intuitive navigation on the ground level,
click the icons of the
top of the image.
Page 162
8.11.4
♦
Map Tools menu
Note: The Map menu is displayed as part of the Ribbonbar only when a map is
open and in current use in Nemo Analyze. When you select another workbook or
window, the Map menu is closed automatically.
Refresh enables you to refresh the map view.

Properties enables you to customize the map view.
Side panel
Arrow
enables you to hide and display the side panel on the right-hand side of the grid.
enables you to select items on the map view.
Zoom in and Zoom out

views with the mouse wheel.
Measure distance
enable you to zoom the view. You can also zoom in and out on the
enables you to measure the distance between two points selected on map.
Highlight value
enables you to highlight selected values on map route. First open the Color tab
of the Route Properties dialog and set Default Color as Mode and select a parameter
from the
Parameter drop-down menu. Then click on the route with the Highlight value tool and
the Highlight
Value dialog will open. The dialog displays all the values of the selected event
type. From the list, pick
the value that you would like to be highlighted and select a color for that value.
Click OK and the
value is colored in the selected value.
Draw polygon
enables you to create a polygon area by clicking on the map. The polygon is
closed by clicking on the start point of the polygon.
Show Elevation
enables you to draw a line on a map, according to which elevation is shown in the
bottom of the screen.
Page 163
Generate colorset
generates a colorset.
Export to KML enables you to export a measurement route from Nemo Analyze map to
Google Earth
in KML format.
Zoom to layers
Folder from area
extends zoom to layers.

creates a folder from an area.
Polygon region
enables you to create polygon area by clicking on the map. Polygon is closed by
double-clicking the end point of the polygon.
Area binning
enables you to define an area on a map which you can run statistics on in the form
of bins. The results are displayed on the map as a new semi-transparent layer.
Distance binning
enables you to define a map area in which the measured route is divided into
segments set by you. You can run statistics based on these segments in the form of
bins. The results
are displayed on the map as a new semi-transparent layer.
Delta plotting
enables you to compare the parameter values of two measurement groups from a
same route by defining an area on a map (e.g. a portion of the measurement route).
For more
information on Delta Plotting, see the topic Use Case 14: Comparing two groups of
measurements
from the same route on map.
Auto centering
Route names
enables you to force the map to be always centered on the current location.
when activated, displays route names on the map.
Current position
displays the current position and direction on the map.
Highlight active route

the map.
displays the currently selected route highlighted so it is easy to see on
Optimized drawing
improves the performance of the route drawing on the map. However, on
rare occasions with some projections it may result in skewed route plot. In such
case, deselect this
option.
Scale bar
displays a distance scale bar on the map.
Select map: The drop-down menu in Map | Maps enables you to change the map type of
the active
map workbook.
Page 164
8.11.5
♦
Map popup menu
Note: Depending on which map is used the popup menu contains different options.
The first items in the map popup menu, Refresh, Reset, Query, and Pick Parameter
are the same as in
the graph popup menu.
8.11.6
Add
Under the Add item you will find options you can add on a map view. With the Add
Map Layer
function you can add a map layer in the same map view.
With the Add Measurement function you can add another measurement file on the same
map.
Select the file from the Add Measurement dialog and click OK.
You can also filter the measurements. The new route will be displayed in addition
to the existing
one(s).
With the Add Frame and Add Comment functions you can add frames and comments on the
map
view. A frame is a resizable window that can contain any of the available data view
types. For
example, you can open the color legend in a frame.
Page 165
A comment is a fixed-size window that is attached to certain coordinates on a map.

If you scroll the
map, the comment window will move as well.
You can remove frames and comments by right-clicking on them and selecting Frame |
Remove or
Comment | Remove.
8.11.7
Find
If you require a more detailed map from the same location, right-click on the route
and select Find |
Map at Route or right-click anywhere on the map and select Find Map at Position.
Note that the Find feature only works with raster maps.
The Map Search dialog will be opened with the matching maps. You can choose whether
the new
map is displayed in a new workbook (Open) or as a layer (Add Layer) on the same
map. Nemo
Analyze will search for the maps from the location you specified for maps in the
Options dialog box
(View | Tools | Options | Environment | Default Paths).
In the example below, the new map is pasted on top of the existing map as a new
layer.
Page 166
8.11.8
Generate color set
See Automatic generation of color sets
8.11.9
Export to KML file
To export a measurement route from Nemo Analyze map to Google Earth in KML format,
in map data
view, right-click on the map and select Export To KML -File from the popup menu.
Alternatively, you can right-click on the route and select Export Data To | Google
KML File from the
popup menu.
Page 167
The Save As dialog opens.
To save the route as a Google KML file, type in a file name in the File name field
and click Save.
To open a KML file with Google Earth, go to Google Earth and select File | Open
from the Google
Earth main menu. In the Open dialog, select a KML file and click Open.
Google Earth displays the route complete with color sets, notification icons, etc.
Page 168
In some cases, Google Earth may not be able to display the exported data in OpenGL
mode. To switch
to Direct X mode, select Tools | Options from the Google Earth main menu bar.
The Google Earth Options dialog opens. Select Direct X in Graphics Mode section and
click OK.
To apply the changes, restart Google Earth.
8.11.10
Zoom to Layers
Zooms the map to show all layers on the map.
8.11.11
Create New Folder From This Area
This function enables you to create a new folder from the area.
8.11.12
Set As Default Location
This function enables you to set the area as the default location.
8.11.13
Show Street View on Location
This option shows you street view on location.
8.11.14
Hide Street View
Hides the street view from the map.
8.11.15
Side Panel - Map
hand side of the
map.
Page 169
The Tools panel provides you with controls for manipulating the map view. The
function of each tool
is described below.
With the Arrow

With the Pan
tool you can select items on the map view.

tool you can scroll the map.
With the Zoom In and Zoom Out

on the views with the mouse wheel.
tools you can zoom the view. You can also zoom in and out
With the Area Binning

tool you can define an area on a map which you can run statistics on in
the form of bins. The results are displayed on the map as a new semi-transparent
layer.
Distance binning
bins. The results
With the Statistics From Polygon Area
tool you can specify an area of any shape, and run
statistics over that area. The results are displayed in the statistics data view.
With the Delta Plotting
tool you can and compare the parameter values of two measurement
groups from a same route by defining an area on a map (e.g. a portion of the
measurement route).
For more information on Delta Plotting, see the topic Use Case 14: Comparing two
groups of
measurements from the same route on map on p. 200.
With the Distance
tool you can measure the distance between two points.
With the Highlight

tool you can highlight selected values on the map route. First select a scheme
in the Route Properties, Color dialog). Then click on the route and the Highlight
Value dialog will be
opened. The dialog displays all the values of the selected event type. From the
list, pick the value that
you would like to be highlighted and select a color for that value. Click OK and
the value is colored in
the selected value
With the Draw Polygon
tool you can create a polygon area by clicking on the map. The polygon is
closed by clicking on the start point of the polygon.
Show Elevation
enables you to draw a line on a map, according to which elevation is shown in the
bottom of the screen.
With the Center
tool you can center the map on the point where you click.
With the Offset
tool you can move the measurement route to another location. Click on the route
you want to move, and then on the new location.
With the View Entire Map
tool you can zoom out quickly.
With the Organize Layers

more information on the tool.
tool you can change the order of layers on the map. See page 172 for
The BTS Filter drop-down menu allows you to select which BTS cells are displayed on
the map.
add more routes
on the map, a new layer is created. You can remove layers from the view by clicking
the Close button
(x) and hide layers by clearing the respective option.
Page 170
Right-click on the layer titles in the layer browser to access a set of map-related
tools.
With the Zoom To tool you can zoom to the selected route. This is useful if you
have several
measurements open on the same map.
With the Move To Top tool you can move a selected layer to top.
With the Find tool you can search another map that matches the measurement route.
Note that the
Find feature only works with raster maps. See page 166 for more information on the
Find tool.
With the Export Data To tool enables you to export data to MapInfo Tab-file/Google
KML-File.
With the Show BTS Connections tool you can enable base station connections to be
displayed on the
map.
With the Add Task tool you can add a new task.
With the Show Street View On Route Point you can see the street view of a chosen
point of route.
Hide Street View hides the street view
With the Show Route Elevation you can view elevation on visible part of the active
route.
With the Remove tool you can remove the selected layer.
With the Properties option you can open the Route Properties dialog (see page 174
for more
information).
The Active Layer panel displays the name of the active layer and information on BTS
sites to which
the test device is currently connected.
The Color Legends panel displays the color sets in use.
Page 171
8.11.16
Drawing options
Under drawing options you can find some of the same drawing options that are given
in the ribbon
bar.
8.11.17
Tool
Under the Tool item you will find a selection of tools for viewing the map.
These same functions are available in the map side panel.
8.11.18
MapX
Under the MapX item you will find tools related to MapX maps.
With the View Entire Map tool you can zoom out quickly.
You can customize the map view using the MapX properties. With the Save Geoset
function the
customized settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file (.gst) and loaded later
on.
With the Organize Layers tool you change the order of map layers. In the Layer
Control dialog,
change the order with the Up and Down buttons. Clear the Visible option if you want
to hide a layer
from the map.
Page 172
Properties will open the MapX Properties dialog.
In the Layers tab the table a list of the current layers is shown. The order on the
list defines the order
in which the layers are displayed on a map; for example, in this case the Route
layer is on the top,
BTS sites under that, and World map at the bottom. This utility is useful if you
want to have a bigger
map on the bottom (e.g., a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area
(e.g., of
Helsinki) on top of that. To add layers on the map click Add. An Open dialog box is
opened where you
can choose the map you want to add as a layer. The map is added on the list and
with the Up and
Down you can change the map’s position on the list. By selecting and clearing the
Visible option you
can decide whether or not to display the layer on the map. To remove layers from
the map, select the
layer from the list and click the Remove button.
Page 173
8.11.19
Map Properties
The Properties item will open the Map Properties dialog.

In the Map Properties dialog you can define how the BTS icons are displayed. You
can also select and
clear the Auto centering tool.
Auto centering option keeps the map focus always on the measurement vehicle.
Show route names option displays route names on the map.
Show current position option displays the current position and direction on the
map.
Highlight active route option displays the currently selected route highlighted so
it is easy to see on
the map.
Show scale bar option displays a distance scale bar on the map.
Select the Draw line to active base station option to draw line from the serving
BTS to the test
vehicle. Display BTS overlay on top of other layers option keeps BTS layers always
on top of the route
layers.
8.11.20
Route Properties
In the Route Properties dialog you can modify the appearance and settings of the
measurement
route on the map. Right-click on the route and select Properties. On the last five
pages you have the
option to apply the new settings to all routes visible on the map.
Page 174
Name defines the title of the route

layer.
Draw Mode defines how the route is
drawn (line or symbol). See page
178 for more information.
Hide long distance lines option hides
unusually long lines which probably
mean that there is a problem with
the GPS connection.
Pixel Offset values enable you to
move the route on the map
horizontally and vertically.
Thickness defines the route
thickness in pixels You can define
Select measurement events that will

be displayed on the map as icons.
Select the Print description option to

view event descriptions (e.g., marker
numbers) on the map.
Select the Hide overlapping

descriptions option to hide the
description text if the texts overlap
each other.
Pixel offset values enable you to

change the position of notification
Page 175
Mode defines if the route is colored

using the default color or using
value-based coloring. If you select
color rotation, the color of the route
changes whenever the value of the
selected parameter changes.
Parameter defines the parameter

used in the coloring.
Color set defines the colors for

parameter values.
Filters displays the parameters used

in the query.
Tooltip defines a set of "Tooltip

parameters" that are shown in a
tooltip when mouse is hovered over
it. The parameters should be defined
per system so that different set of
parameter would be shown
depending on the serving system
(LTE/GSM/UMTS/etc.) at the location
on the route.
Page 176
Parameter defines the parameter

which will be displayed as numerical
values along the measurement
route.
Font and Color define the text

settings.
Select the Hide overlapping values

option to hide the values if the texts
overlap each other.
BTS defines which lines are

drawn to form a measurement
route.
Page 177
8.11.21
Draw route as symbols
You can draw the route on a map as symbols. In the Route Properties dialog, select
Symbol in the
Draw Mode field and click the … button. In the Symbol Style dialog, define the
appearance of the
symbol and click OK.
Font defines the symbol font.

Symbol defines the symbol used to draw the route.
Color defines the symbol color.
Effects defines what effects are applied to the symbol.
Page 178
Below is an example of a map route drawn with symbols.
Page 179
8.11.22
BTS files
In the workspace you will find a page for Base Stations by clicking on the
the workspace panel.
icon on the bottom of
Files displays all BTS files stored in the database.

Sites displays site information and details of the base stations/antennas
If there are multiple versions of the same BTS file, i.e. from different dates, the
correct file is
automatically selected based on the time of the measurement session if the file has
been named
according the naming convention filename_YYYY-MM-DD.nbf where filename must be
identical
with all versions of the same BTS file. The date suffix changes with the date (YYYY
stands for year,
MM for month, and DD for day) of the BTS file.
♦
Note: Change the filename format to filename_YYYY-MM-DD.nbf before you load

the file to the database.
Page 180
A BTS file needs to be activated in order for it to be used in saved workbooks and
BTS ref queries.
When opening a BTS file, a Set Active BTS File dialog opens. The user can activate
a file by ticking a
box next to the file.
Note: You can add custom site information columns to the BTS file. These columns
will be displayed as
part of site information in the Nemo Analyze UI.
If there are multiple versions and the file has not been named according to the
naming convention
above, the relevant BTS file version must be activated. If none of the files are
activated (i.e.
designated as relevant files), reliable results cannot be guaranteed.
To modify active BTS settings of a file that has already been added to the
database, open the BTS
page of the Workspace by clicking the
Active from the popup menu.
Page 181
button, right-click on the relevant BTS file, and select

To display base stations as BTS icons on map, drag and drop a BTS file from
Workspace | Base
Stations | Files to a map. The green sectors represent the antenna directions.
Note that BTS icons show differently depending on zoom level. When zooming
outwards, base stations
are no longer shown as green icons, but as red dots:
Page 182
Double-click on a BTS icon to view more information on that base station.
To connect the measurement route to the BTS, right-click on the route and select
Properties. Go to
the BTS tab, select Draw line to active base station, and click OK. If the route is
not associated
with a BTS file, the line to the active base station is not drawn.
Page 183
If you have several BTS files open on the map, you can define which base stations
are displayed.
Right-click on the map and select Properties. Select the Draw line to active base
stations to draw
only the BTS icons from the system, for example, GSM that the mobile is currently
using.
To connect the measurement route to the BTS, right-click on the route and select
Properties. Go to
the BTS tab, click Modify and select the BTS file to connect to, and click OK. If
the route is not
associated with a BTS file, the line to the active base station is not drawn.
8.11.23
BTS properties
Right-click on the BTS file layer in the side panel and select Properties.
Page 184
In the BTS Properties dialog you can edit the appearance of the BTS icons.
Draw line to active base station, option enables the drawing of a line from the
serving BTS to the
test vehicle.
Icon size defines the size of the BTS icon in pixels. Fixed defines the fixed size
of BTS icons in pixels.
Dynamic, max size defines a maximum size for dynamic BTS icons (i.e. icons which
change size
based on zoom level).
Show site names option hides and displays the site names.
Draw frame hides and displays the outlines of BTS icons.
Site transparency defines the transparency of the BTS icons.
Page 185
Show cell information option, when selected, allows you to choose what information
is shown for
BTS cells. Select Add to define which parameters are shown.
Hide cell texts on low zoom levels (performance optimization) option hides cell
text when the
map is zoomed out so that the map can be drawn faster and with less visual
distractions.
Use cell beam range from BTS file allows you to enable/disable the display of cell
beam range
based on cell beam range data in the BTS file.
Additionally, use estimation from antenna height and tilt estimates the base
station coverage
area based on antenna height and tilt.
Beam transparency defines the transparency of the beam range layer.
Default color defines the color of the BTS icon.

Mode (parameter/custom) enables the user to choose whether to use BTS Parameter or
custom query
option in the base station coloring.
Page 186
Technology allows the user to define the parameter coloring depending on the
technology that has
been used.
BTS parameter defines the parameter used in the coloring.
Mode (parameter/custom) enables the user to choose whether to use BTS Parameter or
custom query
option in the base station coloring.
Custom query enables the user to select a custom query which defines how the
coloring is done.
Color set defines the colors for parameter values.
Beam color defines the color that is used to draw a beam of a base station.
The Highlights page displays options that can be used to select colors used to
display highlighted
cells on the map. To apply the highlight colors, right-click on a cell on the map
and select Highlight
neighboring cells or Highlight sectors…
The Sites page displays a list of all sites and their cells in the BTS file.
Page 187
8.11.24 Use Case 11: Adding map layers and saving layer
combinations as geosets
To add more map layers to the map view, drag and drop a .TAB file from the
Workspace | Maps |
Loaded MapX Maps to an open map view.
For organizing map layers, see MapX on page 172.

Once you have added the layers you need to the map, you can save the entire layer
combination as a
Geoset to enable direct access to the map in the future. To save the combination as
a single Geoset,
right-click on map view and select MapX | Save Geoset from the popup menu.
Page 188
Note that to have these options, a MapX must be used.
Enter a name for the Geoset file and click Save.
Page 189
The Geoset Name dialog opens.
Enter a name for the Geoset and click OK. The entire combination of map layers can
now be loaded
into the database and opened as a single map.
8.11.25
Use Case 12: Coloring routes based on BTS coverage
This use case describes a situation where the user needs to view the coverage of a
single base station
on a map. It is assumed that there are measurement files with coordinates, BTS
files, and
corresponding maps in the database.
Step 1: Open a measurement and a BTS file on a map

Open a map file and drag and drop measurements on it. Do not open any parameters.
Next, drag
and drop BTS files on the map and associate them with the route(s). .
Step 2: Color routes based on BTS coverage

To color route(s) based on base station coverage, right-click a base station and
select Color Layers
Based On Scrambling Code [number] from the popup menu
Page 190
The route will be colored based on the Ec/N0 or RSCP value of the selected base
station.
To perform area binning on a selected part of the route, proceed to .

Use Case 13: Performing area binning.
Page 191
8.11.26
Use Case 13: Performing area binning
Step 1: Select Bin Area

Click Area Binning icon
on the Tools panel and select an area from the map.
Step 2: Select Measurement File(s)

Selecting an area opens the Analyze Wizard – Select Measurement dialog below. In
this dialog,
you can add measurements you want to perform the area binning on. The measurement
route on the
map is included in the selected measurements by default.
Folder defines the
measurement folder whose
contents are displayed in the
field below.
Using the Filter field, you can
search for measurements.
The Selected
measurements field displays
all the measurements that
have been selected for area
binning.
With the
button, you can
select measurements
After you have selected the measurements you want to perform the area binning on,
click Next.
This opens the Analyze Wizard – Measurement parameters dialog.
Page 192
If you are performing an area binning for a single base station see Use Case 11:
Adding map layers
and saving layer combinations as geosets.
This opens the Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog.

If you are performing an area binning for a single base station (see page 188),
clicking Finish opens
another Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog. Again, select the scrambling code or
channel number value
from the Value drop-down menu and click Finish.
The area binning statistics are by default weighted by time. Although area binning
as an operation is
location-based, each sample has its unique time and distance weights that can be
used in calculating
time and distance averages per bin.
If you want to weight the results by distance, you must have Calculate statistics
based on set to
<Ask every time> in View | Options | Environment | Statistics (see page 505). In
this case, the
Page 193
Choose Statistics Type dialog will open after clicking Finish in the Analyze Wizard
- Filters dialog
above, allowing you to select Distance as statistics type. After selecting the
statistics type, click OK.
The area binning results are displayed on the map as a new layer.
Step 3: Adjusting Bin Size

To adjust bin size, right-click the area binning layer on the Layers panel and
select Properties from
the popup menu.
In the Properties dialog, adjust bin size by changing the X steps and Y steps
values. The higher the
value is, the smaller the bin size. When the bin size has been adjusted, click OK,
and the area binning
layer is displayed with the new bin size.
Name refers to the name of the base parameter.
Page 194
X steps and Y steps define the bin size.

Scrambling code refers to the scrambling code of the base station.
Draw method defines whether the bins are displayed in Fixed size irrespective of
the zoom level, or
in Actual size.
Print value, when selected, displays numeric values of the measurement points in
the map.
With the Statistic drop-down menu, you can select the aggregate displayed on the
map: Minimum,
Maximum, Sample count, Std. deviation and Variance. By default, average per bin is
displayed.
Color set defines the color set that is used.
Transparency defines the transparency of the area binning layer.
Step 4: Exporting Area Binning Data

To export area binning data to Excel, or to .txt or MapInfo .tab format, right-
click the area binning
layer on the Layers panel and select Export Data To | Excel or Export Data To |
File from the
popup menu. For more information on Export Data To function, see p. 148. For
exporting area
binning data to Google Earth in KML format, see Export to KML file.
Page 195
8.11.26.1
Distance-based binning
The workflow for performing distance-based binning is similar to area binning. The
difference between
the two is that area binning uses coordinates to perform the bin, whereas distance-
based binning uses
distance values from the measurement files to perform the bin.
Performing distance binning

1. Select binning area. Click the Distance Binning
area from the map.
icon on the Tools panel and select an
2. The Analyze Wizard – Select Measurement dialog opens. Select a measurement and
click
Next.
The Analyze Wizard – Measurement Parameters dialog opens. Select a parameter and
click Next.
Page 196
The Analyze Wizard – Filters dialog opens. Select filters if applicable and click
Finish.
The map view opens displaying your bin results as a new layer.
Page 197
Click Zoom in to zoom in on the measurement points. To modify the bin or to see
measurement values, right-click the distance binning layer on the Layers panel and
select
Properties from the popup menu.
Page 198
The Properties dialog displays two views, Statistics and Color.
Name refers to the name of the base parameter.

Info displays the measurement information.
Draw frame, when selected, draws a frame for the bin area.
Print value, when selected, displays numeric values of the measurement points in
the map.
Draw method defines whether the bins are displayed in Fixed size irrespective of
the zoom
level, or in Actual size.
Size defines the size of the fixed size circle.
Filters enables you to add filters.
Page 199
Statistics defines the statistics for the bin. The options are:
Color set enables you to define the color set used for the parameters.
Transparency defines the transparency of the area binning layer.
8.11.27 Use Case 14: Comparing two groups of measurements

from the same route on map
This use case describes a situation where the user needs to compare the parameter
values of two
groups of measurements from the same route. It is assumed that there are
measurement files with
coordinates and corresponding maps in the database.
Step 1: Open a Measurement File on a Map

Open a map file and drag and drop measurements on it.
Step 2: Performing Delta Plotting on Map

Delta plotting makes it possible to display the difference between two groups of
measurements from
the same route on map.
Click the Delta Plotting icon
Page 200
on the Tools panel and select an area from the map.

In the screenshot below, you can see the area selection surrounded by a thin dotted
line.
Selecting an area opens the Delta Plotting dialog.
To select measurements for Measurement Group 1, click the Configure button and the
Analyze
Wizard – Select Measurement dialog opens. In this dialog, you can select the
measurements you
want to perform the delta plotting on. You can have one to many measurements in
each measurement
group. A measurement group average is calculated from all measurements within a
Measurement
Group. The difference value plotted on map represents the difference between the
two measurement
group averages.
Page 201
Folder defines the measurement folder whose contents are displayed in the field
below.
Using the Filter field, you can search for measurements.
The Selected measurements field displays all the measurements that have been
selected for the
measurement group
With the
button, you can select measurements
With the
button, you can clear measurements
Once you have selected the measurements you want to include in the Measurement
Group 1, click
Next.
This opens the Analyze Wizard – Measurement parameters dialog. Select the parameter
based on
which you want to compare the two measurement groups and click Next. Note that you
have to select
the same parameter for both measurement groups.
Page 202
Filter options are optional. Define filter options if necessary and click Finish.
Page 203
Repeat the steps above to define measurements for Measurement Group 2.
Once you have selected measurements for both measurement groups, click OK in the
Delta Plotting
dialog.
From the Choose Statistics Type dialog you can choose whether statistics are
weighted by time
(Time), or distance (Distance), or whether they are not weighted at all (Sample).
Although delta
plotting as an operation is by default distance-based, each sample has its unique
time and distance
weights that can be used in calculating time and distance averages per bin. In
delta plotting this
average per bin is calculated for bins of both routes separately. To find out the
difference between the
bin values of one route and the bin values of the other, a subtraction is performed
between the bin
values of the routes.
Depending on the operation you are performing, select either Time, Distance, or
Sample and click
OK.
Page 204
The delta plotting results are displayed on the map as a new layer.
8.11.28 Use Case 15: Displaying base station cell beam range on
map
To display the cell beam range of an individual cell on map, select the relevant
cell with a right-click.
The beam range of the selected cell is displayed on the map as a sector.
If the BTS file you are using does not contain cell beam range data, you can set
the range in BTS
options. Select View | Options to define base station display settings.
Page 205
The Options dialog opens. Select BTS | General.
BTS texts options allows you to define the size and style of BTS text.
Display BTS overlay on top of other layers sets BTS layers to be displayed over all
other layers.
Default BTS filter allows you to set default BTS filter that will automatically
turn the chosen filter on
if there are such base stations in the BTS file.
Optimization defines when cells and sites are drawn on a map.
In the Tools window there is a BTS filter field that enables the user to choose
which base stations are
shown:
For UMTS and LTE options you must set a Carrier number which defines which part of
the BTS filter is
chosen.
Page 206
Default enables you to define the default color for base stations when displayed in
the map view.
Default beam color enables you to define the default beam color.
Default settings for BTS parameter, when selected, enables you to define default
color sets for
BTS parameters.
BTS defines the parameter used in the coloring.
Color set defines the colors for parameter values.
BTS Technology Based Settings enable you to choose the color and the size of the
base station
depending on which network´s base station it is, or based on the carrier number.
When the Use technology based settings (overrides icon size settings) option is
selected, you
are able to open the Set Technology Setting view by clicking Add. By clicking the
Icon color option,
the size and the color of the base stations changes on the map. If this option is
not selected, only the
size of the base station changes.
Page 207
To edit cell-specific properties, right-clicking on a base station icon cell, and

select Properties from
the popup menu.
The Current tab of the Properties dialog opens. To see descriptions of the BTS
cells settings, see the
Cell tab.
Page 208
Beam range defines the cell beam range in meters.
Draw line to active base station option enables the drawing of a line from the
serving BTS to the
test vehicle.
Icon size defines the size of the BTS icon in pixels. Fixed defines the fixed size
of BTS icons in pixels.
Dynamic, max size defines a maximum size for dynamic BTS icons (i.e. icons which
change size
based on zoom level).
Page 209

Show cell information option, when selected, allows you to choose what information
is shown for
BTS cells. Select Add to define which parameters are shown.
Hide cell texts on low zoom levels (performance optimization) option hides partly
or completely
the cell texts when the map is zoomed out so that the map can be drawn faster and
with less visual
distractions. The level is adjustable with a slider. Zoom levels are specific to
used maps.
beam range
station coverage
Cell beam range can also be displayed by selecting a cell in Workspace | Base
Stations | File
Contents with a left-click.
Page 210
8.11.29 Use Case 16: Synchronizing base station map overlay with
grid rows
Nemo Analyze allows the synchronization of grid data with base stations on map. To
synchronize BTS
map overlay with grid data, first open both a measurement file (p. 80) and a BTS
file (p. 82) on map.
Next, split the data view vertically by right-clicking on the map and selecting
Data View | Split |
Vertically from the popup menu.
The data view is split into two sections.
Page 211
To add a grid with BTS data to the empty section, drag and drop the BTS layer from
the Layers panel
on the right to the empty section.
The Select Data View dialog opens.
Select Grid and click OK.

A grid with BTS data is now displayed.
Page 212
The map now zooms automatically to the cell selected in the grid.
8.11.30
Use Case 17: Using BTS reference parameters
Parameters view contains a set of parameters with the parameter name prefix BTS
reference. These
parameters display information on the current serving and neighboring cell(s) based
on a BTS
reference file (i.e. BTS file). BTS reference parameters can be used, for instance,
to display the name
of the serving cell in a workbook together with recorded metrics, or as an input
data set in KPI
workbench to enable the grouping of aggregates based on serving cell, etc. For the
BTS reference
parameters to work correctly, the relevant BTS reference file must be present in
the database.
A BTS file needs to be activated in order for it to be used in saved workbooks and
BTS ref queries.
When opening a BTS file, a Set Active BTS File dialog opens. The user can activate
a file by ticking a
box next to the file.
If there are multiple versions of the same BTS file, e.g. from different dates, the
relevant BTS file
version must be activated. If none of the files are activated (i.e. designated as
relevant files), reliable
results cannot be guaranteed.
Page 213
To modify active BTS settings of a file that has already been added to the
database, open the BTS
page of the Workspace by clicking the
Activate from the popup menu.
button, right-click on the relevant BTS file, and select
Once the relevant BTS file has been activated, open the Measurements page of the
Workspace by
clicking the
Page 214
button.
Select a measurement or a measurement folder, and type the word reference to the
filter above the
Parameters view to list BTS reference parameters.
To open a parameter in its default view, select a measurement in the Workspace and
then double-click
a parameter in the Parameters view. If you want to open the parameter in some other
type of view,
right-click on a parameter in the Parameters view and select the view type from the
popup menu.
To run statistics based on the parameter, select the parameter in the Parameters
view and click the
click on the
button displayed at the bottom left corner of the Parameters view. This opens the
Parameter Launchpad. For more information on Parameter Launchpad, see page 72.
Page 215
8.11.31 Use Case 18: Displaying base station connections on map

based on pilot pollution
Nemo Analyze allows base station connections to be displayed on map based on pilot
pollution. To
display base station connections from measurement to individual cells on map based
on pilot pollution,
select a measurement file from Measurements, right-click on a Pilot pollution in
the Parameters view,
and select Open In | Map from the popup menu.
Page 216
The program will ask for a carrier number. Select query values and enter a value.
The value has to match the one of BTS file.
Select columns dialog opens, click OK.
Page 217
When the query has been executed, the results will be drawn on a map.
Go to base stations tab and drag the BTS file onto the map.
The program will ask if you want to associate route with BTS, select yes.
Enter a channel number to match the previously entered query value.
The measured pilots will be drawn on the map.
To view the drawn BTS go to Tools | Layers, then right-click and select Properties
| BTS.
Page 218
BTS connections are displayed in a grid in a new workbook.
8.12 Spreadsheets
Nemo Analyze spreadsheets enable the processing of measurement data in spreadsheet
format. As
the basic functionality of Nemo Analyze spreadsheets is in line with the de facto
standard followed by
most spreadsheet applications on the market, this section will focus only on those
features and usages
that are specific to Nemo Analyze and to measurement data post-processing.
Select View | Workbook | Spreadsheet Grid in the Ribbonbar to open an empty
spreadsheet.
You can drag and drop parameters on the spreadsheet from the Parameters view. Nemo
Analyze will
display a green icon
if spreadsheet is a suitable data view for the parameter, and a red icon
the data view is unsuitable.
The query is opened on the spreadsheet.
Page 219
if
Alternatively, you can open measurements with parameters on a spreadsheet straight

from the
Parameters view.
Page 220
Select a measurement folder or file in the Workspace and right-click a parameter in

the Parameters
view.
From the popup menu, select Spreadsheet.
Page 221
The query is opened on a spreadsheet.
Page 222
8.12.1
Editing cell format
To format cells containing parameter data, right-click on the cell in the top left
corner of the
parameter data set and select Format Cells from the popup menu.
The Query tab of the Format Cells dialog opens.
Page 223
Please note that the Query tab is not displayed if Format Cells is not accessed via
a
right-click on the cell in the top left corner of a parameter data set.
Show results, if selected, displays the parameter data set as a whole. If cleared,
Show results
minimizes the parameter data set into a single cell. Although minimized and not
visible, functions can
still be run on the entire parameter data set as each cell can still be referred
to, based on the original
parameter data set structure. For more information on making references to a
minimized parameter
data set in a formula, see Use Case 19: Retrieving data from minimized data sets on
page 232.
Show columns, if selected, displays data set column names.
Short column names, if selected, displays short versions of data set column names.
The Number tab of the Format Cells dialog allows you to define the format in which
numbers are
displayed within the selected cell(s).
General defines that the default settings for the content type are used.
Number defines the cell content as numbers and allows you to set the number of
decimals displayed.
Page 224
Percentage defines the cell content as a percentage and allows you to set the
number of displayed
decimals.
Time defines the cell content as time and displays the value in the cell in hours,
minutes, seconds,
and milliseconds.
The Alignment tab of the Format Cells dialog allows you to define the alignment of
text within cells.
Text alignment
Horizontal defines the horizontal alignment of text within the selected cells as
Default, Left,
Center, or Right.
Vertical defines the vertical alignment of text within cells as Top, Center, or
Bottom.
Text control
Wrap text, if selected, enables word wrap within the selected cells.
Merge cells enables you to merge selected cells into a single cell. Select the
cells you want to merge,
right-click on the selection, select Format Cells from the popup menu, and select
Merge cells from the
Alignment tab of the Format Cells dialog.
Page 225
The Font tab of the Format Cells dialog allows you to define the font and color of
the text within cells.
Font defines the font of the text within cells.

Color defines the font of the text within cells.
The Border tab of the Format Cells dialog allows you to define borders for cells.
Border width defines the border thickness for cells as Thin (default), Medium, or
Thick.
Presets allows you to select which border groups are to be displayed. With None, no
borders are
displayed. With Outline, only the outlines of a cluster of cells are displayed as a
border. With Inside,
the borders of all cells within a cluster of cells are set as borders.
Border buttons (i.e. Top, Middle, Bottom, Left, Middle, and Right) allows you to
select manually
which borders are to be displayed.
Page 226
The Patterns tab of the Format Cells dialog allows you to define cell background
color.
Cell color defines the cell background color.
8.12.2
Filtering data
To filter out unwanted data based on values in a particular column, select the
contents of the columns
you want to filter, right-click on the selection, and select AutoFilter from the
popup menu.
Page 227
An AutoFilter drop-down menu is created based on values in the selected column(s).
To filter out all rows that do not contain a particular column value, select a
column value from the
drop-down menu.
All rows that do not contain the selected value in the filter column will be
filtered out. Selecting (All)
from the drop-down menu displays all rows again.
To remove an AutoFilter from a column, right-click the AutoFilter element at the
column heading, and
clear AutoFilter from the popup menu.
Page 228
8.12.3
Creating formulas
You can enter a formula in any cell on the spreadsheet. The creation of a formula
always begins with
the equal sign (=). The next element identifies the mathematical function, e.g. AVG
stands for the
function Average. For more functions, see Adding functions on page 230.
=AVG
The rest of the formula defines the source data for the function and is placed
within brackets.
=AVG()
If the cells containing the source data for the function are located on another
sheet, it is first
necessary to identify the location of the data by entering the sheet name followed
by the exclamation
mark (!).
=AVG(Sheet 2!)
If the cells containing the source data for the function are located within a
separate data set on the
same spreadsheet, it is first necessary to identify the location of the data by
entering the data set
name (e.g. the name of a query opened on the spreadsheet) preceded by the asterisk
(*) and
followed by the exclamation mark (!).
=AVG(*BLER DL!)
Next, a reference to the actual cells is added. A cell is referred to by a
combination of the column
letter and the row number that intersect at the cell’s location, e.g. A1. To refer
to a range of cells, first
identify the start point of the range (i.e. the first cell in the range), and
separate it from the end point
(i.e. last cell in the range) with a colon (:). If the range covers multiple
columns, the start and end
point references should be to the cells in the upper left and lower right corners
of the range.
=AVG(*BLER DL!A1:D555)
If the range covers all cells in a column, the range can be referred to by using
just the column letter
as both the start and end point, instead of referring to individual cells with row
numbers.
=AVG(*BLER DL!A:A)
To refer to more than one cell range, separate each range with a semicolon (;).
=AVG(*BLER DL!A1:B12;C10:D16)
For information on the general format of spreadsheet formulas, see one of the
numerous helps and
guides for spreadsheet applications available on the internet.
Page 229
8.12.4
Adding functions
To perform a mathematical operation based on a group of cells, select the cells by

holding the left
mouse button down while moving the cursor over the selected cells. Once all
intended cells have been
selected, release the left mouse button and right-click over the selection. A popup
menu opens. From
the popup menu, select Insert Function | [function].
Page 230
The function is added below the selected cells. The cell with the function displays
the result of the
function. The formula of the function is displayed in the formula field on the
topmost bar of the
spreadsheet view.
If you wish, you can relocate the function by cutting and pasting.
If you do not find an appropriate function amongst those displayed in the popup
menu, select Insert
Function | More Functions instead.
The Insert Function dialog opens.
When you select a function from the list, the info field below displays a
description of the function.
Select a function from the list and click OK. The function is added below the
selected cells, as
discussed above.
Page 231
8.12.5
Use Case 19: Retrieving data from minimized data sets
It is possible to minimize parameter data sets on a spreadsheet to take up the

space of only one cell.
For minimizing data sets, see Editing cell format on page 223.
To retrieve data from a minimized table, you first have to know which column in the
maximized data
set contains the data you want to retrieve. The first column in a separate data set
is always
considered to be Column A, the second Column B, etc., no matter how the data set is
situated on the
spreadsheet. Thus, if you are retrieving data from the first column of a minimized
table, you are
interested in the contents of Column A. The name of the query (i.e. the parameter
data set that has
been opened on the spreadsheet) has to be known as well in order for you to be able
to refer to the
right data set.
The creation of a formula for data retrieval begins with the equal sign (=) to
identify the string as a
formula. Next, add the operator of the mathematical function you want to use. For
instance, with the
function Average, the operator is AVG. For more functions, see Adding functions on
page 230.
Next, within brackets, define the data set on which the mathematical function is to
be run. The data
set definition string is generally of the following format: open bracket, asterisk,
query name,
exclamation mark, reference to the first cell in the range, colon, reference to the
last cell in the range,
and closed bracket. Thus, a formula for calculating an average based on values on
rows 1-15 in
Column A of the BLER DL data set would be of the following format: =AVG(*BLER DL!
A1:A15). For
more information on formulas, see Creating formulas on page 229.
Page 232
8.12.6
Use Case 20: Creating reports and report templates using

spreadsheets
It is possible to create reports on spreadsheets and save them as report templates.

These report
templates can then be run on all measurement files that contain the events the
report has been
defined to look for.
Select View | Workbook | Spreadsheet Grid in the Ribbonbar to open an empty
spreadsheet.
On the empty spreadsheet, create a layout for the report.
Page 233
In Workspace, select a measurement and the parameter you want to add on the report.
Click on the
button to open the Parameter Launchpad.
Page 234
In Parameter Launchpad, click on Statistics for a list of aggregates, select an

aggregate (e.g. Count)
from the list and drag and drop it to the cell you have designated for it in the
spreadsheet layout.
Page 235
Repeat the procedure with other relevant parameters until they are all on the
spreadsheet.
If the report you are creating requires mathematical operations, select the cell
you have designated
for an operation and enter the appropriate formula into it. In the present example,
the count of
connected calls has to be divided by the count of call attempts to produce a ratio
of successful calls.
In order to present the ratio as a call success rate percentage, the result of the
division has to be
multiplied by hundred. At this point, the formula is of the following format:
=((C3/C2)*100).
For information on the general format of spreadsheet formulas, see one of the
numerous helps and
guides for spreadsheet applications available on the internet.
Because division as an arithmetic operation always requires that the divisor (i.e.
the cell C2) is not
zero and because in a report of this type it is possible that the result of the
count operation in C2 will
be the value zero (i.e. if there are no call attempts), an additional condition
following the format ‘if C2
is zero, the result of the division is zero’ has to be created to prevent the error
that would otherwise
occur. In spreadsheet formulas, this will be expressed in the following format:
=IF(C2;((C3/C2)*100);0).
Page 236
If the result of the calculation is displayed in a format unsuitable for the value
type (e.g. a percentage
is displayed with multiple decimals), right-click on the cell containing the value,
and select Format
Cells from the popup menu.
The Number tab of the Format Cells dialog opens.
Page 237
Select a number format suitable for the value type, define the number of decimals
to be displayed,
and click OK.
The report is now complete.
You can save the completed report as a template that can be run on any measurement
file that
contains the events required by the report. To save the report as a template,
right-click on the
spreadsheet and select Workbook | Save… from the popup menu.
Page 238
The Save Workbook dialog opens.
Filename defines the name of the report template.

Popup menu defines the menus (e.g. Workspace Device Menu) in which the workbook
will be saved.
For more information on menus, see p.501.
Groups defines the group (e.g. User) in which the workbook will be saved to.
To run the report on another measurement file, select a measurement from the
Workspace section
you defined as the location for the template (e.g. Workspace Device Menu) and
right-click a
measurement file.
Page 239
From the popup menu, select the submenu you defined as the location for the
template (e.g. User)
and select the template.
The report is run on the selected measurement file.
8.13 Processing uplink voice quality data

1. When measuring with Nemo Outdoor, make sure its clock is synchronized with the
voice
quality server clock. In Nemo Outdoor, select User Interface Measurements | Use
time
from GPS. In Nemo Server, select NTP (Network time protocol) from the NSM menu.
Internet connection is needed in order for the server to use NTP time. If there is
no internet
connection available or NTP time cannot be set through, i.e. LAN, Nemo Outdoor
clock and
server clock must be synchronized manually.
2. Before measurement, the number of each server’s phone line must be configured
manually to
the voice quality server. By doing this, the numbers will also be set to the server
end´s log file
headers.
3. Load both Nemo Outdoor and server log files into Nemo Analyze. After this, you
are able to
use Nemo Outdoor files normally. If you want to see UL MOS for a specific Nemo
Outdoor log
file, select the file in question and UL MOS from the Parameters view. Nemo Analyze
connects
UL MOS values from the correct server file to the Nemo Outdoor file in question by
comparing
time and phone numbers.
Page 240
8.14 Indoor measurements

With Nemo Analyze you can also view indoor measurements on floor plans. Right-click
on the
measurement in the Workspace and select Adjust Coordinates.
Page 241
In the Adjust Coordinates dialog, select the floor plan in the Map file field or
click the Import
Image as Map button to convert an image file into a map (see page 36). Click OK.
The selected floor plan is opened. First you need to place the coordinate markers
in the right places.
With the Arrow tool, click on the map and the active marker (highlighted with pink
in the table on the
right) will be placed there. The Longitude and Latitude values are updated as you
place the markers
on the map.
After you have placed all the markers, click the Update Coordinates button to save
the marker
coordinates.
Page 242
Nemo Analyze will ask if you would like to open the route on a map. Click Yes, and
the route is
opened on a map.
When you open the indoor measurement on the floor plan the next time, the route is
automatically
drawn on the map. You can color the route and use all the features available for
maps.
Page 243
8.15 Numerical data views

Numerical data views are useful, for example, for viewing benchmarking data from
multi
measurements: you can open several measurement files side by side and compare the
values.
You can open a numerical view, for example, by opening an empty workbook (View |
Workbook)
and then adding a numerical view data view in the workbook: right-click on
workbook, select Page |
Add Data View | Numerical Data.
Drag a measurement or measurements in the view, and Nemo Analyze will display some
network
parameters for the file. If no data are shown on the table, the data are retrieved
from the very
beginning of the measurement. Double-click on the measurement file in the Workspace
to view the
Timeline view, and move the red time line forward to view captured data.
Page 244
You can edit the contents of the numerical data view.
Right-click on the view and select Properties.
The Visible parameters list offers a list of parameters that can be displayed in
the numerical data
view.
With the Move up and Move Down you can change the order in which the different
parameters
appear in the numerical data view.
Page 245
Title defines the column title.

Alignment defines how the text is aligned.
The Color Sets list enables you to select the appropriate color sets for the
parameters from the dropdown menu.
8.16 Info views

Info views are used to display more detailed information, for example, about
signaling, BTS sites and
layer messages. To add info view on an empty workbook, right-click and select Page
| Add data
view | Info view.
Page 246
8.17 Timeline view

The Timeline view enables you to view and analyze a selected time range of a
measurement file. For
example, you can select to view data before and after certain events, e.g., call
failures, to
troubleshoot what may have caused the particular event. Or you can select a time
range and generate
a report for that range.
Right-click on a measurement in the workspace and select Timeline or double-click a
measurement to
open the Timeline view. You can also open the Timeline view for multi measurements.
Page 247
The Timeline view displays the start and finish time of the file. The red
synchronization line marks
the current point in the measurement file. Current time is displayed below the
synchronization line.
8.17.1
Highlight Parameter in Timeline view
With Highlight Parameter you can visualize problem areas in the measurement. For
example you
can view certain events or parameters when their values are under/over certain user
specified
threshold. Right-click on the Timeline view and select Highlight Parameter.
Page 248
In the Pick Parameter dialog, select the parameter you want to highlight and click
OK. You can also
find a given parameter from the list by using the filter field within the red box.
Double-click the Value field to define the event for the selected parameter and
click Finish.
Page 249
The parameter events will be highlighted.
8.17.2
Notifications in Timeline view
You can also view notifications in the Timeline view. Right-click on the view and
select Properties. In
the Notifications tab, select the notifications you want to view in the Timeline
view, for example,
attach failures, and BLER, and click OK.
The small red vertical bars represent the selected notifications. The example shows
e.g. answered
calls.
Page 250
8.17.3
Range selection in Timeline view
Now you can take a closer look at the problem spot by selecting a sample, a range,
of the file around
the attach failures. Select the starting point of the range by double-clicking with
the left mouse button
and the ending point with a left click.
To generate a report based on the selected time range, right-click on the range and
select Range |
Report | Open from the popup menu. In the Open dialog, select a report template
(*.rpt) and click
Open.
To generate a workbook based on the selected time range, right-click on the range
and select Range
| Workbook | [workbook folder] | [workbook].
Depending on your selection, a report or a workbook is generated from the data in

the selected range.
Page 251
8.18 Other views

8.18.1
Network Parameters
The Parameters view displays some key network parameters. Right-click on a file in
the workspace
and select Network Parameters.
If the Parameters view is empty, right-click on the measurement in the Workspace to

view the
Timeline view. Move the red time line forward to a point in time where data have
been gathered
during the measurement.
Right-click on the view and select Pick Parameter… to add more parameters. To
remove parameters
from the view, right-click on the view and select Properties. In the parameters
page, clear the
parameters you want to remove and click OK.
Page 252
8.18.2
Measurement Settings
The Measurement Settings view displays some information about the settings that
were used when
the file was recorded. Right-click on a file in the workspace and select
Measurement Settings.
Page 253
8.18.3
Properties
The Properties view displays information about items that are selected in the main
window. The view
is by default docked to the right side of the main window. Move your mouse over the
Properties tab
for the window to appear. If the Properties tab is not visible, open the Properties
view by selecting
View | Properties. You can also drag the view elsewhere on the Analyze main window.
If you want
to dock it back to the side of the main window, double-click on the Properties
view.
8.18.4
Query Clipboard
The Query Clipboard displays a list of queries that have been copied, and which can
further be
pasted into views. The view is by default docked to the right side of the main
window. Move your
mouse over the Query Clipboard tab for the hidden window to appear. If the Query
Clipboard tab is
not visible, enable the Query Clipboard by selecting View | Query clipboard. You
can empty the
clipboard by clicking the Clear button. You can also drag the view elsewhere on the
Analyze main
window. If you want to dock it back to the side of the main window, double-click on
the Query
Clipboard.
Page 254
Parameters can be copied to Query Clipboard by right-clicking on a parameter in a

workbook and
selecting Query | Copy. To paste query into an empty workbook right-click on a view
and select
Query | Paste. The Paste Query dialog displays the contents of the Query Clipboard.
Select the
query to be pasted and click OK.
Page 255
8.18.5
Activity
Activity (View | Activity) displays the progress of file upload, file conversion,
and file upload queue.
Analyze imports various data sources including Nemo (.nmf), TEMS (.trp) and .csw,
as well as
compressed files.
With Cancel and Cancel All buttons, you can abort the upload of either the
currently uploaded
measurement file or the upload of all measurement files in the upload queue.
To move a measurement file to the top of the list of uploaded measurements, right-
click on the file
and select Move To Top.
Page 256
8.18.6
Window Browser
The Window Browser (View | Window browser) displays a list of controls (workbooks,
pages,
data views) open in Nemo Analyze at a given moment. Right-click on the items to
access the
Properties dialogs for each control.
8.18.7
Log window
The Log window displays some program and error messages and the SQL statements that
are being
processed. The view is by default docked to the bottom of the main window. Move
your mouse over
the Log tab for the hidden window to appear. If the Log window is not visible, open
it by selecting
View | Log window. To show output from Log, SQL and Commander, make selections from
a
dropdown menu. You can also drag the Log window from the bottom of the Analyze main
window
elsewhere on the screen. If you want to dock it back to the bottom, double-click on
the view.
Page 257
To show Timestamps in the Log window output, select Show Timestamps. You can clear
the Log
window by right-clicking on it, and selecting Clear. You can also save the contents
of the Log window
in a log file by selecting Write to File and typing a name for the file. The log is
saved in a text file
(.txt).
Page 258
9 WORKBOOKS
Viewing measurement data in Nemo Analyze is extremely flexible and user-

configurable. The various
views are organized into workbooks, pages, and data views.
A workbook is the main component that contains all the different pages and data
views. There is a
selection of ready-made workbooks but you can also create new workbooks.
To open an empty workbook, select View | Workbook.
A list of all workbooks can be found found by right-clicking on a measurement and
selecting
Analyses.
Page 259
It is also possible to open a workbook with a predefined layout, e.g. 2x2 view
arranged in a grid by
selecting View | Workbook Layout.
Page 260
To open a ready-made workbook on a measurement file/folder, right-click the

measurement file/folder
and select [workbook folder] | [workbook] (e.g. UMTS | UMTS full details) from the
popup
menu.
To cancel a running query during workbook execution, click Cancel in the Executing
Queries dialog.
To cancel the execution of all queries within the workbook, select Cancel All.
Page 261
9.1 Adding data views

In order to view measurement data in the workbook you will need to create a data
view. Right-click on
the workbook and select Page | Add Data View | [data view type]. An empty data view
will be
opened in the workbook.
Now you can add data in the data view. You have two options. You can either drag a
measurement file
in the data view or right-click on the view and select Pick Parameter. In the
latter case, first choose
the graph type.
Page 262
In the Pick Parameter dialog select the measurement file in the Measurement field
and pick the
parameter to be viewed. In the Filter field you can type the name of the parameter
you want to add in
the data view to locate all the options, in this case all instances of BLER, more
quickly from the list.
The selected view is opened.
Page 263
You can create several pages and each page can contain several data views. To add
more data views
on the same page, right-click on the view and select Page | Add Data View | [data
view type]. If
you select Data View | Insert | [data view type], the existing data view is
replaced with the new
one.
Page 264
Right-click on the empty grid view, select Pick Parameter, select the parameter to
be displayed and
click OK. Now you have a workbook with one page that contains two data views. To
add more pages
to you workbook, see the next chapter.
Page 265
9.2 Adding pages

You can have several pages in a workbook each containing one or more data views.
Right-click on a
view and select Page | Add Page.
An empty page is added to the workbook and you can now open data views on the page.
You can
switch between the pages from the tabs at the bottom of the workbook.
Page 266
You are also able to add a page containing several data views by right-clicking on
a view and selecting
Page | Add Page Layout | [page layout type]
An empty page is added to the workbook and you can now open data views on the page
e.g. by
dragging and dropping a parameter. You can switch between the pages from the tabs
at the bottom of
the workbook.
Page 267
9.3 Saving a workbook

After you have opened all the relevant views, right-click on a view and select
Workbook | Save to
save the workbook for later use.
The Save Workbook dialog opens.
Filename defines the name of the report template.

Popup menu defines the menus (e.g. Workspace Device Menu) in which the workbook
will be saved.
For more information on menus, see p.501.
♦
Note: Workbooks containing bar or line graphs should always be saved only in the
Device Menu. This is because the nature of these graph types requires the
information to be ordered by time, which in turn can be done only within a single
log file at a time.
Groups defines the group (e.g. User) in which the workbook will be saved to. For
more information on
groups, see p. Error! Bookmark not defined..
After defining the filename and the destination popup menu and group, click OK.
Page 268
9.4 Exporting workbooks

An open workbook can be exported as a PDF or as a set of image files (image per
page).
9.4.1 Exporting workbooks as PDF/MS Word/MS PowerPoint files

To export an open workbook as a PDF, Microsoft Word or Microsoft PowerPoint file,
select File |
Workbook to File.
To save the report as a PDF/MS Word/MS PowerPoint file, type in a file name in the
File name field
and click Save.
Page 269
9.4.2 Exporting workbooks as image files

To export an open workbook as image files, select File | Page Image to clipboard,
and select
export type from the drop-down menu.
Page image to clipboard saves the workbook page currently open on the clipboard.
Page image to file saves the workbook page currently open as an image file.
Workbook images to file saves all workbook pages as separate image files.
Export ratio allows defining the export ratio (%), or selecting fixed size 640*480
Page 270
9.5 Copying a workbook

After you have opened all the relevant views, right-click on a view and select
Workbook | Create
Copy for Measurement or click the Create copy of workbook
tab to make a copy of the workbook for another measurement file.
button in the toolbar’s Layout
Select the measurement for which you want to open the workbook and click OK. The
workbook is
opened with the new data.
Page 271
9.6 Workbook Properties

You can rename a workbook by right-clicking on the workbook and selecting Workbook
| Properties.
In the Workbook Properties dialog, type a new title for the workbook and click OK.
Page 272
9.7 Page Properties

In the Page Properties dialog you can change the settings of each page. Right-click
on a page and
select Page | Properties.
On the Page page you can define a title for the page. The name is displayed at the
bottom of a
workbook. Here you can also define the page size.
If the Fit to window option is

selected, all the layers are displayed
in the visible area of the page. This
means that when a new layer is
added, the space for each layer gets
smaller.
With the Fixed size option you can
define an exact size in pixels for the
page. This will give more space for
each layer. With the scroll bar you
can scroll up and down the page to
i
ll l
Page 273
9.8 Example workbook

The example workbook, GSM, contains four pages, each of them displaying different
GSM-related
KPIs. The first page displays three different RF Parameters in line graphs stacked
on top of each other
in separate graphs. The Numerical data table on the right displays information in
numerical form.
Page 274
Page two contains Serving and Neighbor cell data in line and bar graphs.
Page 275
Page three contains L3 signaling data in a grid, and the decoded data in an info
view.
Page 276
The fourth page contains a map with the measurement route. The route is colored
with the RX level
color set.
Page 277
10 REPORTS
With Nemo Analyze, you can select the optimal approach for each statistical
reporting task. A set of
predefined compatible report templates for optimization and benchmarking purposes
are available.
Report templates are available in the following formats: Crystal reports (.rpt),
and two proprietary MS
Excel based formats: .srt (Spreadsheet Report Template) and .axt (Analyze Excel
Template). The
Crystal reports and .axt templates are legacy formats that are not updated anymore.
Hence, the
Spreadsheet Report Template (.srt) format is the recommended way for reporting,
both default
templates as well as the user-defined templates. In addition, the Workbook
templates of Analyze UI
can be used for reporting. However the Workbook templates has limited exporting
options: the
workbook can be only exported in PDF format.
10.1 Spreadsheet report templates (.srt)

Nemo Analyze spreadsheets offer a spreadsheet functionality that follows the
current de facto
standard in spreadsheet applications, fully integrated with Nemo Analyze's drive
test data-specific
post-processing features. You can drag and drop parameter aggregates and statistics
on a single
spreadsheet based on multiple measurement files and KPIs, and calculate e.g.
success rates by
employing the standard range of arithmetic operations and other capabilities of the
spreadsheet
approach. The resulting spreadsheet can be saved as a report template and
subsequently run as a
workbook on any measurement data.
For performing reporting using Nemo Analyze spreadsheets, see
Spreadsheets.
10.2 SIRIQ AKIA reports

Nemo Analyze offers an optional support for SIRIQ AKIA reports: SIRIQ AKIA LTE
performance survey
report and SIRIQ AKIA WCDMA performance survey report. For further details, see
SIRIQ AKIA
Reports product description.
10.3 Workbooks
The fully customizable and automatable Nemo Analyze workbooks provide you with a
completely new
angle on statistical reporting. Each workbook can contain several pages and data
views. All open
workbooks and all data views within the workbooks are automatically synchronized in
time. The
comprehensive selection of data views includes spreadsheets, maps, grids, line
graphs, bar graphs,
pie charts, layer 3 messages, surface grids, and color grids. Nemo Analyze features
a full set of readymade workbooks with pages and views for all the relevant KPIs.
Nemo Analyze workbooks can be
scheduled to be run automatically on predefined measurement file folders. Nemo
Analyze paired with
an automatic measurement solution such as Nemo Commander can indeed equal to
automatic up-todate measurement reports popping up on your desktop as and when
measurement sessions are
completed. All custom settings, such as workbooks, queries, layouts, color sets,
KPIs, etc., can be
imported and exported to enable sharing between colleagues.
Page 278
For performing reporting using Nemo Analyze workbooks, see Workbooks.
10.3.1
Generating reports
To generate reports, right-click on the measurement file from which the report will
be generated and
select Report. Select one of the existing report templates, e.g. GSM performance
report.rpt.
The report is generated and opened in a new workbook.
Page 279
Note that this may take a few minutes, depending on the processing power of the
computer and on the complexity of the report.
Page 280
The report contains several pages with all relevant network KPIs in different
graphs and tables.
Page 281
10.3.2
Generating reports from multiple files
You can also generate reports from multi-measurements or from folders containing
several files.
Right-click on the multi-measurement file name, or on the folder, and select Report
and the report
template.
In the Report Scope dialog you can define what kind of data will be included in the
report. After
making all the selections, click OK and the report is generated.
System and Band define from

which cellular systems and
frequency data will be included in
the report.
Page 282
Begin time and End time define

the time period from which data is
included in the report. By selecting
the Area option, and clicking the
Define Area.. tab, you can enter
the Select Area dialog below.
Select Area defines the

geographical area from which data
is included in the report.
You can zoom in
and zoom out

By clicking
Page 283

10.3.3
Running reports
You can run a report over any folder or measurement file by right-clicking on the
folder or file in the
Measurements section in Nemo Analyze and selecting Report from the pop-up menu.
After this, select
a report from the following pop-up menu. If a saved report has not been loaded into
the database yet,
select Open and select the report from the list.
Page 284
The Report Scope dialog box appears, allowing you to filter the report to show
results from selected
system, band, and area. This step is not, however, mandatory.
Finally, click OK to generate the Excel report. The report opens in Analyze
Spreadsheet Report Viewer.
The spreadsheet opens in Analyze Spreadsheet Report Viewer:
You are able to save the report as Excel workbook form or as PDF by clicking on the
toolbar Save as
Excel Workbook or Save as PDF.
Page 285
10.4 Creating custom reports with Spreadsheet Report Designer

With Spreadsheet Report Designer, you are able to create custom report templates
containing
statistics, charts, and map plots of drive test data in MS Excel (.xlsx) format.
Any metric from the
Parameters view, including custom KPIs created with KPI Workbench can be used to
produce source
data for the report template. It is also possible to show Workbook pages of Nemo
Analyze as images
on the report template. This is particularly useful for populating map plots in the
Excel report.
The data should be processed as much as possible beforehand in Nemo Analyze so that
the Excel
report shows the preprocessed statistics/metrics rather than raw values. For
example, it is better to
export average Ec/N0 to the report rather than raw Ec/N0 samples and then calculate
the average
using Excel formula. This is because the performance of MS Excel is not optimal
when processing
thousands of rows of data. It is also possible to create an empty report template
with all the
necessary formatting and charts directly in MS Excel, open the resulting .xlsx
document in the
Spreadsheet Report Designer and use it as baseline for the report.
10.4.1
Creating and opening a report template
To create a report template, select Tools | Spreadsheet in Nemo Analyze to open the
Spreadsheet
Report Designer and a new report template.
You are also able to create a report template layout beforehand using MS Excel. To
do this, open a
blank workbook in MS Excel by selecting File | New | Blank workbook. Add the
necessary
worksheets and charts and format their appearance. Once you have finished defining
your MS Excel
workbook, save it by selecting File | Save As.
If you have already created a report template with Spreadsheet Report Designer or
MS Excel and want
to use or edit it, select Open from the Spreadsheet Report Designer toolbar. A
dialog box showing all
existing templates in C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Analyze\Reports folder appears. Select a
spreadsheet
report template (.srt file), from the list of files and click Open.
Page 286
Once you have created or opened a report template in Spreadsheet Report Designer,
you need to
define which data will be exported when the report is run and the export location
within the MS Excel
report template.
To add a parameter to the template, select a cell on the report template and drag
and drop the
parameter into the report template. However, to improve the responsiveness of MS
Excel, it is
recommended not to use MS Excel in calculating raw values that contain tens of
thousands of rows.
For example, you should not export to MS Excel any isolated Ec/NO values and
calculate average
values with MS Excel´s formula. Success rates, etc. instead are well-suited to be
calculated using MS
Excel. For example, you can export from Nemo Analyze “Number of call attempts” and
“Number of call
attempt failures”. MS Excel will then calculate and show call setup failure rate,
i.e. “number of call
attempt failures”/”number of call attempts”.
You are also able to add a parameter to the template by left-clicking on a
parameter in the
Parameters view to open a dialog in which you are able to define in which format
the parameter is
shown on the report. It is possible to show the raw values (do not calculate
statistics) or to show
average or other pre-calculated statistical figures in the report. After having
defined the settings, click
Add Parameter to [the selected cell].
Page 287
To insert elements into a worksheet, select a cell on the report template and click
Insert in the
Spreadsheet Report Designer toolbar.
Workbook Image: Adds an image of a Workbook page to the worksheet. The workbook
image is
added to the cell that is currently selected. If a range of cells is selected, the
image is automatically
sized to cover the selection area. This function is typically applied to showing
map plots in reports.
Statistics Table: Inserts a statistics table to the worksheet.
Manual SQL Query: Allows the user to type a query directly into the worksheet.
Rows: Inserts new rows to the worksheet. When adding a parameter to the statistics
table the
statistics table must grow downwards. In Analyze version 7.00 and earlier, the
statistics table
automatically inserted a row to make room for the table. But this could cause
changes to any
formatting on left or right side of the statistics table. Starting from version
7.10 the statistics table
does not insert a row when a parameter is added. Instead it replaces data on a row
below the
statistics table. To make room for more parameters user can insert rows/cells
manually.
Columns: Inserts new columns to the worksheet.
Worksheet: Inserts a new worksheet to the workbook.
Chart: Inserts a chart to the worksheet. First select the data range, then select
Insert | Chart and
double-click to open SpreadsheetGear Chart Explorer.
Page 288
Picture: Inserts a bitmap picture to the worksheet.

Text Box: Inserts a text box to the worksheet.
Auto Shape: Inserts a shape such as box or ellipse to the worksheet.
Line: Inserts a line to the worksheet.
10.4.2
Column group
When setting two or more statistics tables to the same column group, the tables
will always have
exactly the same columns and column order. This happens regardless of the data in
the statistics table
- if there is no data for one of the columns, zero is displayed in the column. This
feature can be useful
to ensure that multiple statistics tables are aligned correctly in the report. By
default any newly added
statistics tables don’t belong to a group (”Column group” is empty).
Screenshots below show two statistics tables, the one at B2 is grouped by operator
and the one at B5
is grouped by device extension. Image A shows the tables in different column
groups, which makes
them work independently. Image B shows the tables in the same group, which makes
both tables
contain the same columns.
A: Two statistics tables in different column groups
Page 289
B: Two statistics tables in the same column group
10.4.3
Insert columns
When Insert Columns setting is off, any new columns added to the statistics table
replace existing
cells on the right side of the statistics table. When this setting is on, empty
cells are inserted when
new columns are added to the statistics table.
♦
Note: enabling this can cause unwanted side-effects, such as other cells and
frames in the report being moved unpredictably.
The screenshot below shows two statistics tables, and column F which is highlighted
with blue color.
In the screenshot below the statistics table at B2 has ”Insert columns”oset to

”No”owhich puts the
results into C3 and D3 without inserting any columns. The table at statistics B5
has ”Insert
columns”oset to ”Yes”, which inserts a cell when more space is needed for the
results. But in this case
you can see that inserting columns has broken the formatting for F column in the
screenshot above.
Default (and recommended) value for this settings is the results. But in this case
you can see that
inserting columns has y.this settin for all statistics tables.
Page 290
10.4.4
Cumulation and density for specific parameters
It is possible to add Cumulation and density statistics for parameters Serving

system and band
and Packet Tehcnology to a statistics table. This produces a statistic matrix that
can have groups on
rows and columns.
Note that when running a report with this type of statistics table, rows are
automatically inserted to
make room to expand the statistics table. This may cause unwanted side-effects to
formatting on left
and right sides of the statistics table.
10.4.5
Modifying a spreadsheet report template
It is possible to format the report template, e.g. to add headers and titles and
insert relevant
workbooks. Modifications can be performed in MS Excel or in Spreadsheet Report
Designer. To make
changes to the report template in MS Excel, select File | Edit in Microsoft Excel….
Report configuration dialog opens. Select Edit in Excel. You can also select
relevant measurements.
After making the changes, close MS Excel and continue using the Report Designer.
Page 291
Define the settings of the elements you have added to the worksheet by clicking the
View tab on the
toolbar.
Workbook Explorer defines settings related to workbooks.

Range explorer defines settings related to cells.
Chart explorer defines settings charts.
Shape explorer defines settings related to shapes.
Report Configuration Editor allows you to define the values of the input variables
of certain metrics
and KPIs in the Nemo Analyze Parameters view at the time of query execution. For
example, “Ec/N0
CPICH Nth best selected carriers”, where N and the channel range are defined by the
user at the time
of query execution. Such metrics can be used in the report template, and the values
of the input
variables are controlled with Report Configuration Editor.
Report configuration editor can be used to create easily customizable attributes in
a report, without
having to open the report in Spreadsheet report designer for editing. The typical
attributes to be
customized are channel number filters in scanner queries, N in Ec/N0 Nth best query
and similar. Any
query that has been configured to use filter, or has parameters prompted from user,
can take the
input attributes via the Report configuration editor.
Select Add group to add a parameter group. Parameter groups are used to organize
how the input
parameter appears in the dialog that is used to modify them. Using more than one
group is not
mandatory. However if there are a lot of parameters, groups help organizing them..
Page 292
Select Add parameter to define a new attribute. Identifier is the attribute name
used in the report
template. Name is the friendly name of the attribute shown in the configuration
dialog when
modifying the attributes. Default value is the default value for the attribute.
The attributes defined in Report configuration editor can be used anywhere in the
report as an
argument or filter values. The syntax is {?<identifier>?}. For example, if the
identifier of the attribute
is nth, the string typed in the argument field is {?nth?}. See example in the
screenshot below.
The values of the attributes can be changed from reports tab of the workspace
right-clicking and
selecting Configure.
Page 293
Report Configuration Editor’s Script tab contains a text editor. Here you can write
scripts that
customize the report behavior. The report script is written in Python programming
language and it
allows customizing the report.
Below you can see two examples of what can be done:
Exporting workbook pages to image files
The script can export workbook pages to a set of image files (one file per page) to
disk, while running
the report. This is a rather specialized feature that is not usually needed but can
be useful for some
situations. Here is an example script for doing this:
Opening the report automatically in Excel

The script can be used to automatically save and open the report in Excel after it
has been generated.
The script for doing this is pictured below:
Zoom in / Zoom Out / Zoom level allow you to adjust settings related to zooming.
To perform test runs for the reports, select Run Report from the toolbar and select
for which
measurement you want to run the report and click Run Report
Once all the workbooks and layouts are ready, you can save the template as a .srt
file by clicking File
| Save as. When the report in finished, you are able to run it the same manner as
normal Crystal
Reports.
The Format tab on the toolbar allows you to change formatting options of cells,
rows and columns.
Page 294
The spreadsheet opens in Analyze Spreadsheet Report Viewer:
You are able to save the report as Excel workbook form or as PDF by clicking on the
toolbar Save as
Excel Workbook or Save as PDF.
The Report Scope dialog box appears, allowing you to filter the report to show
results from selected
system, band, and area. This step is not, however, mandatory.
Finally, click OK to generate the Excel report. The report opens in Analyze
Spreadsheet Report Viewer.
To save the document as Excel workbook or as PDF by clicking on the toolbar Save as
Excel
Workbook or Save as PDF.
Page 295
10.4.6
Handling of deleted or renamed worksheets
When the Report Designer detects that a report item (query, workbook or statistics
table) is located
on a sheet that has been deleted or renamed, it shows a window that allows the user
to correct the
situation.
In the example below ”Data” worksheet has been renamed and ”Voice” worksheet has
been deleted.
With ”Update Worksheet References” the report items are updated so they will remain
on correct
pages. Also if worksheet is marked as deleted, there is a window that warns about
report items that
are about to be deleted. With ”Undo Excel Changes” button any changes made in Excel
are
cancelled.
10.4.7
Using VBA macros in Analyze Spreadsheet reports
Nemo Analyze spreadsheet reports are compatible with Excel; the report template
files (.srt) can be
opened with MS Excel. However, the Spreadsheet Report Designer does not support all
the
functionalities of MS Excel. The most commonly faced limitations include 3D charts,
pivot tables, forms
(e.g. buttons in Excel document to run macros or do other actions), and the VBA
macros. Spreadsheet
Report Designer has the feature to edit the report template in Excel (File|Edit in
Microsoft Excel…).
If non-supported features are added in the Edit in Excel mode, these additions are
lost when
reverting back to the Spreadsheet Report Designer, except for the VBA macros. The
VBA macros
cannot be run in Spreadsheet Report Designer, but macros created and saved for the
workbook in MS
Excel edit mode are carried over to the spreadsheet report template (.srt), and
they can be executed
after running the report template and saving it as Excel file.
The limitations of supported Excel features in Spreadsheet Report Designer can be
overcome by
recording a macro that adds all the non-supported Excel features to the template
when the report is
the executed report is opened in Excel.
Page 296
Step-by-step workflow
1. Create a spreadsheet report template (.srt) with all the needed input data from
Nemo Analyze
parameter tree.
2. Select File | Edit in Microsoft Excel… in Spreadsheet Report Designer.
3. A temporary .xlsm excel workbook is opened based on the .srt template.
4. In the .xlsm template, select View | Macros | Record Macro.
5. Add the functions you wish to have in your final report to the .xlsm, e.g. a
pivot table, and
select View | Macros | Stop recording.
6. Clean up everything you did during the macro recording from the .xlsm document
Page 297
7. Press Alt+F11 to access the VBA editor in Excel. In the project browser, go
to .xlsm
document name | Modules | Module 1, where you will see the VBA code of the created
macro. Copy all of the code between Sub and End sub rows.
8. Go to .xlsm document name | Microsoft Excel Objects | ThisWorkbook from the top
drop down menus, select Workbook and Open. The function body for Workbook_Open()
function is added. Paste the code of your custom macro into the body of the
function. The
Workbook_Open() function is automatically run every time the workbook is opened in
Excel.
Save the changes in VBA editor and close it, save the temporary .xlsm file and
close it, and
switch back to Spreadsheet Report Designer window and save the changes. The macro
you
created is now embedded in your .srt report template.
Page 298
9. Close the Spreadsheet Report Designer and run the report.

10. When the report is executed, it is opened in the Report Viewer window. From
there, select
Save as Excel Workbook. When the Save as dialog opens, change the file type to
Excel
macro-enabled workbook.
Page 299
10.4.8
Showing PDF/CDF charts in reports
These use cases explain two ways of showing PDF/CDF charts in reports.
10.4.8.1
Use case 1: Exporting a workbook from Nemo Analyze

1. In Nemo Analyze workspace, right-click on a parameter from the Parameters view
and select
Statistics By from a pop-up menu and select how you wish to filter the statistics.
2. The workbook displaying the PDF/CDF chart opens:
Page 300
Modify the workbook if needed. For more information, see “Workbooks”.
3. Save the workbook by right-clicking on it and selecting Workbook | Save from the
pop-up
menu
4. In the Save Workbook dialog, define the name of the report template, the menus
in which the
workbook will be saved and the group (e.g. User) in which the workbook will be
saved to. Click
OK.
Page 301
5. Open Spreadsheet Report Designer. Select Insert | Workbook image and select the
workbook
from the pop-up menu list.
6. Save the report template and run the report.
Page 302
10.4.8.2
Use case 2: Creating a chart in Spreadsheet Report Designer

1. Open a report template in Spreadsheet Report Designer
2. Select a cell or a range and left-click on a parameter in the Parameters view.
Doing this opens
a dialog in which you are able to define in which format the parameter is shown on
the report.
After defining the settings, click Add Parameter to [the selected cell].
The ResultSet shows the following statistics:

Lowerbound and Upperbound define the upper and lower boundaries of each
cumulation/density
bucket
Cumulation shows the cumulation as a percentage.
Cumulation sample show the absolute cumulation in samples
Density shows the density as a percentage.
Density sample shows the absolute density in samples
Group shows the value if you have benchmarked the measurement by a group.
3. Select File | Edit in Microsoft Excel… in Spreadsheet Report Designer. Then,
select Edit in
Excel in the Report Configuration dialog.
Page 303
4. In MS Excel, select the results by defining a range and go to Insert in the

ribbonbar and
select how you wish the results to be displayed (as a column, line, pie chart,
etc.). For further
instructions on how to use MS Excel, please refer to documentation provided by
Microsoft.
5. After making the changes, save the MS Excel file and close MS Excel. You can now
continue
using the Spreadsheet Report Designer.
Page 304
10.4.9
Showing map plots in report templates
This use case explains showing map plots as workbook images in reports.
1. First, a workbook with map plots must be created in Nemo Analyze. For more
information, see
“Workbooks”. Alternatively, predefined workbooks, such as “UMTS map summary”, can
be
used.
You are able to modify the Workbook in Nemo Analyze. It is, for example, possible
to change default
map (displayed in bold) by right-clicking on the map file in Workspace view and
selecting Default Map
from the pop-up menu. You can also set the side panel visible/invisible by right-
clicking on the map
and selecting/deselecting Side Panel from the pop-up menu. For more information,
see “Workspace”.
Please note that you cannot modify a Workbook image once it has been inserted to
the worksheet.
Modify the original workbook instead and then insert it as a Workbook image to the
worksheet. See
“Workbooks” for more information on how you can further to modify workbooks.
Page 305
2. Open a report template in Spreadsheet Report Designer. Click Insert | Workbook

image to
select from the pop-up menu a workbook containing map plots and define on which
page of
the workbook the map plot to be inserted is located.
3. Save and run the report. The workbook image is displayed on the Report Viewer.
4. In Analyze Spreadsheet Report Viewer, you are able to save the report as Excel
workbook
form or as PDF by clicking on the toolbar Save as Excel Workbook or Save as PDF.
Page 306
10.5 Reporting with Microsoft Excel

With Nemo Analyze’s Microsoft Excel export templates, you can export query result
data sets from
Nemo Analyze to a selected location within an existing MS Excel document. The
exported parameters
and the export locations within the MS Excel workbook are saved as a report
template. The template
can be subsequently run on any measurement data. The feature allows you to use the
full data
formatting functionality of MS Excel in reporting and make use of any existing,
custom-made MS Excel
spreadsheets.
In the following example, Sheet1 of the existing target MS Excel sheet displays the
final report output
which is generated based on input data sets on Sheet2. In other words, as Sheet2
acts as a basis for
the final output on Sheet1, the data sets should in this case be exported to the
appropriate columns
on Sheet2.
♦
Note: Before doing anything else, it is recommended to open the data set intended
for export in grid data view to check the data set’s number of columns and column
order. The data set will be exported from Nemo Analyze in fixed table format and
thus it may be necessary to make changes to the column order of the target MS
Excel sheet before the export operation.
The target MS Excel workbook must be saved to Nemo Analyze’s default Reports
directory. To find out
what the default folder for reports is, select View | Options from the Ribbonbar,
and Environment |
Default Paths | Reports in the Options dialog.
To create an MS Excel export template, select Tools | Spreadsheet Old Excel Export
Template.
Page 307
The Excel Export Template dialog opens.
Excel workbook defines an existing MS Excel workbook as the target spreadsheet for
the export.
Excel template defines a name for the new MS Excel export template.
Run macro on finish, when selected, runs the chosen macro in Excel once the export
has been
performed.
Exported queries displays all queries selected for export.
Add opens the Excel Template Row dialog, enabling you to define a new query. It is
also possible to
drag parameters from the Parameters view to the excel report creation template
dialog.
Modify allows you to modify an existing query. Select the query in the Exported
queries field and
click the Modify button.
Delete allows you to delete an existing query. Select the query in the Exported
queries field and
click the Delete button.
Preview displays the columns of the query data set selected in the Exported queries
field.
Exported images displays all data view images selected for export.
Add opens the Excel Export Template dialog, enabling you to define a new image.
Page 308
Modify allows you to modify an existing image. Select the image in the Exported
images field and
click the Modify button.
Delete allows you to delete an existing image. Select the query in the Exported
images field and
click the Delete button.
To browse for an existing Excel workbook (to be used as the target spreadsheet for
the export), click
the … button.
Page 309
Select the Excel workbook you want to use as the target spreadsheet for the export
and click Open.
The path of the target spreadsheet is displayed in the Excel workbook field. To
rename the export
template, type a new name to the Excel template field.
To define a new query for export, click the Add button.
The Excel Template Row dialog opens.
Sheet name defines the target sheet in the target MS Excel workbook for the
exported parameter
data set.
Cell defines the target cell in the target MS Excel workbook for the exported
parameter data set. In
the present example, A2 is selected (instead of e.g. A1) because the first row of
Sheet2 is reserved for
column names (see screenshot on page 286).
♦
Note: As the parameter data set is likely to contain more than one column, the
target cell defined here will act as the upper left corner of the exported
parameter
data set. Thus, if the exported parameter data set contains three columns, and the
target cell is defined as C2, the first-row cells of the second and the third
columns
will be D2 and E2 respectively. The Preview field in the Excel Export Template
dialog displays the columns included in the selected parameter data set.
Page 310
Note: To make the exported data sets as versatile as possible in terms of the
existing operations in the target MS Excel workbooks, all irrelevant data,
including
the Nemo Analyze column names, are removed from the exported data sets.
Parameter defines the exported parameter data set. Click the … button to browse for
a parameter.
With Modify you are able to modify the parameter data set that has been selected in
the Parameter
box.
Select …and the Analyze Wizard – Start dialog opens.
Pick measurement parameter opens the Parameters view. The Parameters view enables
the use of
both ready-made parameters and previously saved custom KPIs (i.e. parameters
created using the
KPI workbench or SQL). By default, custom KPIs can be found in the Parameters view
under the User
item.
For Generic query wizard, see page 349.
For Manual query, see page 354.
For Correlate parameters, see page 355.
Page 311
Selecting Pick measurement parameters in Analyze Wizard – Start dialog opens the
Analyze Wizard –
Measurement Parameters dialog.
Select a parameter and click Finish. Previously saved custom KPIs can be found in
the Parameters
view under the User item.
The Excel Template Row dialog opens.
Define Sheet name, Cell, Parameter, and Statistics. With Modify you are able to
modify the
parameter that has been selected in the Parameter box.
The defined query is now displayed as a row in the Exported queries field. The
Preview field
displays the columns the selected query contains and the column numbers they will
take up in the
target spreadsheet.
If you want to add another query, click Add… in the Excel Export Template and
repeat the
procedure above.
To edit an existing query, select the query in the Exported queries field and click
the Modify button.
Page 312
To delete an existing query, select the query in the Exported queries field and
click the Delete
button.
It is also possible to drag parameters from the Parameters view to the Excel report
creation template
dialog.
In the Exported images section it is possible to define images to be exported into
the Excel repot.
Images can be exported from a file or from Analyze workbook.
To define a new data view image for export, click Add… in the Exported Images
section.
The Export Image dialog opens
File defines the name of an image file that will be exported to Excel.
Workbook defines the workbook that will be exported to Excel as an image.
Page, Image position, Image size, and Relative size define to which page of the
workbook the
image is to be exported, the desired position and the size of the image, and the
size of the image in
percentage.
Sheet name defines the name of the Excel sheet that the image is exported to.
Once Page name, Cell, and Parameter have all been defined, select OK.
If you want to add another data view image, click Add in the Excel Export Template
and repeat the
procedure above.
To edit an existing image, select the image in the Exported images field and click
the Modify
button.
To delete an existing query, select the image in the Exported images field and
click the Delete.
Once all the intended queries and images have been added to the template, click OK.
The Excel export template is saved to the default Report directory. To find out
what the defined folder
is, go to View | Options | Environment | Default Paths | Reports.
To load the Excel export template to the report template database, first click on
the
bottom of the workspace panel.
Page 313
icon on the
The Reports page of the Workspace opens.
Next, double-click on the Excel export template in the Report Folder field.
The Excel export template is added to the database and is now displayed in the
Loaded field.
Page 314
To run the Excel export template on a measurement file/folder, right-click on the

measurement file/
folder and select Report|[Excel export template].axt from the popup menu.
Page 315
The parameter data sets defined in the export template are exported to the defined
page (Sheet2 in
the present example) of the MS Excel workbook.
Microsoft Excel generates the final output page (Sheet1) based on the input page
(Sheet2).
Page 316
10.6 Reporting with Crystal Reports

In Nemo Analyze you can run statistics in the form of reports over a single or
multiple measurement
files. The reports include essential network and application performance KPIs as
defined by standards
specifications, such as, ETSI, ANSI, etc. In addition, smaller-scale statistics can
be run over a single
parameter in the User Interface.
Reporting in Nemo Analyze is based on Crystal Reports. The Crystal Report Viewer
tool is embedded in
Nemo Analyze. Reports can be exported to PDF, Excel, etc., as in standard Crystal
Reports.
Default report templates with all the most essential KPIs are provided in Nemo
Analyze, but you can
also create your own report templates. For this you will need the Crystal Reports
Professional edition
(independent third-party software).
10.6.1
Exporting reports
After you have generated a report you can export it to another format. Click the
Export Report
button in the report workbook.
In the Export dialog, select the output format and the destination for the exported
file. Click OK.
Page 317
In the Export Options dialog, you can select the report pages that will be
exported. The dialog also
allows creating bookmarks from group tree. When finished, click OK.
The report is saved in the location and format defined.
10.6.2
Configuring reports
The report contents and layout are user-configurable. Select the Reports page in
the Workspace,
right-click on the report template that you want to configure, and select
Configure.
In the Report Configuration dialog you can edit the report contents. On the General
page you can
select which statistics are shown in the report. You can also type a Report
description and a Report
Page 318
title that will be shown on the report front page. Show bins defines whether
numerical data is shown
in cumulation and density histograms.
Under the other items you find a list of available parameters. For each parameter
you can define some
properties, such as, the lower and upper bound, threshold, and channel numbers. The
selection
depends on the parameter.
The changes will affect all reports that are generated using this template.
Page 319
For benchmarking reports you need to define how the benchmarking report is grouped.
Open the
Report Configuration dialog for a benchmarking report, click on General. In the
Benchmark by
field select the grouping factor and click OK.
10.7 Reporting with PowerPoint

Nemo Analyze allows creating reports with Microsoft PowerPoint. The user can create
PowerPoint
report templates and define workbook pages or pictures that are exported from
Analyze to
PowerPoint. PowerPoint reporting functionality automates populating the report
without having to copy
and paste pictures. The Work Flow below explains step by step how to first create a
PowerPoint
template, and how to run a report.
For reporting with PowerPoint the PowerPoint version must be 2007 or newer.
Work Flow:
1. In Nemo Analyze, create workbooks that are needed in the report. Workbooks may
have one
or multiple pages. Save workbooks.
Start Microsoft PowerPoint. When Analyze is installed on the computer, Analyze
reporting is shown
as a tab in PowerPoint’s toolbar.
2. In PowerPoint select Fetch workbook images. Analyze must be running on the
background.
You must first select a measurement: it could be any measurement saved on the
computer.
Page 320
3. This opens the Fetch Workbook Images dialog. You can now select the workbooks
you want to
use in the report template.
Search allows searching for workbooks.

You can define the image size with Image Width and Image Height. The default image
size is
800x600 pixels.
Press Ok. Analyze opens the selected workbooks and copies the images to Workbook
Image
Gallery. This may take a few moments depending on the amount and size of workbooks.
Once all
images are copied into the gallery the progress window closes.
Page 321
4. To add images to the report select Workbook Image Gallery.
The View image dropdown menu shows all images that are copied in the gallery. After
selecting an
image, click Add… to add the image in the report.
♦
Note that before adding images, a shape/ frame into which the images is added
must selected in a slide, otherwise images cannot be added. PowerPoint includes
layout options that are suitable for Analyze reporting: they include content shapes
that can be selected for adding images.
Clicking | First, < Previous or Next> allow moving from an image to another.
Page 322
Search allows searching for images by their name. Note that entering a word without
a colon (:)
searches for image names including that word before the colon, and searching for a
name with a colon
(for example, :application) searches for image names that include the word after
the colon.
Keep aspect ratio and Fit to shape change the resolution of the image. The result
is shown in the
Workbook Image Gallery’s preview.
Selecting Dim added image darkens the added place holder images. This helps
identifying the
images that are from Nemo Analyze, for instance in case there are also other images
in the report.
When the report is run.images are updated and longer appear dimmed.
Note that if images are removed from the workbook image gallery, the only way to
restore
them is by fetching them again from Nemo Analyze.
When all place holder images are chosen and the report template is ready, you can
save the template.
5. To run a report, go to Nemo Analyze. Right click on a measurement you want to
run the report
on and select Report | Create a PowerPoint Report. Select the PowerPoint report
template
you want to use. A progress window is displayed while the report is run.
In a ready report the images no longer appear dimmed. You can further modify the
report. Remember
to save the report when it is completed.
Page 323
10.7.1
PowerPoint 2007 setup
Enabling Analyze reporting on PowerPoint 2007 version requires the following setup
process. Note that
all updates through Microsoft Update concerning Microsoft Office 2007 must be
installed before
performing the setup.
1. Open the main menu and search POWERPNT.EXE. Right-click on POWERPNT.EXE and
click
Run as administrator.
Page 324
2. The User Account Control dialog opens. Click Yes.
3. A new PowerPoint presentation opens. Click on the main menu button on the upper
left-hand
corner to open the main menu.
4. On the main menu, click PowerPoint Options.
Page 325
5. The PowerPoint Options dialog opens. Click Add-Ins.
6. The Add-ins view opens. Click Go…
Page 326
7. The COM Add-Ins dialog opens. Select AnalyzePowerPointAddIns, click Remove, and
then click OK.
8. Close PowerPoint.
9. Open the AnalyzePowerPointAddIns.vsto file from C: | Program Files | Anite |
Nemo
Analyze.
Page 327
10. Install AnalyzePowerPointAddIns by clicking Install. When the installation is

complete,
close Microsoft Office Customization Installer by clicking Close.
11. If the Program Compatibility Assistant dialog opens, click This program
installed
correctly.
Page 328
12. Open PowerPoint. You are now able to use the Analyze Reporting functionality.
10.8 Creating Custom Queries

♦
NOTE: Using the easy-to-use graphical user interface of KPI Workbench, the user
is able to perform all SQL-specific tasks and more without proficiency in the SQL
language.
Nemo Analyze is based on an SQL database. The data is stored and retrieved from the
database using
SQL queries via the standard ODBC interface. The results of the SQL queries can be
further processed
using the KPI workbench, Nemo Analyze’s graphical, flowchart-based scripting
engine. The results of
the SQL queries and the KPI Workbench scripts can be visualized using Nemo
Analyze’s
comprehensive selection of data views, or any third party post-processing tool
supporting ODBC
connectivity. This section describes the guidelines for making custom KPIs with
both SQL (see SQL
queries on page 330) and the KPI Workbench (see Custom KPI Workbench on page 356).
SQL queries represent a powerful tool for complex data filtering and data
processing when the data is
in scalar format. However, SQL has some downsides as well: it is impossible to
create queries that
track certain event sequences, such as changes in a particular parameter value from
row to row. It is
also impossible to merge data from more than two data sets into a single result set
based on time.
Moreover, the use of SQL queries requires knowledge of the Nemo Analyze database
schema and
proficiency in SQL.
The KPI workbench enables the creation of complex queries, including time-based
merging of multiple
inputs, and the tracking of particular event sequences. The graphical user
interface makes it also
easier to use than SQL. To summarize the differences between the KPI Workbench and
SQL, the KPI
workbench is a more powerful tool for data customization, whereas SQL is sometimes
more
convenient when filtering or formatting raw data. For a user without previous
experience with SQL,
the KPI workbench is recommended as the primary data customization tool.
Page 329
10.9 SQL queries

10.9.1
Getting started
As a prerequisite, the following documents and tools are recommended as a reference

for developing
SQL queries:
1. SQL editor. Queries can be written with the Nemo Analyze database browser (see
Database
Browser on page 356) but there are also many specifically SQL-oriented third-party
editors
available. Good freeware tools are also available, such as
http://gpoulose.home.att.net/Tools/QTODBC61.msi
2. Nemo File Format specification. The document describes the Nemo measurement file
format
on an event-by-event basis. The file format specification can be downloaded from
the Nemo
User Club, or accessed via Nemo Analyze by selecting Help | Nemo file format from
the
Ribbonbar.
3. Open access SQL reference. The document describes the supported SQL syntax and
can be
downloaded from the Nemo User Club. In addition to the Open access SQL, Anite has
added
some proprietary scalar functions and stored procedures for common tasks needed in
drive
test data processing. The description of Anite’s proprietary scalar functions and
stored
procedures can be accessed by selecting Help | Help topics from the Ribbonbar and
searching
the help with the keywords scalar functions or stored procedures.
4. Nemo Analyze database schema. Database schema can be accessed and queried by
selecting
Help | | Creating Customer Queries | SQL Queries | SQL Queries Nemo Analyze
Database
schema from the Ribbonbar. Note that querying the schema may take several minutes.
The
schema can be exported as a PDF document.
Page 330
10.9.2
Nemo Analyze database schema
Data in a relational database is stored as relations which are perceived by the

user as tables. Each
table represents an object or an event (e.g. employee, sales order, etc.). Each row
in a table
represents a unique instance of the object or event. Each column represents a
different class of
information defining the object or event, e.g. first name, last name, salary,
customer name, order
charge, etc.
In the Nemo Analyze database, the table structure is based on the event structure
of the Nemo log file
format. That is, each event in the Nemo file format has a corresponding table in
the database. For
instance, a BLER event is always recorded when the mobile’s Block Error Rate
changes. When the log
file is loaded into the Nemo Analyze database, each BLER event is parsed as a new
row in the BLER
table.
When referring to a table in a query, the syntax is “[schema name]”.”[table name]”.
For example,
"Nemo.UMTS"."BLER”, where the schema is Nemo.UMTS and the table BLER.
10.9.3
Relations between tables
If rows in a given table can be associated with rows in another table, the tables
are said to have a
relationship between each other. Generally, these relationships can be of three
different types: oneto-one, one-to-many, and many-to-many. The Nemo Analyze
database schema allows one-to-one and
one-to-many relations.
One-to-one relation means that each row in a given table can have a relation with a
single row in
another table. In one-to-many relation, each row in a given table can have a
relation with multiple
rows in another table.
These relations can be defined by two columns in a table: the columns primary key
and foreign key.
Each table by necessity has a primary key. Primary key is a column that uniquely
identifies each row
within a table. In Nemo Analyze database, the primary key column is always named as
oid. If a table
has relations with other table(s) it will also contain a foreign key column for
each related table. The
foreign key column contains the value of the primary key values (oid) of the
associated row(s) in the
other table. Foreign key column names always include the prefix the_, as with the
following names:
the_parent, the_event, and the_connection. For examples of how the relations are
used in
practice, please see the following two chapters that describe the mapping of static
and dynamic
events to database tables.
10.9.4
Mapping of Nemo log file events to database tables
The data in Nemo log files is written in event-based format. All data related to a
same object (e.g.
Block Error Rate) is written as a single event. Each different event type in Nemo
file format has a
corresponding table structure in the database. Events can be split into two
categories. Static events
always have the same amount of information elements, i.e. columns. Dynamic events
have a varying
number of information elements. A typical example of a static event is SHO. It
reports soft handover
events in UMTS. It contains always the same information elements, including SHO
status, number of
scrambling codes added to the active set, etc. An example of a dynamic event is
ECNO. The ECNO
event reports the RSCP and Ec/N0 of all measured active, monitored, detected, and
undetected cells.
The number of measured cells constantly varies based on the location of the
measurement device in
the network. The number of information elements, i.e. columns, in the ECNO event
varies accordingly.
The diagram below illustrates the mapping of SHO events to different database
tables. A similar
diagram applies to all static events. For each SHO event in the log file, there is
one row written in the
Page 331
SHO table. All soft handover-specific information elements within the SHO event are
written to the
corresponding columns in the SHO table.
Generic information elements common to all events are written in the Event table.
Such information
elements include time, latitude, longitude, GPS distance, etc. There is a one-to-
one relation between
the SHO table and the Event table. The column the_event in the SHO table is a
foreign key, pointing
to the oid column in the Event table. In other words, each unique row value in the
column the_event
in the SHO table corresponds with a unique row value in the column oid in the Event
table. Based on
this correspondence, the two tables can be correlated.
The Device table contains a row for each log file loaded into the database. The
only information
column in this table is the log file extension. There is a one-to-many relation
between the SHO table
and the Device table. The SHO table contains a row for each SHO event from each log
file loaded into
the database. Each row of the SHO table belonging to same log file points to the
same row in the
Device table. That is, the value in the column the_device in the SHO table is the
same on all rows
that come from the same log file, corresponding with a single row value in the
column oid in the
Device table.
The Measurement table contains a row for each measurement loaded into the database.
It contains all
measurement-specific information columns, including the log file title. It should
be noted that the term
measurement refers to one or multiple log files collected at the same time. If a
Nemo Outdoor Multi
measurement is made with 4 terminals, there will be a single measurement session
and 4 log files. In
this case, the measurement title is the same for all log files and the log files
are differentiated from
each other using different file extensions. When these files are loaded into the
Nemo Analyze
database, there will be 4 rows in the Device table, one for each log file, and one
row in the
Measurement table. So there is a one-to-many relation between the Measurement and
Device tables.
That is, the value in the column the_measurement in the Device table is the same on
all rows that
come from the same measurement session, corresponding with a single row value in
the oid column
of the Measurement table.
Page 332
The diagram below illustrates the mapping of ECNO events into different database
tables. The ECNO
event in the log file contains Ec/N0, RSCP, channel number and scrambling code for
each measured
cell, and carrier RSSI for each measured channel. Because the number of information
elements in
each ECNO event varies, the data has been split to multiple different tables in
order to achieve
efficient data storage in the database. As with all dynamic size events, the data
is split to multiple
tables in the database. There is a single row written in the ECNO table for each
ECNO event in the log
file. The ECNO table consists of columns such as the number of active set cells,
the number of
monitored set cells, etc. The relations between the tables ECNO, Event, Device, and
Measurement are
similar to those of the SHO event, see previous example.
There is a one-to-many relation between the tables ECNO and Channel. In the Channel
table, there is
a row for each carrier RSSI value reported in an ECN0 event. All the rows in the
Channel table that
belong to the same ECN0 event have the same value in the column the_parent. The
value in the
column the_parent equals the oid value of the matching row in the ECN0 table.
There is also a one-to-many relation between the tables ECNO and Cell. For each
measured cell in the
ECNO event, there is a row in the Cell table. All the rows in the Cell table
belonging to the same ECN0
event have the same value in the column the_parent. The value in the column
the_parent equals
the oid value of the matching row in the ECN0 table.
As an example, consider an ECN0 event that includes measurement results from six
different cells.
Two of these cells are in channel x, and the rest in channel y. When parsed to the
database, the event
will produce one row in the ECN0 table, two rows in the Channel table, and six rows
in the Cell table.
Page 333
The structures of all tables in the database follow the same principle as the SHO
event and the ECNO
event above. All tables in the database are structured based on the same principle
with either the SHO
event or the ECNO event (discussed above). Each column, table, and relation is
described in detail in
the Nemo Analyze database schema.
10.9.5
Views – Automatically joined tables
As mentioned earlier, each information element is stored as a separate table based

on the event
structure of the Nemo log file format. General information, including time, lat,
long, and log file name,
are stored in the tables Measurement, Device and Event. These tables have relations
with
measurement data tables, as described in the dynamic and static event examples
above.
Typically, when a query is made, the data of interest, such as RX level, Ec/N0,
etc. is retrieved
together with corresponding general information which at the minimum includes time,
latitude and
longitude. This means that the tables Event, Device and Measurement must be joined
with the table
containing the data of interest.
The Nemo Analyze database schema contains views for each data table that results
from joining the
Event, Device and Measurement tables. In other words, a view is a virtual table
that joins the tables
Event, Device, and Measurement as one. When using a view in an SQL query, the
tables are joined by
the ODBC driver and not by the user. The views should always be used when there is
need for viewing
time, lat, long, etc. information together with the data of interest. This is for
two reasons. Firstly, the
views are easier to use because queries become simpler when there is no need for
performing the join
operation as part of the SQL query itself. Secondly, the query performance is also
a little bit better
when using views instead of query-based join operations.
A “+” character at the end of the table name identifies a table as a view. For
example, the view
corresponding with the SHO table is titled SHO+. In the screenshot below, all the
columns in the
BLER+ table are listed. It can be seen that BLER, time, lat, long, measurement
name, etc. are all
available in the same table.
Page 334
The screenshot below demonstrates how views are used as part of queries. Both of
the illustrated
queries return the same information, i.e. time and bler. The upper query represents
a situation where
the join is performed as part of the SQL query, i.e. without using the relevant
view. The query
retrieves bler from the BLER table and time from the Event table. The Event and
BLER tables are
joined with the WHERE clause of the query. The lower query represents a situation
where the relevant
view is used, i.e. the query retrieves both time and the parameter bler from the
BLER+ table.
Page 335
10.9.6
Database timestamps
The Nemo Analyze database stores time in two different formats. The column sql_time
in the Event
table contains the timestamps of each measurement event in a standard, readable SQL
timestamp
format. The column time in the Event table contains the timestamp in proprietary
binary format. The
Nemo measurement file format is time-based, as opposed to sample-based. In other
words, a new
“sample” is created on a timeline only when changes occur in the monitored
parameter and the
temporal length of the samples depends entirely on how often changes occur in the
parameter value.
This also means that the samples are not equal in weight, as the duration of each
sample affects the
weight of the sample. In order to calculate correct statistics, each sample has to
be weighted by its
duration. Also, to ensure that line graphs and map plots are drawn accurately, the
duration of each
sample must be taken into account.
The binary time stored in the column time (of the Event table and of all the views)
contains both the
timestamp and the duration of the sample. The column sql_time contains only the
timestamp. When
custom queries are used in Nemo Analyze, the binary timestamp time should always be
used. Nemo Analyze converts the binary time to timestamp at runtime, and
automatically utilizes the
sample duration (embedded in the timestamp) in route colouring and line drawing.
The screenshot above shows how the sample duration in milliseconds can be retrieved
from the binary
timestamp using the scalar function TI_INTERVAL(). It is also evident that the
duration of some
Page 336
events is 0. These event parameters (such as dropped call, call attempt failure,
and cell reselection)
do not have duration, as they represent events that occur at a point in time.
Therefore, the scalar
function TI_INTERVAL(time) returns the value 0 ms. All other parameters, such as Rx
level, Ec/N0,
throughput, BLER, etc., contain a duration.
When using Nemo Analyze queries with third-party tools, sql_time and
TI_INTERVAL(time) must
be used instead of the binary timestamp. Moreover, sql_time must always be used as
part of the
query when sorting the result data set by time or when using conditions (e.g.
x.sql_time >
y.sql_time).
10.9.7
Filtering log files
The queries are usually run on a subset of log files that is narrowed down from all
the files in the
database. The optimal query performance is achieved using Anite’s proprietary, non-
SQL filters in the
end of the queries. These are called hints. Because of the physical structure of
the Nemo Analyze
database, all irrelevant data is filtered out and not processed. The hints point
directly to the relevant
log file(s), enabling outstanding query performance regardless of the database
size. Hints are added
to the end of the query in the following format:
/*
MEAS({measurement_file_name_1}:{file_extension}|{measurement_file_name_2}:{file_
extension}|....) */
The screenshot below shows an example of how the filter should be integrated into a
query. An
example of the same query in SQL format is also provided. It should be noted that
log file
filtering queries are unnecessary when creating custom SQL queries that are
intended for
use with Nemo Analyze only. This is because Nemo Analyze automatically adds the
hints to
the queries at runtime.
Page 337
10.9.8
Value enumeration
All textual parameters with a discrete list of possible values are written to the
database as numbers.
In other words, each textual value has a corresponding numerical value. Examples of
such parameters
include system (GSM, UMTS, etc.), handover type, call disconnect status, call
failure cause, etc. The
textual values of all parameters of this type are stored in a ValueEnum table (see
screenshot below).
The two screenshots below show two versions of the same query. The first one
returns values in
numerical format. The second one uses the VAL_TO_STRING(<param_name>, <input
column>)
scalar function for retrieving the textual value for each numerical value. The
scalar function
VAL_TO_STRING retrieves the value enumeration automatically from the ValueEnum
table.
Page 338
It should be noted that the use of the scalar function VAL_TO_STRING is unnecessary
when creating
custom SQL queries that are intended for use with Nemo Analyze only. This is
because Nemo Analyze
displays the value enumeration automatically.
10.9.9
Connections
The connection sessions measured during a drive test are stored as connection
tables. The following
connections and connection tables exist: Voice, Handover, Attach,
PDPContextActivation, Data, RRC,
DataTransfer, MMS, SMS, POC, LAU, RAU, and Ping. The connections often have a
hierarchical
structure. For example, the DataTransfer connection always has the Data Connection
table as its
parent connection. The Data Connection table has the PDPContextActivation table as
its parent
connection. Finally, the PDPContextActivation table has the Attach table as its
parent connection. All
data recorded during a measurement session has by necessity a relation (or
relations) with the
connection tables. Examples of such data include Tx power (recorded only during
voice call or packet
session), application throughput (recorded only during data transfer), and BLER
(recorded only during
packet session and voice call).
As an example, the screenshot below illustrates the relations between the tables
DAS and Attach.
Attach is a connection table, containing a row for each Attach session. The DAS
table contains a row
for each uplink and downlink application throughput sample. Each row of the DAS
table is related to
the corresponding connection in the Attach table via the_connection foreign key.
The Attach table has
also relations with the GAA (Attach attempt), GAC (Attach connected), CAD (Attach
disconnected),
and CAF (Attach failure) tables. All the different connection tables follow the
same principle. They
contain all data specific to a particular session, including the data events that
define the beginning and
the end of the session.
Page 339
The connection tables can be used for various purposes:

Grouping data per session, e.g. average Data throughput per session:
SELECT the_connection, AVG("app_throughput_downlink")
FROM "Nemo"."DAS+"
WHERE "throughput_status"=1
GROUP BY the_connection
Filtering in only those throughput samples that were recorded during a data
transfer:
Connection types:
0="Unknown"
1="Voice"
2="Handover"
3="Attach"
4="PDP contect
activation"
5="Data"
6="RRC"
7="Data transfer"
8="MMS"
9="SMS"
10="POC"
11="LAU"
12="RAU"
13="Ping"
Filtering in only those throughput samples that were recorded when PDP context was
active and
Access point was Internet:
The two scalar functions utilized in the examples above can be defined as follows:
CONN_IS_SHARED(conn1.”oid”, conn2.”oid”). Checks if the two connections are
actually the same, or
if one of the connections is the parent of the other
CONN_IS_TYPE(conn.”oid”, numeric_exp). Checks if the connection is of a particular
type. The
connection types are listed in the example above.
10.9.10
Correlating tables based on time
Most tables do not have relations with each other. However, it is still often
necessary to correlate data
from these unrelated tables based on time. For example, the tables Rx level and Rx
quality are not
related, but the user may still want to correlate them based on time to find
instances where bad Rx
quality has coincided with good Rx level.
Generally, for performing correlations of this type, it is recommendable to use
Nemo Analyze’s
“Correlate parameters” functionality or the KPI Workbench. However, it is also
possible to correlate
the two tables using SQL and proprietary keywords, as explained in the two examples
above.
Sample-based correlation
The procedure for correlating two data sets sample by sample based on time is as
follows:
Page 340
1.
Define the tables to be joined using a FROM clause: FROM table x, table y
2.
Define the x.”time” = y.”time” condition using a WHERE clause

Note that the order in which the tables are entered to the FROM clause is
extremely important. When the table x is the first one in the FROM clause:
Each sample from the table y is retrieved and checked based on the following
condition: if there is an
x sample that has the same timestamp as the y sample OR if the x timestamp falls to
the validity time
interval of the y sample
When the table y is the first one in the FROM clause, the comparison is performed
vice versa
♦
Note that the comparison is not bi-directional. If there is a significant

difference in
the sample periods of the tables x and y, the table that has a smaller sample
period should be selected as the last one (y) in order to get highest possible
resolution
3.
Define the condition x.the_device = y.the_device using a WHERE clause. This limits
the time-
based correlation into individual measurement files, improving the performance of

the query and
ensuring that the correlation is performed within a single log file.
4.
Add the hint /* OPTIONS(USE_TIME_SCOPE) */ at the end of the SQL query. This
enables the
join based on time scope.

The following screenshot shows an example correlation of the best active set cell
Tx power and RSCP,
filtered from periods where RSCP is < -95 dBm
Tx power is in the table ”Nemo.UMTS”.”TXPC” and RSCP is in the table
”Nemo.UMTS.ECNO”.”Cell”.
There is no established relation between the tables.
All Tx power samples that fall within the validity time interval of an RSCP sample
with the value
<-95 are retrieved.
10.9.11
Time range correlation
Data can be correlated with a connection session or a time range if start and stop
events can be
retrieved from the database. A common example of time range correlation is a
situation where data is
tagged to a particular connection session and there is no established relation with
the connection
table. For instance, the parameters Ec/N0, RSCP, and RxLevel are always recorded,
whether or not a
voice call or other connection session is active. Although these parameters do not
have established
relations with the connection tables (see Connections), the user may still want to
correlate connection
session information with them, e.g. to filter Ec/N0 from data transfers only, to
calculate average
Ec/N0 per data transfer, etc.
Below you can find an example query that returns active set best RSCP from the time
instants that
coincide with active data transfer sessions. The time range correlation is
performed based on simple
time conditions as part of the WHERE clause of the query. The time condition should
be defined using
the column sql_time. The column time cannot be used because it is in a binary
format understood by
Nemo Analyze only. Also T_(time) should not be used although it is the actual
timestamp. This is
because the query performance with T_(time) is lower than with sql_time because
T_(time) does not
use indexing. Note also that the start and end points of the time range need to be
joined (see the last
Page 341
condition in the WHERE clause). In practice this is possible only with tables that
have relations with
connection tables.
10.9.12
Guidelines for creating SQL queries
New custom SQL queries can be developed using an SQL editor. The Database Browser
functionality,
or one of the many available third-party query editors, can be used for the
purpose. When the query
is complete and tested, it can be copied to the Query Manager as a new custom
query. To access the
Query Manager, select Tools | Query manager from the Ribbonbar. Both the custom SQL
queries
and the ones created with the KPI Workbench can be found under the User branch of
the Parameters
view. To execute a query on a measurement file/folder, select a measurement
file/folder in the
Workspace and then double-click on a query.
The process of creating a new query starts with the identification of relevant
input data. The tables
that contain the relevant data can be identified by examining the Nemo Analyze
database schema (see
Nemo Analyze database schema). The best way to find the data of interest is to
export the schema to
a PDF document and to search the document for the parameter name. The schema
describes the
database table by table, column by column, and relation by relation. Please note
that the same
parameter can exist in multiple tables, mainly because of the system split, e.g.
the tables
“GSM”.”BLER” and “UMTS”.”BLER” both contain the column bler.
The design phase of the new query follows. The source data is appropriately
processed based on the
selected tables. The supported SQL syntax is discussed in the reference documents
(see Getting
started for more information).
With Nemo Analyze’s extensive set of premade queries, it is most of the time
sufficient to only modify
some of the queries found in the Parameters view. The recommended starting point is
to first open the
query in a data view. Once the query has been run, the query can be captured in SQL
format from the
Log window. To show output from SQL, select SQL in the Log window. If not visible,
the Log window
can be enabled by selecting View | Log window from the Ribbonbar. Output from SQL
contains all
executed queries in the order of execution (see screenshot below). To copy the
contents of the SQL
History view, select the contents, right-click on the selection, and select Copy
Paste the query to the Nemo Analyze database browser.
If using the Nemo Analyze database browser for query development, the SQL of an
existing query can
also be captured using the query clipboard. To do this, open the query of interest
in a data view,
Page 342
right-click on the data view, and select Query | Copy from the popup menu. Paste
the query to the
Nemo Analyze database browser.
10.9.13
Unique features of Nemo Analyze SQL interface
Nemo Analyze database has some special behaviours and features that have been
discussed in detail
in the previous chapters. In many cases, the correct query creation procedure
depends entirely on
whether the query is to be used with Nemo Analyze or with a third-party ODBC data
retrieval tool. The
unique characteristics of the Nemo Analyze database are summarized below.
Timestamp. The binary timestamp time should be retrieved if the query is to be used
with Nemo
Analyze. Nemo Analyze converts it automatically to a readable timestamp. Nemo
Analyze can also
make use of the validity time interval embedded within the timestamp when drawing
line graphs and
map plots, and when calculating statistics. The standard time stamp sql_time should
be used with
ORDER BY, WHERE and SELECT clauses if the query is to be used with a third-party
tool.
Measurement file filter. If the query is to be used with Nemo Analyze, the limiting
of the query to
defined log files must not be done as part of the SQL query, as Nemo Analyze limits
the query
automatically at runtime using proprietary hint-based filtering. To achieve optimal
performance, it is
recommended that the hints be used also with queries intended for use with third-
party tools.
Converting numeric values to corresponding textual values does not have to be done
with the
scalar function VALUE_ENUM if the query is to be used with Nemo Analyze. When
necessary, Nemo
Analyze automatically converts the numeric values to the corresponding textual
values.
Results have to be in chronological order. If a query result set contains the time
column and the
results are to be displayed in map, line graph, bar graph or numerical data format,
the results must be
ordered by time. Nemo Analyze produces the results automatically in time order, log
file by log file.
However, with e.g. the aggregates GROUP BY and UNION, time order is lost and the
results must be
rearranged using the clause ORDER BY sql_time.
10.9.14
SQL vs. KPI workbench
For many purposes, SQL queries represent the optimal solution. However, the SQL
language and the
Nemo Analyze database schema set some limitations that can make for instance the
following tasks
easier to perform with the KPI Workbench.
Correlating more than two tables based on time. Sample-based correlation (described
above) enables
two tables without an established relation to be joined based on time. However,
with three or more
tables the task becomes impossible. For example, correlating BLER, Ec/N0 and TX
power based on
time is impossible with SQL because all of the parameters are located in separate
tables with no
established relations between them.
Creating queries that track certain event sequences, such as the change in a
particular parameter
value columns from row to row. SQL works well in scalar data processing where
mathematical or
logical operations are performed on a row-by-row basis, using different columns of
each row as input.
SQL sub queries can be utilized in creating an event to track situations where the
system changes
from GSM to UMTS (i.e. where a row contains the serving_system parameter value GSM
and the
subsequent row the value UMTS), but the method will cause the performance of the
query to collapse.
The state machine element of the KPI Workbench enables such queries to be created
with ease and
optimal query performance.
SQL queries are at their best in scalar data processing. If all the required input
data is located in the
same table (i.e. time-based correlation based on multiple tables is not necessary),
SQL is a good
Page 343
approach to complex scalar (row-by-row) data processing. Some examples of such

tasks can be found
below:
Data filtering. Complex filters can be created using SQL scalar functions and
logical operations.
Data reformatting. Query result set columns can be modified and combined using
various string and
math functions. Conditional outputs can be created using the SQL statement CASE.
As mentioned earlier, using SQL requires proficiency in SQL and knowledge of the
Nemo Analyze
database schema, and even then, the SQL language itself poses some limitations.
Therefore, for a
user without previous experience with SQL, KPI Workbench is recommended as the
primary data
customization tool. KPI Workbench avoids the limitations of SQL and offers full
functionality also for
data filtering and data reformatting purposes.
10.10
Query Manager
Queries are sets of rules based on which data is retrieved from the database, and
then displayed in
the various views in Nemo Analyze. There is a wide range of queries ready in Nemo
Analyze that will
assist you in your day-to-day data analysis but it is also possible to create new
queries.
You should not limit a query to certain measurement file(s), as Nemo Analyze limits
the query
automatically to the measurement files required. This way the query is not
statically limited to some
predefined measurement file or files, but instead, it can be run over any given
measurement file or
files in the database.
In the Ribbonbar select Tools | Query Manager.
In the Query Manager dialog, select the User item and click Add.
Page 344
There are different types of queries: you can select a measurement parameter from a
list (Pick
measurement parameter), select query data from tables (Generic query wizard), or
type the
query string manually (Manual query).
10.10.1
Pick Measurement Parameter
Pick Measurement Parameter is a quick and easy way to make new queries. The Analyze
Wizard
will guide you through the steps. Select Pick measurement parameter option from the
list and click
Next.
The Measurement Parameters page displays a list of available parameters. Select a

parameter from
the list and click Next. In the Filter field you can type the name or part of the
name of the parameter
you are looking for to locate it faster. This is especially useful when the
parameter list is long.
Page 345
In the Fill Parameters dialog you can further limit the query results by adding
different filters. All
parameters can be filtered, e.g. based on Area and Time. Filters can be applied to
parameters that are
part of the query. Right-click on top of the filter name or value to Add, Modify or
Delete filters.
With numeric parameters (e.g. Ec/N0, but not for instance L3 signaling), the
Analyze Wizard –
Statistics view opens. The view allows you to define statistics to be run over the
selected parameter.
Statistics type defines the statistics type.

Percentile value allows you to define the percentile value, e.g. 95th percentile.
Page 346
Group by allows you to define the basis for grouping the parameter aggregates, e.g.
Ec/N0 values
could be grouped according to scrambling code.
In Properties dialog you can define name, title and description for the query. It
is also possible to
edit SQL manually.
In the Column Aliases page you can define how the retrieved data is displayed in
the various data
views. This setting is optional. Click Finish.
Page 347
The query is added to the Query Manager and it can also be found in the Analyze
Wizard under the
User item, and in the Parameters view under the User item. In the Query Manager you
can manually
edit the query and the query filters, properties, statistics, and aliases by
selecting the query from the
list and clicking the Modify button. You are also able to modify correlation
queries, however, note that
filters cannot be modified for correlations queries. To make a copy from an
existing query by selecting
a query from the list and clicking the Copy button.
Page 348
10.10.2
Generic Query Wizard
Generic Query Wizard gives you more query options to choose from.
In the Select Tables page are displayed all the data tables available in the Nemo
Analyze schema.
Select the table(s) from which you want to retrieve the query data.
Page 349
Choose the parameters for the query, and press the simple arrow for single
parameters, and the
double arrow to transfer all the parameters in the table.
In the Select Columns page, select the information that you are interested in.
Click Next.
Page 350
In the Sort Columns page you can define in which order the data will be displayed.
It is
recommended that you sort columns based on time. If there is only one table
selected to the query,
the columns are by default ordered by time. This setting is optional.
In the Filters page, you can define filters for the query data. For example, you
can define that the
query is only applied to parameter values less than 0. You can also define a
textual filter, for example,
{?Threshold}. When the query is run, Nemo Analyze will open a dialog where you can
enter a
numerical value for the filter, for example, 10. This setting is optional.
Page 351
In the Properties page, define a name for the query. In the Description field you
can write a
description for the parameter. Click Next.
If you defined a textual filter in the Filters page, define a numerical value in
the Fill Parameters page
and click Finish. Right-click on top of the filter name or value to Add, Modify, or
Delete filters.
In the Column Aliases page you can define how the retrieved data is displayed in
the various data
views. This setting is optional. Click Finish.
Page 352
Wizard under the
can manually
edit the query by selecting it from the list and clicking the Modify button.
Page 353
10.10.3
Manual Query
Manual Queries require knowledge of SQL and the Nemo Analyze database schema. Nemo
Technical
Support will provide you with the database schema.
Type a name for the query and select the Edit SQL manually option. In the
Description field you
can write a description for the parameter. Click Next.
Page 354
Type in the query string and click Finish.
Wizard under the
can manually
edit the query by selecting it from the list and clicking the Modify button.
10.10.4
Correlate parameters
The Correlate Parameters query type is explained in more detail on page 111.
Page 355
10.11
Database Browser
You can enter the database browser via Tools | Database browser.
Database Browser can be used to display the table structure of the Nemo Analyze
Database. The
contents of each table or individual columns of a table can be viewed by double-
clicking it. The
corresponding query will be shown in the text window. Database Browser can also be
used to write
and test custom queries. The query can then be copied to the clipboard and saved to
the UI with
Query Manager.
10.12
Custom KPI Workbench

Custom KPI Workbench makes it possible to create custom KPIs by dragging and
dropping
parameters, correlations, various operations, filters and sort elements to the
Workbench, defining
their properties, and connecting them into a logical flow chart. The KPI Workbench
is part of the
Troubleshooting Toolkit option.
To open Custom KPI Workbench, select Tools | KPI Workbench in the Ribbonbar.
Page 356
An empty Custom KPI Workbench view opens.
To clear the Workbench view, right-click on the Workbench background and select New
Script from
the popup menu.
To run the KPI on a measurement file, right-click on the Workbench background and
select Run
Script from the popup menu. For further instructions, see p.403.
♦
Note that before running the scripts, a parameter must be connected to the
Output, so that Output turns green.
To save the KPI, right-click on the Workbench background and select Save from the
popup menu. For
further instructions, see p.405.
10.12.1
Designing custom KPIs and adding input data sets
The first step of creating custom KPIs should always be careful planning. First,
determine what the KPI
is supposed to do, i.e. what kind of data the output should consist of. Next,
determine what kind of
raw data parameters are needed to produce the right kind of output.
♦
Note: In some cases, it may be necessary to create a KPI that correlates two
separate files that do not have any parameters in common (e.g. mobile and
scanner files from the same measurement session). You may also wish to define
value constants, i.e. values that can be referred to in scripts with a generic
reference. If the use of either of these functionalities is necessary in terms of
the
KPI you intend to create, it is recommended to see the chapter Defining KPI
execution method and value constants before continuing.
Page 357
To add a raw parameter data set (containing all samples within the data set),
select a measurement
file in Workspace | Measurements, and drag and drop the appropriate parameter to
the Workbench
from the Parameters view (located on the bottom left of the screen).
To add a data set limited to pre-calculated statistics on a folder of measurement
files, select a folder
in Workspace | Folders, and drag and drop the appropriate parameter to the
Workbench from the
Parameters view.
You can also create a custom input parameter by dragging and dropping a Parameter
element to the
Workbench view from the menu structure on the right and defining the parameter
using the Query
Manager (see Parameter).
To leave out irrelevant columns from the input and output data sets, columns in the
parameter data
set can be disabled. To do this, double-click on the parameter element in the
Workbench view. Note
that the columns can only be modified before the parameter element is connected to
any
subsequent KPI elements.
Page 358
To disable column(s), click the Result Columns tab, clear the column(s) and click
OK.
10.12.2
Parameter
A parameter is a data set in tabular format that has a column containing parameter
values and
typically other columns such as time, coordinates, system, etc.
To create custom parameters to form the basis for the new custom KPI, drag and drop
the
Parameter element from the menu structure to the Workbench view.
This will open the Query Manager and enable you to customize and optimize
parameters by selecting
only the relevant columns to be included in the parameter output.
Page 359
Select user query allows you to select a custom query (e.g. one previously created
and saved using
KPI Workbench) as an input data set.
For Pick measurement parameter, Generic query wizard and Manual query, see Query
Manager
on page 344.
If there is no need to customize parameters, you can open default parameters on
either entire raw
parameter data sets or on data sets limited to pre-calculated statistics.
To add a raw parameter data set (containing all samples within the data set),
select a measurement
file in Workspace | Measurements, and drag and drop the appropriate parameter to
the Workbench
from the Parameters View (located on the bottom left of the screen).
To add a data set limited to pre-calculated statistics on a folder of measurement
files, select a folder
in Workspace | Folders, and drag and drop the appropriate parameter to the
Workbench from the
Parameters view.
10.12.3
Combining input data sets
Parameter elements consist of measurement data in tabular format. Thus, the raw
data parameter Rx
Level is a table with the columns rx level, time, latitude, longitude, etc. If you
need more than one
raw data parameter, it is usually necessary to combine these data sets or tables
into a single table
before you can perform any arithmetic operations on or between them. Determine
which method of
combination would be the most useful in terms of the operations you are going to
use.
Note: Because different operations often have different requirements on the method
of how the data
sets are combined, it is important that the phases Combining Input Data Sets and
Adding Operations
are planned together.
With operations that correlate parameters or search values from different
parameters from the time
range of a particular data set (namely the correlations Previous, Next and Current
Value and All
Values Within Time Range), it is important that the primary data set is placed on
the extreme left
compared to the other parameters or data sets connected to the same correlation,
operation, etc. For
instance, with the correlation Left Outer Join, all data entries from the data set
on the left are included
in the output, and from the secondary parameters or data sets, only the ones that
match those of the
Page 360
primary data set. Similarly, the correlation All Values Within Time Range produces
all values of the
secondary parameters from the time range of the primary (leftmost) parameter or
data set.
Secondary
parameter
Primary
parameter
Correlation
Connecting elements by
dragging connector lines
from output sockets to
input sockets
In the example above, the Previous Value element is used to examine values of a
secondary data set
in relation to the primary data set, the parameter Call Attempt Failure. Thus, the
values of the
secondary parameter Ec/N0 Active Set are examined from a time range determined by
both the
correlation Previous Value and the primary data set Call Attempt Failure. As the
primary data set Call
Attempt Failure consists solely of call attempt failure events and the correlation
Previous Value
produces only those values of the secondary parameter Ec/N0 Active Set that
immediately precede
events in the primary parameter, the output will consist of Ec/N0 Active Set values
preceding the start
time of each Call Attempt Failure event.
To connect the various KPI elements to each other, connect output sockets to input
sockets by
pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of one element and holding
it down while
dragging the connector line to the input socket of the other element.
To connect the same set of data to several different operations, simply draw as
many connector lines
as needed from the output socket of the data set (see picture below).
Page 361
Once connected, the elements will turn green to signify that they are operational.
If an element
remains red, it requires further configuration. Right-click the element and select
Properties from the
popup menu. For more information on configuring individual elements, see the
related topic below.
10.12.4
Correlation: Previous/Current/Next Value
The Previous Value, Current Value and Next Value elements are used in examining
values of
secondary data sets from points in time determined by a primary data set. This
makes it possible to
examine what occurred in the network before, during, or after parameter events in
the primary data
set based on one to many secondary parameters. Previous Value produces only the
previous value
immediately before the start time of the parameter events in the primary data set,
Current Value only
the current value during the parameter events, and Next Value only the next value
immediately after
the events.
To add a Previous/Current/Next Value element to the KPI, first make sure that the
primary parameter
or data set is situated the leftmost compared to the secondary parameters whose
values are to be
examined.
Drag and drop the Previous/Current/Next Value element to the Workbench. Connect the
primary
data set to the leftmost input socket of the Previous/Current/Next Value element.
Page 362
Connect the secondary parameters (i.e. the parameters whose previous/current/next

values are to be
examined from points in time determined by the primary parameter) to the other
input sockets of the
Previous/Current/Next value element.
The Previous/Current/Next Value element changes color from red to green, signifying
that the element
is operational. Even if you are still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is
recommended to test
the operation of the KPI at this point by connecting it to the Output element.
Then, select a
measurement or several measurements from the Measurements section on the
Measurements
page of the Workspace. Right-click on the Workbench background, and select Run
Script from the
popup menu.
For more information, see Running and testing KPIs on p. 403.
Page 363
10.12.5
Correlation: Previous Or Current Value/Next Or Current

Value
The Previous or Current Value and Next or Current Value elements are used in
examining the
parameter values in secondary data sets from points in time determined by a primary
data set. These
functions enable you to examine the parameter values in any number of secondary
data sets before
and during, or during and after, an event (such as a dropped call) has been logged
in the primary data
set. Previous or Current Value produces the previous value (immediately before the
start time of the
parameter event(s) in the primary data set), or the current value (during the
parameter event(s) in
the primary data set) if a current value is available. Next or Current Value
produces the next value
(immediately after the parameter event(s) in the primary data set), or the current
value (during the
parameter event(s) in the primary data set) if a current value is available.
To add a Previous or Current Value/Next or Current Value element to the KPI, first
make sure
that the primary parameter or data set is situated the leftmost compared to the
secondary parameters
whose values are to be examined.
Drag and drop the Previous or Current Value/Next or Current Value element to the
Workbench.
Connect the primary data set to the leftmost input socket of the Previous or
Current Value/Next or
Current Value element.
Page 364
Connect the secondary parameters (i.e. the parameters whose previous/current/next

values are to be
examined from points in time determined by the primary parameter) to the other
input sockets of the
Previous or Current Value/Next or Current Value element.
The Previous or Current Value/Next or Current Value element changes color from red
to green,
signifying that the element is operational. Even if you are still going to add more
elements to the KPI,
it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at this point. Connect the KPI
to the Output
element. Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the Measurements
section on
the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench background,
and select Run
Script from the popup menu.
For more information, see Running and testing KPIs.
Page 365
10.12.6
Correlation: All Values Within Time Range
All Values Within Time Range, as compared to Previous, Current, and Next Value
elements that
produce only one value, produces all values from the secondary parameters from the
time range of
the primary (leftmost) parameter or data set.
Generally all parameters of the Nemo file format have a time range. This is because
the Nemo
measurement file format is time-based as opposed to sample-based. In other words, a
new “sample”
is created on a timeline only when changes occur in the monitored parameter and the
temporal length
of the samples depends entirely on how often changes occur in the parameter value.
Event
parameters (such as dropped call, call attempt failure, and cell reselection) do
not have a time range
as they represent events that occur at a point in time.
A major difference between All Values Within Time Range and the other join elements
(namely Inner
Join, Left Outer Join, and Union) is that All Values Within Time Range combines the
data based on
time, whereas these other join elements do this based on matching values in the
data sets.
To add an All Values Within Time Range element to the KPI, first make sure that the
primary
parameter or data set is situated the leftmost compared to the secondary parameters
whose values
are to be examined from the time range determined by the primary element.
♦
Note: When deciding which input data set to use as the primary dataset, one
should consider the fact that the output will be written only when there are valid
values in the primary dataset. Therefore, if filtering out data from the secondary
data set is not desirable, the parameter that contains valid samples for the most
of
the duration of the log file should be selected as the primary dataset. For
example,
selecting RX qual as the primary data set when correlating the parameters RX lev
and RX qual, will produce results only from instances when a call was active. On
the other hand, if RX level is selected as the primary data set, the results will
include both idle periods and periods when a call was active.
If Rx level is selected as primary dataset, results are given both from idle, and
call connected periods.
Drag and drop the All Values Within Time Range element to the Workbench.
Connect the primary parameter or data set to the leftmost input socket of the All
Values Within Time
Range element.
Connect the secondary parameters or data sets (i.e. the parameters whose values are
to be examined
from a time range determined by the primary parameter) to the other input sockets
of the element.
Page 366
The All Values Within Time Range element changes color from red to green,
signifying that the
element is operational.
Even if you are still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to
test the operation of
the KPI at this point. Connect the KPI to the Output element. Then, select a
measurement or several
measurements from the Measurements section on the Measurements page of the
Workspace,
right-click on the Workbench background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.
10.12.7
Join: Inner Join
Inner Join can combine two sets of data that share a join value (such as
identification code, channel
number or scrambling code) defined by the user. Only the rows containing a matching
join value will
be included in the output. For instance, if two parameters both contain scrambling
code information,
the parameters can be joined using Inner Join by defining scrambling code as the
join value. All rows
with a scrambling code value that does not match with any of the scrambling code
values in the other
data set, and those containing a null value in the scrambling code column, will not
be included in the
output.
To add an Inner Join element to the KPI, first open both of the data sets that are
to be combined on a
grid (for opening measurements on a grid, see Viewing Measurement Data on p.61) and
consider
which join values (such as identification code, channel number, scrambling code,
etc.) you can use as
a basis for the join, i.e. what values do the data sets have in common, what values
would form a
logical basis for the join in terms of the KPI’s purpose, etc.
In the example screenshots below, the two tables can be joined based on the
scrambling code values
they share.
Page 367
Drag and drop the Inner Join element to the Workbench.

Connect the data sets that are to be combined to the upper (i.e. input) sockets of
the Inner Join
element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of each data
set and holding
down the mouse button while dragging a connector line from the data set output
socket to the input
socket of the Inner Join element. Right-click the Inner Join element and select
Properties from the
popup menu.
Page 368
From the Join tab of the Properties dialog, select the join values (i.e. the values
that form the basis
for the join) using the Left column and Right column drop-down menus.
After you have defined the properties of the Inner Join element, click OK, and the
element changes
color from red to green, signifying that the element is operational. Even if you
are still going to add
more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at
this point. Connect
the KPI to the Output element, right-click on the Workbench background, and select
Run Script from
the popup menu.
10.12.8
Join: Left Outer Join
Left Outer Join can combine two sets of data that share a join value (such as
identification code,
channel number or scrambling code) defined by the user. From the leftmost set of
data, all rows are
always included. From the secondary data set, only the rows containing join values
that match rows in
the leftmost set of data will be included in the output.
For instance, if two parameters both contain scrambling code information, the
parameters can be
joined with Left Outer Join by defining scrambling code as the join value. All rows
from the leftmost
parameter are included in the output. From the secondary parameter, only the rows
with scrambling
codes that match with those of the left parameter are included.
To add a Left Outer Join element to the KPI, first open both of the data sets that
are to be combined
on a grid and consider which join values (such as identification code, channel
number or scrambling
code) you can use as a basis for the join, i.e. what values do the data sets have
in common, what
values would form a logical basis for the join in terms of the KPI’s purpose, etc.
Page 369
Drag and drop the Left Outer Join element to the Workbench.
the Left Outer Join
element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of each data
set and holding
down the mouse button while dragging a connector line from the data set output
socket to the input
socket of the Left Outer Join element.
Right-click the Left Outer Join element and select Properties from the popup menu.
Note: Depending on the input data sets, it may sometimes be necessary to group the
input
data sets based on the join value before using Left Outer Join to combine them. In
the
screenshot below, both input data sets have been grouped by scrambling code because
scrambling code is going to be used as the Left Outer Join join value.
From the Join tab of the Properties dialog, select the join values (i.e. the values
that form the basis
for the join) using the Left column and Right column drop-down menus.
Page 370
For more information, see the topic Running and Testing KPIs.
After you have defined the properties of the Left Outer Join element, click OK, and
the element
changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is operational. Even
if you are still going
to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI
at this point.
Connect the KPI to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several
measurements from
the Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace right-click on
the
Workbench background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.
Page 371
10.12.9
Join: Union
Union joins two or several sets of data, with or without matching rows, into a
single data set without
removing any duplicate rows. Same-named columns containing data of the same type
(e.g. both
contain a string) are combined into a single column. Otherwise, each data set forms
a new column
into the resulting data set. Because the rows and columns in the resulting data set
are in no particular
order, it is often necessary to sort the resulting table based on, for instance,
time in order to produce
meaningful results.
To add a Union element, drag and drop the Union element to the Workbench.
the Union element
by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and
holding down the
mouse button while dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the
input socket of
the Union element.
The Union element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is
operational.
Because the rows and columns in the unified data set are in no particular order, it
is often necessary
to sort the resulting table based on, for instance, time in order to produce
meaningful results.
To add a sort element, drag and drop either Ascending or Descending sort element to
the
Workbench. Connect the Union element to the sort element. Define the sort element’s
properties by
right-clicking the element and selecting Properties. For more information on
defining the sort
element’s properties, see p.390.
Page 372
Workspace,
Page 373
10.12.10 Join: Cartesian Product

Cartesian Product (or Cross Join) combines all rows from two or more data sets,
producing a row for
each possible combination. For the purposes of the KPI Workbench, Cartesian Product
is most
commonly used in combining two or more sets of data that are both known to contain
only a single
row of data (such as the results of Aggregate functions) into separate columns on a
single row.
To add a Cartesian Product element, drag and drop the Cartesian Product element to
the
Workbench.
the Cartesian
Product element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of each
data set and
holding down the mouse button while dragging a connector line from the data set
output socket to the
input socket of the Cartesian Product element.
The element changes color from red to green, signifying that the element is
operational. Even if you
are still going to add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the
operation of the KPI at
this point. Connect the KPI to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or
several
Workspace,
Page 374
The Select Measurement dialog opens. Select a measurement from the list and click
OK. For more
information on the Select Measurement dialog, see Running and testing KPIs.
10.12.11 Adding operations

Once you have combined all the necessary raw data sets into a single table, use the
state machine,
arithmetic operations, filters, time functions, etc. to define how the raw data is
to be processed by the
KPI.
As the various KPI elements can be used together in countless different and complex
combinations
(with complex state machines, aggregate functions, Cartesian products, sort
elements, etc.), you need
to determine what correlations and operations are required and how they should
interact in order to
isolate only the relevant parts of the measurement data. For instance, whether a
state machine
needed, and if it is, what states would be relevant in terms of the data you are
looking for, how should
the transitions from state to state be triggered, what entries in the data would be
the most logical or
useful triggers for these transitions, etc. With the State Machine and other more
complicated
operations it is often necessary to first open a sample of the kind of measurement
data the KPI is
intended for with suitable parameters on a grid to determine how the data
progresses and for instance
what data entries should be used as triggers to obtain the most accurate results.
For opening
measurements on a grid, see Viewing Measurement Data on p.61.
It is also worth noting that some operations may require a value (e.g. a transition
trigger in state
machine) to be defined when defining the operation’s properties. Entering a value
to a field of this
type can prove restricting in terms of the various different purposes the KPI could
otherwise be used
for. To avoid this problem and effectively create a more versatile KPI with values
that can be entered
later on based on the requirements of the KPI’s each individual application, define
each value as a
variable by entering the string {?<variable name>} to the value field. This way,
the program will
prompt the user to define a value for each value defined as a variable every time
the KPI is run.
This makes it possible, for instance, to create a generic state machine to
calculate the delay from any
one L3 signaling message to any another. The state machine will prompt the user to
define the two
signaling messages each time the KPI is run, enabling the same KPI to be used for
calculating delays
between any number of different signaling message pairs.
It should also be kept in mind that the Nemo file format is time-based as opposed
to sample-based
(see Correlation: All Values Within Time Range). Because of this, operations should
always be
Page 375
weighted by time when applicable. If the results are not weighted by time, it will
not be possible to
know how long a particular parameter value has been valid and the results of
operations such as
Average and Count will not be accurate.
10.12.12 Operation: Case

With Case, the user can create rules that filter and divert different values from
the data set to
different output sockets, making it possible to direct these values to different
operations or to examine
them separately in the final output. Each of the output sockets filters out all the
values that are not in
accordance with the rule defining the socket.
To add a Case element to the KPI, drag and drop the Case element to the Workbench.
Connect the data set to the upper (i.e. input) sockets of the Case element by
pressing the left mouse
button down on the output socket of each data set and holding down the mouse button
while dragging
a connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of the Case
element.
Right-click the Case element and select Properties from the popup menu. From the
Flow Control
tab in the Properties dialog, click the Add button to add a rule.
The Rule Properties dialog opens.
Name defines a name for the rule.

Column defines the grid column (in the input data set) that contains the values
that are compared to
Value based on the rule defined in Operator.
Operator defines the rule that determines which values are filtered out. For
instance, with Scrambling
Code (Column) <= 2 (Value), all the values that do not fulfill the condition of
being smaller than or
equal to 2 are filtered out.
Page 376
Value defines the limit value that the Operator compares to the Column value. To
define the value
as a variable (i.e. the value is to be defined by the user each time the KPI is
run), enter the string
{?<variable name>} to the value field.
Define Case properties and select OK. The Rule Properties dialog closes.
To create another rule, click the Add button again in the Properties dialog and
define properties for
the rule. In the example screenshot below, two rules have been defined, each
represented by an
output socket of the Case element.
several
Workspace, rightclick on the Workbench background, and select Run Script from the
popup menu. For more
information, see Running and testing KPIs.
10.12.13 Operation: Moving Average

Moving Average calculates value averages based on a user-defined number of samples
preceding
each value. In practice, this removes anomalies from, for instance, a graph, making
it more stable and
explicit.
To add a Moving Average element to the KPI, drag and drop the Moving Average
element to the
Workbench.
Connect the data set to the upper (i.e. input) sockets of the Moving Average
element by pressing the
left mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and holding down the
mouse button
while dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket
of the Moving
Average element.
To define Moving Average properties, right-click the Moving Average element and
select Properties
Page 377
The Running Function tab of the Properties dialog opens.
Column defines the grid column (in the input data set) from which the moving
average is to be
calculated.
Samples defines how many surrounding values will be sampled when calculating the
average for each
point in time.
Define Moving Average properties and select OK.
several
Workspace,
10.12.14 Operation: Conversion

Conversion enables the user to convert value formats between integer, real (i.e.
decimal) and string
(i.e. text). If, for instance, a division is to be performed for data entries
defined as integer values, it
may be useful to convert these values to real format before the division to avoid
rounded and thus
inaccurate results. Also, if it is known that data entries have been falsely
defined as being of string
(i.e. text) data type but in reality consist of numbers, conversion can be used to
convert the data type
to numbers (i.e. either integer or real, depending on whether the entries contain
integer or decimal
values.)
To add a Conversion element to the KPI, drag and drop the Conversion element to the
Workbench.
Connect the data set to the upper (i.e. input) sockets of the Conversion element by
pressing the left
mouse button down on the output socket of each data set and holding down the mouse
button while
dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of
the Conversion
element.
Page 378
To define Conversion properties, right-click the Conversion element and select

Properties from the
popup menu.
The Conversion tab of the Properties dialog opens.
Column defines the grid column (in the input data set) that contains the values
that are to be
converted.
Target type defines the target data type to which the data within the column
(defined in Column)
will be converted. Possible target types include integer, real (i.e. decimal), and
string (i.e. text).
After you have defined the properties of the Conversion element, click OK, and the
element changes
color from red to green, signifying that the element is now operational. Even if
you are still going to
add more elements to the KPI, it is recommended to test the operation of the KPI at
this point.
Connect the KPI to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or several
measurements from
the Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on
the
Workbench background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.
10.12.15 Operation: State Machine

State Machine makes it possible to define and isolate specific states and
transitions between them
from a single data set. It can be used, for instance, for examining the start and
the end of particular
events, the duration of such events, values of other parameters before, during and
after these events,
etc.
For the state machine to work properly, it is recommended that the states and
transitions are
conceptually mapped (e.g. in the form of a flow chart, with references to events
that trigger the
transitions and define the boundaries of the states) beforehand based on grid data.
Open the data set
you are interested in on a grid (for opening measurements on a grid, see Viewing
Measurement Data)
and decide which value, signaling message name, event_ID, etc. is going to trigger
which transition
between which states. For instance, a transition could be triggered by an Ec/N0
value or an L3
signaling Message Name.
It is also very important that there is always a returning transition from each
state in case the
conditions of the transitions to the state are not fulfilled anymore. This ensures
accurate results and
the correct operation of the state machine.
Page 379
Ec/N0 difference
<0
BLER >= 20
OK
Bad BLER
BLER < 20
Missing
handover
Ec/N0 difference > 0
BLER < 20
After the operation of the State Machine has been conceptually mapped (see flow
chart above), drag
and drop State Machine to the Workbench.
With State Machine it is important that the input data set is sorted based on time.
Open the data set
you are interested in on a grid and check whether it is sorted by time. If not,
sort the input data set
based on time by adding a sort element (i.e. Ascending or Descending, see p. 390)
between the
input data set and the State Machine.
Connect the data set to the upper (i.e. input) sockets of the State Machine element
by pressing the
button while
the State Machine
element.
Right-click the State Machine element and select Properties from the popup menu.
The State Machine tab of the Properties dialog opens.
First, create all the required states. To create a new state, click the Add button.
Page 380
The State dialog opens.
Enter a name for the state in the Name field and click OK. The State dialog closes.
To create another
state, click the Add button again in the Properties dialog.
♦
Note: Repeat these steps until you have created all the states you are going to
need. You should have at least an idle state (i.e. a state that is not of interest
to
you) and an active state (i.e. a state that is in the focus of your analysis).
Next, select the idle state as the Initial State from the drop-down menu. To start
defining transitions
between states, select one of the states and click the Modify button.
Page 381
Click the Add button.

The Transition dialog opens.
Conditions displays the defined transition conditions.

Time trigger defines a transition that is triggered if the condition is not
fulfilled within the defined
time period (in milliseconds).
Target defines the state to which the transition occurs.
Output defines a title for the state that will be displayed in the final output
data set. If the field is left
blank, no output will be generated from this transition. For instance, with the
idle state, leave this field
blank. With the state(s) that interest you, be sure to define a title for the
state. The output data set
generated based on a state is defined as follows. When a transition occurs from the
state x to state y,
the point in time when the transition occurred from state x to state y
(start_time), the point in time
when the transition occurred from the state y to the next state, and the time in
milliseconds that
passed while in the state y (time_interval) are recorded in the output data set.
Depending on the
application of the state machine, different columns may be useful. When using state
machine to create
a custom event, the start_time is usually needed in the results to indicate the
timestamp when the
event occurred. State machine can be also used to calculate delay of certain
procedure, for example
radio bearer establishment in UMTS. In such case, state machine must be defined so
that there is a
state that is entered when radio bearer establishment begins, and the state is left
when radio bearer
Page 382
is established. In this example, time_interval output column directly indicates the

delay of radio
bearer establishment in milliseconds.
To define a condition, click Add.
The Condition dialog opens.
Left Column defines the grid column (in the input data set) that contains the
values that are
compared to a value defined in Value, or another column defined in Right column,
based on the rule
defined in Operator.
Operator defines the rule that determines what kind of relationship there has to
exist between the
values in Left Column and Right column/Value for the transition to be triggered
(and for the
present state to end). For instance, with the L3 Signaling message (Left Column) =
CALL ATTEMPT
(Value), the transition to the next state occurs when the value CALL ATTEMPT is
found in the column
L3 Signaling.
Right column allows you to define a column to which the values in the Left Column
are compared.
If <Value> is selected, the Left Column value is compared to the value entered in
the Value field. If
<Previous value> is selected, and used with the Operator != (i.e. not equal to),
the condition is
fulfilled when the value in the Left Column changes.
Value defines the value that triggers the transition, i.e. the end of one state and
the beginning of a
new one. To define the value as a variable (i.e. the value is to be defined by the
user each time the
KPI is run), enter the string {?<variable name>} to the value field. Note that each
transition should
have a unique variable name.
After the condition has been defined, click OK.
The condition is displayed in the Transition dialog.
Page 383
To define another condition for the same transition, click the Add button again,
and a new Condition
dialog opens. Define condition properties in the Condition dialog and click OK.
Both conditions are now displayed in the Transition dialog.
To define the AND/OR relationship between the conditions, right-click on the AND
element.
Select AND or OR from the popup menu.

When you have defined all the conditions for the transition, click OK to return to
the State dialog.
Repeat the steps to define transitions and conditions from each state you have
created.
Finally, when all the transitions and transition conditions have been defined,
click OK in the
Properties dialog. The State Machine element changes color from red to green,
signifying that the
element is operational.
Workspace,
right-click on the Workbench background, and select Run Script from the popup menu
The Select Measurement dialog opens. Select a measurement from the list and click
OK. For more
For a practical example, see Use Case 22: Creating a KPI for dropped calls
resulting from a missing
handover.
Page 384
10.12.16 Operation: Group By/Binning

The Group By element enables you to select multiple parameters from an input data
set and group or
bin the rest of the data set based on these parameters. The Group By element also
enables you to
simultaneously run multiple different aggregates based on any number of parameters
contained within
the input data set. Thus, the Group By element can be used for both grouping input
data and
producing parameter aggregates based on the input data. The available aggregate
functions include
Minimum, Maximum, Average, Standard Deviation, Variance, Sum, Count, Mode, Median,
Percentile, First, and Last. For more information on aggregates, see Aggregate
Functions.
First, combine the parameter data sets into a single data set by dragging and
dropping a relevant
correlation element (e.g. All Values Within Time Range) to the Workbench. For more
information on
correlation elements, see Combining input data sets.
With All Values Within Time Range, connect the primary parameter or data set to the
leftmost input
socket of the All Values Within Time Range element. Connect the secondary
parameters or data sets
(i.e. the parameters whose values are to be examined from a time range determined
by the primary
parameter) to the other input sockets of the element.
Next, add a Group By element to the KPI by dragging and dropping the element to the
Workbench.
Connect the correlation element (i.e. the data set that combines all the individual
parameter data
sets) to the Group By element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output
socket of the
correlation element and holding down the mouse button while dragging a connector
line from the
correlation element output socket to the input socket of the Group By element.
Right-click the Group By element and select Properties from the popup menu.
Page 385
The Group By tab of the Properties dialog opens.
Input displays all parameters within the input data set. From these parameters, you
can select
parameters to the Group By and Aggregates categories.
Group by defines how the parameter aggregates defined in Aggregates are to be
grouped. For
instance, when calculating an Ec/N0 average per scrambling code, the aggregate
function Average
would have the following settings: Group by: scrambling_code and Aggregates: ec/no
(with the
aggregate function Average selected from the Function drop-down menu). To define a
parameter as a
basis for grouping, select a parameter in the Input field and press the
button. To remove a
grouping parameter, select the parameter in the Group by field and press the
button. There can
be multiple grouping parameters. The order in which the grouping parameters are
entered is also
important, as every grouping parameter hierarchically determines also the grouping
of the subsequent
grouping parameters.
Aggregates defines the aggregate parameters. To add a parameter to Aggregates,
select a
parameter in the Input field and press the
button. To define parameter aggregate properties,
select the parameter in the Aggregates field and define aggregate properties using
Function,
Weight by, and Result title. Once the properties of a single parameter aggregate
have been
defined, start defining the next one by simply selecting another parameter from the
Input field and
clicking the
button. To remove a parameter aggregate, select the parameter in the Aggregates
field and press the

button. For more information on defining the properties of aggregate
elements, see Aggregate Functions.
Function defines the aggregate function applied to the selected parameter in the
Aggregates field.
Function properties are defined using Weight by and Result title.
Weight by defines the how the calculation is to be weighted, i.e. by time, distance
(based on GPS
coordinates), etc. Weight by is usually used only with the aggregate functions
Average and Count.
Page 386
Note: Because the Nemo measurement file format is time-based as opposed to sample-
based (i.e. a
“sample” is created on a timeline only when changes occur in the monitored
parameters), the
aggregate functions Average and Count should be weighted by time in order to obtain
accurate
results.
Result title defines a title for the result. Without a title, the parameter
aggregate will not be
operational.
In the example below, three ec/n0-based aggregates (ec/no minimum, maximum, and
average) and
three tx_power -based aggregates (tx power minimum, maximum, and average) have been
defined.
These have been grouped based on two parameters: bts_site_name and bts_cell_name.
As the
parameter bts_site_name is the uppermost, all other parameters, i.e. the grouping
parameter
bts_cell_name and the six parameter aggregates, will be grouped based on
bts_site_name in the
resulting data set. In addition to this, the parameter aggregates will also be
grouped based on the
parameter bts_cell_name, as bts_cell_name is a grouping parameter.
With the settings above, the resulting data set will look like this.
Once the properties of the Group By element have been defined, select OK.
Page 387
The Group By element changes color from red to green, which means that it is
operational. Test the
operation of the KPI this far by connecting it to the Output element (even if you
are still going to add
more elements). Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the
Measurements
section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the Workbench
background, and
select Run Script from the popup menu.
10.12.17 Aggregate Functions

Aggregate functions include Minimum, Maximum, Average, Standard Deviation,
Variance, Sum,
Count, Mode and Median. Aggregates are simple functions used for producing minimum
and
maximum values, averages, sums, and counts (number of samples, values, etc.) from
data sets. The
same steps are taken in defining all of them. To simultaneously produce multiple
different aggregates
based on multiple parameter data sets, use the Group By element (for more
information on
Operation: Group By).
To add an aggregate element to the KPI, drag and drop the element to the Workbench.
Connect the data set(s) on which the calculation is to be performed to the upper
(i.e. input) sockets of
the aggregate element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket
of each data set
and holding down the mouse button while dragging a connector line from the data set
output socket
to the input socket of the aggregate element.
Page 388
Right-click the aggregate element and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Aggregate tab of the Properties dialog opens.
Column defines the column on which the calculation is going to be performed. In

most cases, the
parameter present in the list (such as bler, ec/no, etc.) is selected. The symbol *
is selected only with
the aggregate function Count when null values are to be included in the count. If
null values are to be
left out of the count, select the parameter.
Group by defines how the value type defined in Column is to be grouped. For
instance, when
calculating an Ec/N0 average per scrambling code, the aggregate function Average
would have the
following settings: Column: ec/no, Group by: scrambling_code, and Weight by: time.
Weight by defines the how the calculation is to be weighted, i.e. by time, distance
(based on GPS
coordinates), etc. Weight by is usually used only with the aggregate functions
Average and Count.
♦
Note: Because the Nemo measurement file format is time-based as opposed to

sample-based (i.e. a “sample” is created on a timeline only when changes occur in
the monitored parameters), the aggregate functions Average and Count should be
weighted by time in order to obtain accurate results.
Page 389
Result title defines a title for the result. Without a title, the aggregate element
will not be
operational.
Define the properties of the aggregate function and click OK.
several
Workspace,
10.12.18 Sort elements

The sort elements Ascending and Descending respectively change the order of values
in a data set
to ascending and descending based on a user-defined value (e.g. time).
To add a sort element to the KPI, drag and drop the sort element (either Ascending
or Descending)
to the Workbench.
Connect the data set to the upper (i.e. input) sockets of the Ascending element by
pressing the left
button while
the Ascending
element.
To define a sorting value, right-click the Ascending sort element and select
Properties from the
popup menu.
Page 390
The Sort tab of the Properties dialog opens.
Select the sorting value from the drop-down menu and click OK.
several
Workspace,
10.12.19 Filters
Filter makes it possible to filter out all the values from a data set that do not
fulfill the defined
condition(s). For instance, a filter for Scrambling Code <= 2 would AND Scrambling
Code > 0 would
filter out all other scrambling codes than 1 and 2.
To add a Filter element to the KPI, drag and drop the Filter element to the
Workbench.
Connect the data set to the upper (i.e. input) sockets of the Filter element by
while dragging
a connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of the Filter
element.
Page 391
Right-click the Filter element and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Filter tab of the Properties dialog opens.
Click the Add button to add a filter.

Left column defines the grid column (in the input data set) that contains the
values that are
compared to Value (or to another column if a column name is selected in the Right
column dropdown menu instead <Value>) based on the rule defined in Operator.
Page 392
Operator defines the condition that determines which values are filtered out. For
instance, with
Scrambling Code (Column) <= 21 (Value), all the values that do not fulfill the
condition of being
smaller than or equal to 21 are filtered out.
Right column defines the data to which the data defined in the Left column is
compared.
<Previous value> defines the filter condition based on a comparison between the
value in the Left
column and the value preceding it (also in the Left column). <Value> enables you to
enter a
numerical limit value in the Value field (see below). The drop-down menu displays
also parameter
names based on the parameter data available in the input data set. Selecting one of
the parameter
names defines the comparison to be performed between the data selected in the Left
column and the
data selected in the Right column.
Value defines the limit value that the Operator compares to the Left Column value.
To define the
value as a variable (i.e. the value is to be defined by the user each time the KPI
is run), enter the
string {?<variable name>} to the Value field.
Define conditions and select OK.
The Properties dialog now displays the defined condition.
To add another condition, click Add.

Alternatively, if no more conditions are required, click OK to return to the
Workbench view.
Page 393
The logic of the filter element follows that of a binary tree. Thus, one node can
always have only two
child nodes.
If a third child node, i.e. condition, is added, another level is automatically

added to the tree.
Individual nodes can be dragged and dropped from one level or node to another.
Page 394
To define AND/OR relationships between the nodes, right-click on a logical

operator, i.e. AND/OR,
and select AND or OR from the popup menu.
You are also able to select several filters and then group them by right-clicking
the Group option from
the context menu. A line will appear in the left-hand corner to signify grouping.
You can also ungroup
filters by right-clicking Ungroup from the context menu.
Once all the required conditions have been defined, click OK to return to the
Workbench view.
The Filter element changes color from red to green, which means that it is
operational.
Page 395
Test the operation of the KPI this far by connecting it to the Output element (even
if you are still
going to add more elements). Then, select a measurement or several measurements
from the
Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace, right-click on the
Workbench
background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.
For more information on the Select Measurement dialog, see Running and testing
KPIs.
For a practical example, see Use Case 21: Creating complex filters using multiple
conditions.
10.12.20 Filters: Top-N, Bottom-N, Nth Best, and Nth Worst
Top-N and Bottom-N list a defined number of best/worst entries in a predefined

column of a data
set, filtering out all other data entries.
Nth Best and Nth Worst produce only the Nth best/Nth worst value entry from a
defined column in a
data set.
To add a filter element to the KPI, drag and drop the element to the Workbench.
Connect the data set(s) on which the calculation is to be performed to the upper
the filter element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of
each data set and
input socket of the filter element.
Page 396
Right-click the filter element and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Nth tab of the Properties dialog opens.
N enables you, depending on the filter, either to define the number of best/worst
data entries to be
listed from a column in a data set, or to specify the position on such list that is
of interest to you (i.e.
the Nth best/worst value of a column in a data set).
Column defines the column from which the filter will, depending on the filter,
produce either an N
number of best or worst value entries (i.e. Top-N, Bottom-N) or the Nth best/worst
value (i.e. Nth
Best, Nth Worst). In most cases, the parameter present in the list (such as bler,
ec/no, etc.) is
selected.
Group by defines how the value type defined in Column is to be grouped. For
instance, to produce
the best two Ec/N0 values per each scrambling code, the Top-N filter would have the
following
settings: N: 2, Column: ec/no, Group by: scrambling_code.
Define the properties of the filter and click OK.
Page 397
this point by connecting it to the Output element. Then, select a measurement or
several
Workspace,
10.12.21 Mathematical functions

Mathematical functions enable the performing of various arithmetic operations.
To add a mathematical function to the KPI, drag and drop a math element to the
Workbench.
Connect the data set on which the calculation is to be performed to the upper (i.e.
input) sockets of
the math element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of
each data set and
input socket of the math element.
Right-click the math element and select Properties from the popup menu. The
Operator tab of the
Properties dialog opens.
Page 398
Left column defines the parameter or data set on which the calculation will be
performed.
Right column defines the value by which the Left column value is multiplied,
divided, etc. Select
<Value> to manually define the value in the Right value field. Otherwise, select a
value from the
drop-down menu.
Right value defines the value by which the Left column value is multiplied,
divided, etc. when
<Value> is selected in Right column. To define the value as a variable (i.e. the
value is defined by
the user each time the KPI is run), enter the string {?<variable name>} to the
value field.
Result title defines a title for the column displaying the results in the output
data set.
The method of defining each of the mathematical operations is discussed below.
Addition (+),subtraction (-),multiplication (*),division (/), and modulation (%)
(i.e.
calculating the remainder of a division of one number by another) performs the
selected operation on
the data set defined as the Left column in the element properties. Right column
should be set to
<value>. The value entered into the Right value field defines the value which is
added or subtracted
from the Left column values, or by which the Left column values are multiplied,
divided, etc. For
example, the Right value defined as 3 in a division (/) element would divide each
of the values in
the column (defined as the Left column) by 3.
Left (<<) and right (>>) bit shifting performs bit shift on the data set defined as
the Left column
in the element properties. Right column should be set to <value>. The value entered
into the Right
value field defines the number of digits shifted. For example, the Right value
defined as 3 in a right
(>>) bit shift element would perform in the input data set a three-digit shift to
the right.
The Ceiling function rounds a real number to the next larger integer based on each
of the values in
the column defined as the Left column in the element properties. Right column
should be set to
<value>. The value entered into the Right value field defines the rounding method,
i.e. 1 defines
rounding to the next integer, 10 defines rounding based on ten, etc.
The Floor rounds a real number to the next smaller integer based on each of the
values in the column
defined as the Left column in the element properties. Right column should be set to
<value>. The
value entered into the Right value field defines the rounding method, i.e. 1
defines rounding to the
next integer, 10 defines rounding based on ten, etc.
The Log (logarithm) function calculates the logarithm of each of the values in the
column defined as
the Left column in the element properties. Right column should be set to <value>.
The value
entered into the Right value field defines the base for the logarithm.
Exponentiation performs exponentiation on each of the values in the column defined
as the Left
column in the element properties. Right column should be set to <value>. The value
entered into
the Right value field defines the exponent.
Root performs an Nth root (square root, cube root, etc.) operation on each of the
values in the
column defined as the Left column in the element properties. Right column should be
set to
<value>. The value entered into the Right value field defines the root, e.g. 2
defines the operation
as square root.
The Round function performs rounding of a real number to the nearest integer based
on each of the
values in the column defined as the Left column in the element properties. If the
fraction part of the
number is <0.5, the number is rounded to the next smaller integer. If the fraction
part is >=0.5, the
number is rounded to the next larger integer. Right column should be set to
<value>. The value
entered into the Right value field defines the rounding method, i.e. 1 defines
rounding to the next
integer, 10 defines rounding based on ten, etc.
Page 399
Define the operation properties and click OK.

several
Workspace,
For more
10.12.22 Time functions: Resample

As Nemo file format is event-based, samples with varying time ranges are logged
only when the
parameter value changes. This means the sample interval is not constant. Resample
allows the data
to be resampled at a periodic, user-definable time interval. Thus for instance 0.5-
second and 1.3second RSCP samples with values -86 and -87 respectively, would
constitute five samples of value -86
and 13 samples with value -87 when resampled at a 100-millisecond interval.
Note: Resampling data using a sample period that is longer than the original sample
period can reduce
the accuracy of the data and may cause some data to be lost.
To add a Resample element to the KPI, drag and drop the element to the Workbench.
Connect the data set to be resampled to the upper (i.e. input) sockets of the
Resample element by
pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket of the data set and
holding down the mouse
button while dragging a connector line from the data set output socket to the input
socket of the
Resample element.
Right-click the Resample element and select Properties from the popup menu.
Page 400
The Resample tab of the Properties dialog opens.
Interval defines the interval at which the data set is to be resampled. The drop-
down menu allows
you to define the unit of time as millisecond (ms) or second (s).
Define resampling interval and click OK.
several
Workspace,
For more information, see Running and testing KPIs on p. 403.
10.12.23 Time functions: Time Shift

Time Shift allows you to modify the timestamp and time range of the input dataset.
For example,
time shift can be used to create a time range for event-type input that is logged
as a point in time,
such as Dropped call. Defining a time range surrounding this point in time allows
you to correlate the
time range surrounding the event with other parameters (e.g. ec/n0 best active set)
to find out what
Page 401
the values of the correlated parameters were not only at the time of the event but
also before and
after the event.
To add a Time Shift element to the KPI, drag and drop the element to the Workbench.
Connect the data set(s) on which the time shift is to be performed to the upper
the Time Shift element by pressing the left mouse button down on the output socket
of each data set
and holding down the mouse button while dragging a connector line from the data set
output socket
to the input socket of the Time Shift element.
Right-click the Time Shift element and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Time Shift tab of the Properties dialog opens.
Time offset enables you to define an offset in relation to the point in time the
event occurred.
Selecting backward from the drop-down menu defines the offset point before the
event. Selecting
forward from the drop-down menu defines the offset point after the event. Define
the distance of the
offset point from the event by entering an amount of time in the time field and by
setting unit of time
as either seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
Duration allows you to define the direction and length of the time range from the
offset point defined
in Time offset. Selecting backward from the drop-down menu defines the time range
as ending to
the offset point defined in Time offset. Selecting forward from the drop-down menu
defines the time
range as beginning from the offset point (defined in Time offset). Define the
length of the time range
from the offset point (defined in Time offset) by entering an amount of time in the
time field and by
setting unit of time as either seconds (s) or milliseconds (ms).
For example, to define a time range that begins 10 seconds before the event and
ends 10 seconds
after the event, define Time offset as backward 10 s and Duration as forward 20 s.
Define the properties of the Time Shift and click OK.
Page 402
several
Workspace,
10.12.24 Running and testing KPIs

To test the operation of the KPI, make sure all elements are of green color
(operational), connect the
last element to the Output element. Select a measurement or several measurements
from the
Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace. Right-click on the
Workbench
background, and select Run Script from the popup menu.
Page 403
Once the script has been successfully run, there is a good opportunity for fine-
tuning the KPI based on
the output, for instance, by adding a sort element to the KPI to make the results
more explicit,
defining even more optimal states and triggers if using the state machine, or
further filtering the data
if the output still contains irrelevant information. You can also hide irrelevant
columns in the output
data set by double-clicking on the Output element and clearing the irrelevant
columns on the Results
tab of the Properties dialog. Ideally, the KPI should produce only the target data
without any
irrelevant information and in as explicit form as possible.
10.12.25 Saving KPIs as components

To save the KPI as a component that can later be reused as part of more complex
KPIs, right-click on
the Workbench background and select Save Component from the popup menu.
Note: In order for the component to work properly as part of a KPI, it must be
operational and
complete with Parameter and Output elements when saved.
The saved KPI component can be found from the menu structure on the right, under
the menu item
Components.
To add a component to a KPI, drag and drop the component to the Workbench.
The Component Type dialog opens.
To open the component as a single element, select Single component and click OK.
Page 404
To open the component in multiple-element format that allows you to edit the
properties of individual
parts of the component, select Multiple nodes (will reset model) and click OK.
For editing the properties of individual KPI elements, see the topic pertaining to
the relevant KPI
element above.
10.12.26 Saving Custom KPIs

To save a KPI, right-click on the Workbench background and select Save from the
popup menu. If the
script is not operational, the Save option will not be displayed in the popup menu.
Page 405
The Analyze Wizard – Properties dialog opens.
Name defines a name for the KPI. Name is displayed in the Parameters view under the
User item.
Title defines a title for the KPI. Title is displayed when the KPI has been dragged
and dropped to the
Workbench
Description defines a description for the KPI. The description of a KPI can be
accessed by rightclicking the KPI in the Parameters view and selecting Description
Select Next.
The Analyze Wizard – Column Aliases dialog opens.
In the Column Aliases dialog you can define how the retrieved data is displayed in
the various data
views. These settings are optional. Click Finish.
Page 406
The saved custom KPI can be found in the Parameters view under the User item.
10.12.27 Reopening custom KPIs for editing

Go to the User item in the Parameters view. Select Tools | KPI Workbench in the
Ribbonbar to open
the KPI Workbench. Select the KPI you want to open for editing and drag and drop it
to the
Workbench.
The Component Type dialog opens.
To open the component in a format that allows editing, select Multiple nodes (will
reset model)
and click OK.
For editing the properties of individual KPI elements, see the topic pertaining to
the relevant KPI
element above.
Page 407
10.12.28 Defining KPI execution method and value constants

The Properties control in the bottom right corner of the screen allows you to
define the KPI execution
method and value constants. If the intended purpose of the new KPI calls for
switching the
KPI execution method, or if you wish to define value constants for use during the
KPI
creation process, these both should be done before beginning to define the actual
KPI.
KPI execution method

You are able to select one of the following three KPI execution methods from the
drop-down menu.
Execute for all executes the query simultaneously on all measurement files.
Execute for measurement executes the query on all measurement files belonging to
the same
measurement session.
Execute for file executes the query for each measurement file one at a time.
Defining value constants

To define values that can be referred to in scripts with a reference, right-click
on the empty
Constants field in the bottom right corner of the screen and select Add Constant
from the popup
menu.
Page 408
The Add Constant dialog opens.
Name defines the reference string which is replaced by the constant value (e.g.
10000, see
screenshot below) in a script. In script, the usage of the reference string example
is {$example}.
Click OK.
The Constants field now displays a row with the reference string example.
Click the content field (on the right of the reference string), enter the constant
value (e.g. 1000), and
press Enter.
The constant example can now be referred to with the string {$example} when
defining the
properties of various KPI elements. For example, when defining a filter element,
the reference string
can be used instead of the actual value 10000.
10.12.29 Use Case 21: Creating complex filters using multiple

conditions
Filter makes it possible to filter out all the values in a data set that do not
fulfill a defined condition.
For instance, a filter for Scrambling Code <= 2 would AND Scrambling Code > 0 would
filter out all
other scrambling codes than 1 and 2.
The following example creates a filter that filters out all scrambling codes other
than those belonging
to the ranges 12-21, 29-30, and 74-88. As a formula, the logic can be presented in
the following
format: (scr. code<=21 AND scr. code > 11) OR (scr. code<=30 AND scr. code >= 29)
OR
(scr. code <=88 AND scr. code >= 74).
To add a Filter element to the KPI, drag and drop the Filter element to the
Workbench.
Page 409
Connect the data set to the upper (i.e. input) sockets of the Filter element by
while dragging
a connector line from the data set output socket to the input socket of the Filter
element.
Right-click the Filter element and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Filter tab of the Properties dialog opens.
Click the Add button to add a filter.
Page 410
Define the first condition, e.g. scr. code <= 21, and select OK.
The Properties dialog now displays the defined condition.
To add another condition, click Add.

Define the second condition, e.g. scr. code > 11, and select OK.
Page 411
The Properties dialog now displays the two conditions.
The first of the three value ranges, i.e. 12-21, has now been defined. The logic of
the filter element
follows that of a binary tree, and thus one node can always have only two child
nodes. In other words,
as the first already defined condition pair takes up one of the two possible nodes
on the highest level,
there can be only one available node left on that level. However, in order for us
to be able to create a
filter that can accommodate also situations where there are values from only one of
the ranges, three
nodes of equal importance are needed, one for each value range. We can accomplish
this by adding
the two remaining condition pairs, i.e. (scr. code<=30 AND scr. code >= 29) and
(scr. code
<=88 AND scr. code >= 74) as children to the remaining free higher-level node. In
practice, the
original formula is restructured in the following manner: (scr. code<=21 AND scr.
code > 11) OR
((scr. code<=30 AND scr. code >= 29) OR (scr. code <=88 AND scr. code >= 74)).
Next, the second higher-level node is created as a parent for the remaining two
condition pairs. To
create the second higher level node, select one of the two existing conditions and
click Add.
Define the condition, e.g. scr. code <= 30, in the Condition dialog and click OK.
Page 412
The new condition is automatically added as the second higher-level node. (This is
because the node
selected before clicking the Add button in the previous phase already contained the
maximum of two
child nodes.)
As the filter should be able to accommodate also situations where there are values
from only one of
the ranges, the logical operator between the two higher-level nodes must be changed
to OR.
To change the logical operator, right-click on the operator and select the intended
operator from the
popup menu.
Page 413
The operator is changed to OR.
Next, to complete the second condition pair, select the previously created
condition, i.e. scr. code <=
30, and click Add. Define the condition, i.e. scr. code >= 29, in the Condition
dialog and click OK.
The second condition pair is completed.
Again, as the filter should be able to accommodate also situations where there are
values from only
one of the ranges, the logical operator must be changed to OR.
Page 414
To create the remaining condition pair, i.e. 74-88, select one of the conditions in
the latest pair and
click Add.
Define the condition, i.e. scr. code >= 74, in the Condition dialog and click OK.
A new level is added automatically to the binary tree.
Next, to complete the third condition pair, select the previously created
condition, i.e. scr. code >=
74, and click Add. Define the condition, i.e. scr. code <=88, in the Condition
dialog and click OK.
Page 415
The properties of the filter element are now complete.
Click OK to return to the Workbench view.

The Filter element changes color from red to green, which means that it is
operational.
Test the operation of the KPI this far by connecting it to the Output element (even
if you are still
going to add more elements). Select a measurement or several measurements from the
Measurements section on the Measurements page of the Workspace. Right-click on the
Workbench
background, and select Run Script from the popup menu. For more information, see
Running and
testing KPIs.
Page 416
10.12.30 Use Case 22: Creating a KPI for dropped calls resulting
from a missing handover
This use case describes the steps for creating a KPI for dropped calls resulting
from a missing
handover.
To open the KPI Workbench, select Tools | KPI workbench from the Ribbonbar.
Step 1: Planning and Adding Parameters

First you need to consider what parameters would be the best indicators of a
missing handover. This
sort of situations can occur for instance in downtown areas where a corner of a
building may instantly
block the coverage of the serving cell, giving it no time to signal the next cell
of a handover. Typically,
when a missing handover occurs, two parameters are affected almost simultaneously:
block error ratio
value rises and the Ec/N0 value of the active set falls below that of the monitored
set. With the latter
case, you need to consider what kind of calculation and which parameters are needed
to produce this
sort of value.
Thus, the relevant parameters are BLER and, to be able to compare the Ec/N0 value
of the active set
to the absolute best Ec/N0 value of both the active and monitored sets, both Ec/N0
best active set and
Ec/N0 1. best. In other words, if Ec/N0 1. best is better than Ec/N0 best active
set, the handover has
not occurred. The value can be produced by subtracting Ec/N0 1. best from Ec/N0
active set. In other
words, if the result of the subtraction of Ec/N0 1. best from Ec/N0 best active set
is smaller than zero,
a better Ec/N0 value exists than that of the active set.
Isolating missing handovers from the data will be necessary in order for it to be
possible to correlate
missing handovers with dropped calls. This is best achieved by using the state
machine. Missing
handover will be defined as a state and thus isolated from the data. In addition to
this state, the
operation of the state machine requires also an idle state to make the transitions
from state to state
possible. As Bad BLER values by necessity precede missing handovers, a state for
Bad BLER might
also be useful. Thus, the state machine will use three states: OK, Bad BLER, and
Missing handover.
For the transitions to occur from state to state, you have to decide what values
will trigger them. In
other words, what value is considered good, bad, etc. and which transition it will
trigger. For the
purposes of this use case, a BLER value that is greater or equal to 20 is
considered bad and an Ec/N0
difference that is smaller than zero is considered to signify a missing handover.
Thus, the transition from the ‘normal’ state OK to the missing handover
prerequisite state Bad BLER
should be triggered by a bad BLER value (i.e. when BLER is greater or equal to 20).
For the transition
to occur from Bad BLER to the actual Missing handover, also the Ec/N0 difference
will have to be
smaller than zero. If however either one of the trigger values improves, the state
machine should
return to the relevant state. Thus three more transitions are needed, one for
returning from the state
Bad BLER if BLER improves, one for returning from the state Missing Handover to Bad
BLER if the
Ec/N0 difference value improves but the BLER value remains bad, and one to return
from the state
Missing handover straight to the state OK if BLER improves.
It is very important that there is always a returning transition from each state in
case the conditions of
the transitions to the state are not fulfilled anymore. This ensures accurate
results and the correct
operation of the state machine.
Page 417
It is also recommended to always plan the operation of the state machine in the
form of a flow chart,
complete with trigger values. See an example below.
Ec/N0 difference
<0
BLER >= 20
OK
Bad BLER
BLER < 20
Missing
handover
Ec/N0 difference > 0
BLER < 20
Once the missing handovers have been isolated from the data using the state
machine, it will be
necessary to correlate the missing handover events with the parameter Call dropped
to find out if any
of the dropped calls in the data occurred while a handover was missing.
From the Parameters view, drag and drop the parameters BLER, Ec/N0 best active and
Ec/N0 Nth best
to the Workbench.
Page 418
When you drag and drop the parameter Ec/N0 Nth best to the Workbench, the Analyze
Wizard –
Filters dialog opens.
Make sure the Value field contains the value 1 and select Finish.
Step 2: Combining raw data sets

Next, as the mathematical function Subtraction requires the two values between
which the operation
takes place to be found within the same data set, to calculate the Ec/N0
difference, the two parameter
data sets have to be combined into a single data set. As we are interested in two
Ec/N0 values that
occur simultaneously, we can use the correlation All Values Within Time Range to
combine the two
data sets.
From the Correlations menu, drag and drop All Values Within Time Range to the
Workbench and
drag connector lines from the output sockets of the parameters Ec/N0 best active
set and Ec/N0 Nth
best to its input sockets by holding the left mouse button down.
Page 419
Step 3: Adding Operations

From the Math menu, drag and drop Subtraction (-) to the Workbench and connect All
Values
Within Time Range to it.
Right-click on the Subtraction element and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Properties
dialog opens.
From the Left column drop-down menu, select ec/no. From the Right column drop-down
menu, select
1. best Ec/N0. Leave the Right value field empty. Type Ec/N0 difference to the
Result title field.
At this point, there are two input data sets: BLER and Ec/N0 difference. To combine
these data sets
into a single data set, you need to select a correlation method that does not
remove any data from
either of the sets, namely Union.
Page 420
From the Joins menu, drag and drop Union to the Workbench and connect BLER and
Ec/N0
difference to it.
To test the output at this point, connect the Union element to the Output element.
Then, select a
measurement or several measurements from the Measurements section on the
Measurements
page of the Workspace. Right-click on the Workbench background, and select Run
Script from the
popup menu. The output grid opens as a new workbook.
Page 421
From the output grid, it is evident that although the two tables and their time
columns have been
merged, the rows are not ordered by time. As most operations require the input data
to be ordered by
time, you need to sort the data set before performing any further operations on it.
Page 422
From the Sorting menu, drag and drop the Ascending sort element to the Workbench
and connect
the Union element to it.
Right-click on the Ascending sort element and select Properties from the drop-down
menu.
Page 423
Select time from the Column drop-down menu and click OK.
The Ascending sort element is now operational.
To test the output again at this point, connect the Ascending sort element to the
Output element.
Then, select a measurement or several measurements from the Measurements section
on the Measurements page of the Workspace. Right-click on the Workbench background,
and select Run Script from the popup menu.
Page 424
The output grid is now ordered according to time.
Page 425
From the Operations menu, drag and drop State Machine to the Workbench and connect
the
Ascending sort element to it.
Right-click on the State Machine element and select Properties from the drop-down
menu.
Page 426
Select Add. The State dialog opens.
To create a state called OK, type OK to the Name field and click OK.
In the Properties dialog, click Add again. In the State dialog, type Bad BLER to
the Name field and
click OK.
Again, in the Properties dialog, click Add. In the State dialog, type Missing
handover to the Name
field and click OK.
All states have now been created. As the state OK serves the function of the idle
state in this use
case, select the state OK from the Initial state drop-down menu. This defines OK as
the starting
point for the operation of the state machine.
Next, define a condition that has to be fulfilled in order for the state machine to
move from the Initial
State (i.e. the state OK) to the state Bad BLER. To define transitions from the
state OK, select OK
from the States field, and click Modify.
An empty State dialog opens. The name of the state, i.e. OK, is displayed in the
Name field.
Page 427
To create a transition from the state OK to another state, click Add.

Next, define the target state (i.e. the state to which the transition occurs) by
selecting Bad BLER
from the Target drop-down menu. Because the only relevant state in terms of the KPI
is Missing
handover and the output should not include any data from the state OK, leave the
Output field
empty.
Next, define the condition that causes the transition to occur from the state OK to
the state Bad BLER.
For the purposes of this use case, it has been decided that for a BLER value to be
considered bad, it
Page 428
has to be 20 or more. To define this as a transition condition, select bler from

the Column drop-down
menu, select >= (i.e. greater or equal) from the Operator drop-down menu, and type
the value 20
to the Value field.
When the condition has been defined, click OK to return to the Transition dialog.
The condition bler >= 20 is now displayed in the Conditions field.
As there is no need to define any more conditions for the transition from the state
OK to the state Bad
BLER, click OK in the Transition dialog to return to the State dialog.
In the State dialog, the transition to Bad BLER is now displayed in the Transitions
field.
As there is no need to define any more transitions from the state OK, click OK in
the State dialog to
return to the Properties dialog.
Page 429
To define transitions from the state Bad BLER, select Bad BLER in the Properties
dialog, and click the
Modify button.
Again, an empty State dialog opens. The name of the state, i.e. Bad BLER, is
displayed in the Name
field.
Two transitions are needed from the state Bad BLER: one that returns to the initial
state OK in case
the BLER value is less than 20 again, and another to move from the state Bad BLER
to the state
Missing handover if the Ec/N0 difference between the best active set and the
absolute best set is less
than 0.
To create a new transition, click Add in the State dialog.
Page 430
selecting Missing
handover from the Target drop-down menu. Because the only relevant state in terms
of the KPI is
Missing handover and the output should not include any data from the state Bad
BLER, leave the
Output field empty. Click the Add button.
Define the condition for the transition from the state Bad BLER to the state OK.
Select bler from the
Column drop-down menu, select < (i.e. smaller than) from the Operator drop-down
menu, and type
the value 20 to the Value field.
The condition bler < 20 is now displayed in the Conditions field.
Click OK to return to the State dialog.
Page 431
The transition from Bad BLER to OK is displayed in the Transitions field of the
State dialog.
Click Add to add a transition from Bad BLER to Missing handover.

selecting Missing
handover from the Target drop-down menu. Because the only relevant state in terms
of the KPI is
Missing handover and the output should not include any data from the state Bad
BLER, leave the
Output field empty. Click the Add button.
Define the condition for the transition from the state Bad BLER to the state
Missing handover. Select
Ec/N0 difference from the Column drop-down menu, select < (i.e. smaller than) from
the
Operator drop-down menu, and type the value 0 to the Value field.
Page 432
The Transition dialog opens with the condition Ec/N0 difference displayed in the
Conditions field of
the Transition dialog.
As there is no need to define any more conditions for transitions from the state
Bad BLER, click OK in
the Transition dialog to return to the State dialog.
In the State dialog, the transitions to the states Bad BLER and Missing handover
are now displayed in
the Transitions field.
As there is no need to define any more transitions from the state Bad BLER, click
OK in the State
dialog to return to the Properties dialog.
Page 433
To define transitions from the state Missing handover, select Missing handover in
the Properties
dialog and click the Modify button.
Two transitions are needed from the state Missing handover: one that returns to the
initial state OK in
case the BLER value is less than 20 again, and another to move from the state
Missing handover to
the state Bad BLER if the Ec/N0 difference between the best active set and the
absolute best set is
greater or equal to 0.
To create a new transition, click Add.
Page 434
Define the target state (i.e. the state to which the transition occurs) by
selecting OK from the Target
drop-down menu. As the output should include the data from the state Missing
handover, enter the
name Missing handover to the Output field.
Once the target state has been defined, click Add to add a condition for the
transition.
Define the transition from the state Missing handover to the state OK. Select bler
from the Column
drop-down menu, select < (i.e. smaller than) from the Operator drop-down menu, and
type the
value 20 to the Value field. Once the condition has been defined, click OK to
return to the State
dialog.
The condition bler < 20 is now displayed in the Conditions field of the Transition
dialog.
When the transition has been defined, click OK to return to the State dialog.
Page 435
The transition to OK is now displayed in the Transitions field of the State dialog.
As one more transition is needed from the state Missing handover, click the Add
button in the State
dialog.
Define the target state (i.e. the state to which the transition occurs) by
selecting Bad BLER from the
Target drop-down menu. As the output should include the data from the state Missing
handover,
enter the name Missing handover to the Output field.
Next, click Add to define the condition for the transition from the state Missing
handover to the state
Bad BLER.
Page 436
Select Ec/N0 difference from the Column drop-down menu, select >= (i.e. greater or
equal) from
the Operator drop-down menu, and enter the value 0 to the Value field. When the
condition has
been defined, click OK to return to the Transition dialog.
Click OK to return to the State dialog.

The transition to Bad BLER is now displayed in the Transitions field of the State
dialog.
Click the OK button to return to the Properties dialog. Click the OK button in the
Properties dialog.
The State Machine element is now operational.
The states where the BLER value rises and a handover is missing have now been
isolated. To find the
events where missing handovers lead to dropped calls, we need to add the parameter
Call dropped to
the KPI.
Page 437
Drag and drop the parameter Call dropped from the Parameters view to the KPI
Workbench.
As the only relevant dropped calls in terms of the KPI are the ones that occur
during the state Missing
handover, the most optimal correlation for combining these two data sets is All
Values Within Time
Range.
Drag and drop an All Values Within Time Range element from the Correlations menu to
the KPI
Workbench. For the output data set to include all Missing handover time ranges and
only those
dropped call events that occur during these time ranges, the state machine has to
be the primary data
set and the parameter Call dropped the secondary one.
Connect the state machine to the leftmost input socket of the All Values Within
Time Range element.
Connect the parameter Call dropped to the next socket. Finally, connect the All
Values Within Time
Range element to the Output element.
Page 438
Step 4: Running and Testing the KPI

To run the KPI, select a measurement or several measurements from the Measurements
section on
the Measurements page of the Workspace. Right-click on the Workbench background,
and select
Run Script from the popup menu. The final output includes only the rows with
Missing handover
events from the measurement data, and if there are Call dropped events within the
time range of the
Missing handover events, these will be displayed as well.
Page 439
To save the custom KPI for later use, right-click on the Workbench background and
select Save.
The Analyze Wizard – Properties dialog opens.
Enter Dropped calls resulting from missing handover to the Name and Title fields
and click Next.
The Analyze Wizard - Column Aliases dialog opens. Click Finish. The KPI can now be
found in the
in the Parameters view under the User item.
Page 440
10.13
Analytics
Analytics feature is part of the Nemo Analyze Professional feature package.
Analytics consists of new summary tables in the Analyze database for voice/video
call, data, MMS,
SMS, and handover events. The information in the Analytics tables is essentially
the same as in the
standard database tables. The key difference is that Analytics tables do not have
the physical per
measurement file federation as the standard tables. This makes Analytics queries to
execute
significantly faster over large (>100 log files) datasets when comparing to
corresponding standard
queries.
Analytics tables are populated with queries executed over the standard tables. Thus
the process has
two steps, first the log file(s) are loaded into the Nemo Analyze database as
before. Then,
AnalyzeAnalytics.exe, a process running on the background, will automatically
detect new files added
to the database, and run a set of queries over the files and save the query results
into the Analytics
tables. Analytics can be enabled from the View | Options | Database | Queries | Use
Analytics to
preprocess measurement data.
Analytics tables are visible for the end user via new set of queries in the
Parameters view, under
Analytics branch. The queries can be used to plot events on the map, calculated
statics, etc. in a
similar manner as standard queries. Analytics queries can be also used in custom
workbooks and
report templates.
Note that the file loaded to the database cannot be queried with Analytics queries
immediately after it
appears in the database. There is an additional delay to process the files, that
is, to run the queries to
populate Analytics tables. The extra delay is approximately 4min per 1 hour of raw
log file data.
When using Nemo Analyze Enterprise Analytics starts automatically in the database
server.
Page 441
10.14
(S)FTP Log File Autoload

Nemo Analyze enables loading log files and autonomous rep files to the database
automatically over
FTP or SFTP connection. The feature is mainly targeted for Nemo Analyze Enterprise,
but it can be
enabled also in Nemo Analyze Standalone.
Loading of the files over FTP is two-step process. First the files are retrieved
from the FTP server and
saved to a local folder. Then the files are loaded from the local folder into the
database.
♦
Please note that the measurements files are removed from the FTP server´s
autoload folder after loading.
You can configure automatic measurement loading from an FTP server on the FTP
Autoload page in
the Nemo Analyze Server tool. Nemo Analyze Server can periodically connect to a
remote FTP server
and load any measurements from the FTP server to the server's database.
Enable FTP autoload, when selected, enables automatic FTP loading can be enabled.
Protocol enables you to select between FTP and SFTP protocols. For FTP protocol,
the Use active
mode option can be used to select either passive or active FTP connection. For SFTP
the Use active
mode option is not available.
Host, Port, Username and Password define the address and login information of the
remote server.
Remote folder defines the folder on the server from where Nemo Analyze Server will
search for the
measurement files to load. Nemo Analyze Server can search for measurements in more
than one
folder on the server. To add more folders, enter them into the Additional folders
field separated by
vertical line ( | ) characters.
Page 442
Scanning interval defines how often Nemo Analyze Server will connect to the FTP
server and search
for newly-added measurements. Enter the value in seconds. To also scan subfolders,
select Load files
recursively from subfolders. When selecting Delete files from server after load
option, all
downloaded files are automatically deleted from the server.
Apply changes by clicking Apply Changes at the bottom of the page.
Page 443
11 OTHER TASKS
11.1 Editing color sets

Color sets are used to color the measurement route and BTS icons on a map based on
parameter
values. This makes it easier to spot problem areas on a map. Color sets can also be
used in grid and
numerical data views to highlight certain data. To edit and create color sets,
select Tools | Color set
editor.
In the Color Set Editor dialog you will see a list of all existing color sets. You
can sort the color sets
by selecting the Type and Group. You can also search for a color set by its name.
To edit an existing
color set, double-click on the color set.
In the Color Set Properties dialog you can edit the settings for each color set.
Click Modify.
Page 444
Name and Short Name identify

the color set.
Select from the Groups list the

items with which the color set will
be associated.
Type defines what kind of data

the color set is used with,
numerical, gradient, or string.
The Groups and Type settings can
be used to sort the color sets in
the Color Set Editor dialog.
Values table displays the different

l
d th
11.2 Importing color sets

It is possible to import color sets from Nemo Outdoor. Select File | Settings
(Import) |. In the
Open dialog, browse the color set file (.csf) you want to import and click Open. In
the Import
Settings dialog, select the color sets that you would like to import and finally
click OK.
The imported color sets are added in the Color Set Editor.
Page 445
11.2.1
Automatic generation of color sets
With Nemo Analyze it is also possible to generate color sets automatically from
parameter values that
appear in the measurement file. First go to the Maps page in the Workspace by
clicking the
and open a blank map.
icon,
On the Measurements page in the Workspace, click on a measurement file. From the
Parameters
view, select a parameter that you want to plot on the map, for example, RX level
full, and drag it on
the map.
A route is drawn on the map and it is colored by default by using color rotation.
Right-click on the map and select Generate Color Set from the popup menu.
Page 446
In the Color Set Wizard, select the parameter that you dragged on the map, e.g., RX
level full. In
the Column field, select the parameter again. Click Next.
Type a name and a short name for the new color set. Also define in which group the
color set will be
added. Finally, click Finish. The new color set is generated.
Page 447
To apply the new color set on the route, right-click on the route and select
Properties. In the Color
page, select Based on value as Mode and then the color set you created (e.g., RX
level full 2(dBm))
and the corresponding parameter in the Scheme field (e.g., RX level full). Click
OK.
The color set is applied to the route. The color legend on the right displays the
colors and the
corresponding values.
Page 448
11.2.2
Use Case 23: Automatic generation of color set for a value

range
This use case explains how to generate a color set automatically for a value range.
This functionality is
particularly useful when creating color sets for, e.g. scrambling code, cell id,
and BSIC.
First open a blank map from the Maps page in the Workspace by double-clicking on a
map in the
Loaded view. It is assumed that the map has been loaded to the Workspace from the
Map Folder.
Next, select a measurement file from the Workspace. From the Parameters view,
select a
parameter that you want to plot on the map, for example, Cell identification, and
drag it on the map.
Page 449
A route is drawn on the map. The route is colored by default by using color
rotation. If the route
appears as symbols, right-click on the route, select Properties, and on the Route
page select Line in
the Draw Mode field. Click OK.
Page 450
Next, right-click on the Color Legend in the side panel. Click on Editor and select
Add…. In the Color
Set Properties dialogue click Add Range.
In the Add Range dialogue, you can define a value range for a new color set, and
the interval between
the values. Here the value range is from 116731 to 117419 with an interval of 1.
Click OK.
The new value range for the color set has been created. Now the various parameter
values show more
distinctly on the map due to the user-defined value range.
Page 451
11.2.3
Use Case 24: Creating a color set
This use case describes the steps for creating a new color set.
Select Tools | Color set editor. In the Color Set Editor, click the Add button.
An empty Color Set Properties dialog opens up. Define first the settings at the top
of the dialog. Next
start defining the value ranges and colors. Click the Add button.
Page 452
In the Range Properties dialog, select the color and then the upper and lower
limits of the value
range. You can also write a description for the value range. Finally click OK.
Page 453
Repeat the step until you have a complete set of values. Click OK and the new color
set is added to
the Color Set Editor dialog.
11.2.4
Use Case 25: Creating and applying a color set on map
This use case describes the steps for creating and applying a color set on a map.
Select Tools | Color set editor. In the Color Set Editor, click the Add button. An
empty Color Set
Properties dialog opens up. Type a name for the color set, and select in which
group it is added. Select
gradient as the type. Click the Add button.
Page 454
Next define the string that will be colored. In the Value Properties dialog, select
a color and then the
minimum value for the parameter. You can also write a description for the value.
Finally click OK.
Repeat the step for the maximum value.
♦
Note that you should always define the values from lowest to highest. Otherwise
the color set will not work properly.
The defined values and colors are displayed in the Color Set Properties dialog.
Page 455
Click OK and the new color set is added to the Color Set Editor dialog. Click
Close.
Open a blank map, e.g. from the Maps page in the Workspace, and on the Measurements
page of
the Workspace, select a measurement in the workspace. Type in Ec/N0 best active set
in the
Parameters view filter field, and drag the parameter on the map. The measurement
route appears on
the map if the file contains location data.
Right-click on the route and select Properties.
Page 456
In the Properties dialog, go to the Color page and select Based on value as the
Mode. In the
Scheme field, select Ec/N0 best active set and in the Color set field, select the
EcNo gradient
color set that was created earlier. Click OK.
Page 457
The route will be colored based on the set of rules defined in the new color set.
Page 458
11.2.5
Use Case 26: Creating and applying a color set in grid
This use case describes the steps for creating and applying a color set in a grid.
Select Tools | Color set editor. In the Color Set Editor, click the Add button. An
empty Color Set
Properties dialog opens up. Type a name for the color set, and select in which
group it is added. Make
sure that the name of the new color set is not already in use. Select string as the
Type. Click the Add
button.
Next define the string that will be colored. In the String Properties dialog, type
in the string of text
that will be colored and select the color used. You can also write a description
for the string.
Click OK.
Page 459
The new string is displayed in the Values field of the Color Set Properties dialog.
Click OK and the new color set is added to the Color Set Editor dialog.
Page 460
Open a Layer3 signaling grid. Select a device in the Workspace, and type L3 in the
Parameters view
filter field. Right-click the L3 signaling parameter, and select Open in | Grid. A
workbook containing
L3 signaling data in a grid is opened.
Right-click on the grid, and select Properties.
Page 461
From the Color Sets tab of the Properties dialog, select the column Message Name
and from the
drop-down menu the previously created color set and click OK.
The signaling messages defined in the color set are colored.
Page 462
11.3 Scheduling events

The Event Scheduler makes it possible to schedule workbooks and reports to be run
and measurement
files to be loaded to the database automatically from a predefined folder.
To open Event Scheduler, select Tools | Event Scheduler from the Ribbonbar.
The Scheduler view opens.
Page 463
To add an event, select a timeslot from the calendar, right-click over it, and
select Add Event from
the popup menu.
The Schedule Event Batch dialog opens.
One event batch can contain several events that are being run successively.
Batch name defines a name for the batch.
Start time defines a start time for the batch.
Page 464
To define a recurring batch, click the Recurrence button. For more information on
recurring events,
see Defining recurring events on page 476.
Measurement folder defines the folder that is used as source for the events in this
batch. Reports
run by the events are run for measurements in this folder.
Update folder before report execution, if selected, ensures that the folder has
been refreshed
before execution of the event batch.
Do not run event for empty folder, if selected, ensures that a report is not
generated if the folder
where the report should be generated is empty.
Export folder defines a destination folder for the exported report.
Autogenerate name generates a filename for the exported file automatically.
When report ready defines whether report/workbook will be closed and if an
automatic notification
email to be sent upon scheduled report execution.
Attach report, if selected, automatically attaches scheduled reports to event
reporting emails.
Configure email allows you to define notification email settings.
♦
Note that it is recommended to use Gmail when sending email from Nemo Analyze.
To configure Gmail with Nemo Analyze, select Options from the top toolbar and
enter settings as shown below. If there a problems with sending emails even
when the configurations are as below it is advisable to check whether the firewall
allows connections to port 465 outside the device’s own network.
Note that if you are using Outlook Exchange and have trouble when sending email
from Analyze, try leaving the password field empty. The email sending module
uses the same password as the one that is used to log onto the computer and can
detect the password from the system.
Page 465
Add… enables you to add events through the Schedule Event dialog.
Event name defines a name for the event.

Event type defines the event as a report event, a workbook event, a load folder
event, or as a KPI
threshold alarm event. To create and define an event of the selected type, click
the Configure button.
Nemo Analyze enables loading log files and autonomous rep files to the database
automatically over
FTP or SFTP connection.
Loading of the files over FTP is two-step process. First the files are retrieved
from the FTP server and
saved to a local folder. Then the files are loaded from the local folder into the
database.
♦
Please note that the measurements files are removed from the FTP server´s
autoload folder after loading.
You can configure automatic measurement loading from an FTP server on the FTP
Autoload page in
the Nemo Analyze Server Manager. Nemo Analyze Server can periodically connect to a
remote FTP
server and load any measurements from the FTP server to the server's database.
Protocol enables you to select between FTP and SFTP protocols. For FTP protocol,
the Use active
mode option can be used to select either passive or active FTP connection. For SFTP
the Use active
mode option is not available.
Host, Port, Username and Password define the address and login information of the
remote server.
Remote folder defines the folder on the server from where Nemo Analyze Server will
search for the
measurement files to load. Nemo Analyze Server can search for measurements in more
than one
folder on the server. To add more folders, enter the folder names into the
Additional folders field
separated by vertical line ( | ) characters.
Delete enables you to delete an event.
Up enables you to move an event up in the batch.
Down enables you to move an event down in the batch.
Page 466
11.3.1
Report events
Selecting Run Report as the Event Type in the Schedule Event dialog opens the
Configure
Report dialog.
Measurement folder defines the folder on which the report will be run.
Update folder before report execution, if selected, checks whether there are new
measurement
files in the folder before running the report.
Report per measurement, if selected, runs the report on each measurement file
separately.
Report file defines the report that is to be run on the measurement files within
the folder defined in
Measurement folder. To browse for a report file, click the browse button, select a
report file and click
OK.
Export, if selected, enables automatic export of scheduled reports to PDF, MS
Excel, MS Word, Rich
text, text, and HTML.
Export folder defines a destination folder for the exported report.
Autogenerate name generates a filename for the exported file automatically.
Additional Report Scope Settings opens the Report Scope dialog.
Close workbook when report ready, if selected, automatically closes the workbook
after export.
Send email when report ready defines an automatic notification email to be sent
upon scheduled
report execution.
reporting emails.
Page 467
Clicking the Configure email button in the Configure Report dialog opens the Email
dialog.
To defines the recipient email address.

Subject displays the default subject line of the notification email.
Message allows you to edit the automatic notification email.
Clicking the Additional Report Scope Settings button in the Configure Report dialog
opens the
System tab of the Report Scope dialog.
System defines the systems that will be included in the report.

Band defines the bandwidths that will be included in the report.
Page 468
To define the scope of the report based on time or area, select the Time & Area
tab.
Begin time defines the start time for the time range from which the measurement
files will be
processed.
End time defines the end time for the time range from which the measurement files
will be
processed.
Area, if selected, includes enables the limiting of the report scope based on area.
Define Area opens the Select Polygon Area dialog.
Page 469
Clicking the Define Area button on the Time & Area tab of the Report Scope dialog
opens the
Filter out events marked as scheduled, if selected, events will be filtered.
You can zoom in
and zoom out

By clicking
Page 470

11.3.2
Workbook events
Selecting Run Workbook as the Event Type in the Schedule Event dialog opens the
Configure
Workbook dialog.
Measurement folder defines the folder on which the report will be run.
measurement
separately.
Workbook defines the workbook that is to be run on the measurement files within the
folder defined
in Measurement folder. To browse for a workbook file, click the browse button,
select a workbook file
and click OK.
Export to defines whether the workbook is to be exported as image files (image per
page) or as a
PDF document.
Export folder defines a destination folder for the exported workbook.
Autogenerate name, if selected, generates a filename for the exported file
automatically.
Export name defines the name of the exported report.
Close workbook when report ready, if selected, automatically closes the workbook
after export.
Send email when workbook ready defines an automatic notification email to be sent
upon
scheduled workbook execution.
reporting emails.
Page 471
Clicking the Configure email button in the Configure Workbook dialog opens the
Email dialog.

Subject displays the default subject line of the automatic notification email.
11.3.3
Load folder events
Selecting Load files in folder as the Event Type in the Schedule Event dialog opens
the Configure
Folder dialog.
Load folder defines the folder from which all measurement, map, BTS, report, etc.
files are loaded.
Include subfolders, if selected, causes all measurement, map, BTS, report, etc.
files to be loaded
from all subdirectories of the folder defined in Load folder.
Page 472
11.3.4
KPI Threshold Alarm events
Selecting KPI Threshold Alarm as the Event Type in the Schedule Event dialog opens
the Configure KPI
Threshold Alarm dialog.
Measurement folder defines the measurement folder on which the KPI is run.
measurement
If the Check threshold for each measurement in folder option is selected, the
threshold will be
executed per file separately, instead of running the threshold test over all the
log files in the selected
folder.
separately.
KPI threshold allows you to define the threshold condition.
Run script, when selected, allows you to set any script (.bat) to be run when the
threshold condition
is fulfilled.
Send email, when selected, allows you to configure an email notification to be sent
when the
threshold condition is fulfilled.
Page 473
Clicking the Add below the KPI thresholds box in the Configure KPI Threshold Alarm
dialog opens
the Analyze Wizard – Measurement Parameters dialog.
Select a parameter from the Parameters view and click Next.

The dialog allows you to define optional filters by clicking the Add button. It is
also possible to set
multiple KPI triggers with AND/OR elements.
After defining optional filters, click Finish.
Page 474
Condition dialog opens. This dialog allows you to define left and right columns,
operator, and value.
Select OK to return to Configure KPI Threshold Alarm dialog.
Clicking the Configure email button in the Configure KPI Threshold Alarm dialog
opens the Email
dialog.

Subject displays the default subject line of the automatic notification email.
Page 475
11.3.5
Defining recurring events
Clicking the Recurrence button in the Schedule Event Batch dialog opens the Event
Recurrence
dialog.
Event time allows you to define a Start and End time (i.e. duration) for the event.
Recurrence pattern allows you to define how often the event recurs, i.e. Daily,
Weekly, Monthly,
or every N week(s) on [weekday(s)].
Range of recurrence allows you to define duration for the recurrence pattern,
either based on Start
and End by dates, or based on a user-defined number of occurrences using the End
after N
occurrences control.
11.4 Task Manager and Problem Repository

The Task Manager and the Problem Repository allow the users of Nemo Analyze
Enterprise Edition to
store reports on detected network problems into the server database. A problem
report may contain
screenshots and free-form description of the problem, as well as references to the
log file(s)
displaying the problem. Other users of the client/server system can view the
problem report and drill
down to the relevant log files to analyze the problem.
Page 476
To add a problem to the repository as an open task, right-click in the data view
displaying the problem
at problem spot (i.e. the point in time where the problem is apparent) and select
Add task from the
popup menu. The Add Task dialog opens (see Configuring and editing a task).
To access the Task Manager without adding a task (e.g. to manage, edit, and delete
existing tasks),
move your mouse over the Task Manager tab on the right side of the screen to open
the Task
Manager view. If the Task Manager tab is not visible, enable the Task Manager by
selecting View |
Panels | Task Manager.
The Task Manager view displays a control that allows you to open four different
task views: tasks
assigned to you (My tasks), all existing tasks (All tasks), open tasks assigned to
you (My nonclosed tasks), and closed tasks that have been assigned to you (My
closed tasks). Select and open
a view by double-clicking on the view type (see Managing tasks).
Page 477
11.4.1
Configuring and editing a task
When a new task is created, or an existing one is opened for editing, the Task
Configuration dialog
opens.
Title defines the task name.

Assigned to allows the task to be assigned to a specific user.
Status defines the status of the task as Open or Closed, or as any user-defined
status entered into
the field.
Priority defines the priority of the task as 1 (high), 2 or 3 (low).
Created date shows the date when the task was created.
Due date defines a due date for finishing the task.
Created by displays the name of the user who created the task.
Task id displays the automatically created unique task identification number.
Category allows the task to be assigned with a user-defined category (e.g.
classification according to
the problem type).
Timestamp displays the point in time when the problem occurred.
Longitude displays the geographical location of the problem’s occurrence in
longitude.
Latitude displays the geographical location of the problem’s occurrence in
latitude.
Cell name allows the cell that was active at the time of the problem to be
selected.
Page 478
Area allows the user to enter the place name or a textual description of the area
where the problem
occurred.
Details allows the user to enter a textual description of the problem.
The Attachments tab of the Task Configuration dialog allows you to add attachments
to the task.
Add allows you to add an attachment to the task.

Delete allows you to delete existing attachments.
Save allows you to save the selected attachment to the hard drive.
Execute allows you to open or run the selected attachment.
Page 479
The Location tab of the Task Configuration dialog opens.
The Location tab displays the reported location of the problem’s occurrence on map
based on the
Longitude and Latitude defined on the Problem Details tab. The map can be selected
using the
drop-down menu immediately above the map.
Page 480
The Preview tab displays a screen capture of the data view when the task was
created.
Page 481
11.5 Managing Workspace with Projects

Project manager helps to focus on the subset of your data.
To open Project manager, select File | Project Manager from the Ribbonbar.
To add project, right-click on the Add button. The Add Project dialog appears.
Define a name for the
project and select OK. The project will appear in the Project drop-down menu. To
remove or rename
the project, click on the Remove or Rename button.
By clicking the Add button, you are able to add folders, measurements, BTS files,
maps, reports and
workbooks to the project.
By clicking Options, Project Folder Options dialog opens, allowing you to select
dynamic update
option. Dynamic projects allow creating projects that always show logfiles from the
last six months,
selected IMEI’s and selected area. Files that belong to a project can be selected
based on similar
Page 482
search logic as in search folders. For example all files measured inside a polygon
area, all files with
dropped calls or all files of specific MNC can be automatically included in a
project.
Page 483
Properties dialog can be accessed by selecting Search from the dropdown menu next
to Folder: and
then selecting Search…
Title, extension and description options allow you to search for specific
measurement files based on
the filename, file extension, and file description.
Device type enables you to search for mobile or scanner measurements.
Area enables you to search for measurements made on a defined area. To define the
area, click the
Define Area button. This opens the Select Polygon Area dialog below.
Parameter and value allow searching for specific parameters and their values.
Page 484
Clicking the Define Area button on the Properties dialog Measurement tab (see
above) opens the
You can zoom in
and zoom out

By clicking
Page 485

Size of measured area defines the size of measured area in square kms.
Start date and End date allow you to define a time range from which all measurement
files will be
searched.
Search last allows you to search a defined number of the most recent measurement
files based on
the following parameters:
Days, Weeks, and Months finds measurement files from an N number of previous days,
weeks, and
months.
Measurements finds measurement files from an N number of the most recent
measurement
sessions.
Duration allows you to search for specific measurement files based on their
duration.
Hour from N to N allows you to filter files based on the hour of day when they were
recorded
Page 486
In the Notifications page you can select the events you want to include in the
search.
With the Mobile country code option you can search for measurements made in a
certain country.
Page 487
With the Mobile network code option you can search for measurements made in a
certain network.
With the System option you can search for measurements made in a certain system.
With the Band option you can search for measurements made in a certain band.
With the Applications option you can perform searches based on tests performed in
the log file.
Page 488
With the Packet Technologies option you can perform searches based on packet
technologies.
11.6 Managing users and user groups

The User manager enables you to manage users and user groups (Nemo Analyze
Enterprise Edition).
To open User manager, select Tools | User manager from the Ribbonbar.
To create a new user, select the folder Users in Database Management | Users and
Groups from
the directory tree, right-click on the empty background of the Name field on the
right of the directory
tree, and select New User… from the popup menu.
Page 489
The New User dialog opens.
Name defines the user name.

Password defines the password for the user account.
To set a new password for a user, right-click on the user in the Name field, and
select Set Password
The Set Password dialog opens.
Type a new password in the Password field and click OK.

To delete a user, right-click on the user in the Name field, and select Delete from
the popup menu.
Page 490
11.6.1
User groups
The available user groups include Administrators, Users, Power Users, Commander
Users, and
Commander Managers.
Administrators have unrestricted rights, including access to the cleanup function.
Users do not have delete rights and are only allowed to make queries and load files
into the database.
Users are allowed to view all data and alter minor elements of a file, e.g.
configure notifications.
Power Users have delete rights, i.e. they are allowed to delete measurement and BTS
files.
Otherwise the rights of the Power Users are identical to those of the Users.
Commander users have right to view all history and measurements of Nemo Handy-A
Commander
units loaded into the system, Commander users do not have right to issue
configurations, that is, to
order Nemo Handy-A Commander units to do measurements.
Commander managers have full rights to all Nemo Handy-A Commander units loaded to
the system,
including right to view history and logfiles produced by the units, as well as
managing the
measurements to be done.
Nemo Handy-A Commander unit groups created from the Commander are also shown in the
User
groups. Dallas units in the picture below is an example of such a group. Users
added as members of
that group get right to tissue configurations (order measurements) to the Nemo
Handy-A Commander
units allocated to that group. As a prerequisite, such users have to be also
members of Commander
users group. This means such users will be able to see all the Nemo Handy-A
Commander units in the
system, but can only issue configurations for selected subset of the Nemo Handy-A
Commander units
as defined by the Commander unit group.
To add users to a group, select the folder Groups in Database Management | Users
and Groups
from the directory tree, right-click on a user group on the right of the directory
tree (e.g. Power
Users), and select Add to Group… from the popup menu.
Page 491
The Group Properties dialog opens.
To add a user to the group, click Add.

The Select Users dialog opens.
Select the user(s) you want to add. To select multiple users, hold the Control key
down while
selecting the users. Click OK.
Page 492
The Group Properties dialog opens, displaying the group members.
To remove users from the group, select a user and click the Remove button.
11.7 Viewing Server statistics

To access server statistics (Nemo Analyze Enterprise Edition), select Tools |
Server statistics from
the Ribbonbar.
Page 493
Server statistics are displayed.
To refresh the statistics, right-click on the statistics view and select Refresh
To enable automatic statistics updates (updated every 5 seconds), right-click on
the statistics view
and select Poll from the popup menu.
Page 494
11.7.1
Managing tasks
To access the Task Manager (e.g. to manage, edit, and delete existing tasks), move
your mouse over
the Task Manager tab on the right side of the screen to open the Task Manager view.
If the Task
Manager tab is not visible, enable the Task Manager by selecting View | Panels |
Task Manager.
The Task Manager view displays a control that allows you to open four different
task views: tasks
assigned to you (My tasks), all existing tasks (All tasks), open tasks assigned to
you (My nonclosed tasks), and closed tasks that have been assigned to you (My
closed tasks). Select and open
a view by double-clicking on the view type.
The selected task view type (e.g. My non-closed tasks) opens with all tasks of the
selected type listed.
To add a new task or to configure existing tasks, make a selection from the ribbon
bar.
Page 495
The map view below the task list displays all tasks of the selected type, e.g. All
tasks, My open
tasks, etc. The displayed map may be selected using the drop-down menu immediately
above the
map.
Right-clicking on the task list opens a popup menu.
Configure Task allows you to edit the selected task.

Add Task allows you to create a new task.
Delete Task allows you to delete the selected task.
Refresh allows you to refresh the task list.
Page 496
11.8 Editing Operator Settings

Select Tools | Operators | Operators from the ribbonbar to manage operator
settings. These
settings are used as the basis of operations such as statistics per operator.
The Mobile Operator list is displayed.

To edit the properties of an operator or to add a new operator to the list, right-
click on the operator,
and select Modify or Add from the popup menu.
The Operator Configuration dialog opens.
Page 497
Operator name defines the operator name.

Mobile country code defines the operator’s MCC.
Mobile network code defines the operator’s MNC.
11.9 Editing CDMA operator settings

Select Tools | Operators | Operators from the ribbonbar to manage CDMA operator
settings. These
settings are used as the basis of operations such as statistics per operator.
The CDMA Mobile Operator list is displayed.

To edit the properties of an operator or to add a new operator to the list, right-
click on the operator,
and select Modify or Add from the popup menu.
Page 498
The Operator Configuration dialog opens.
Operator name defines the operator name.

Sid defines the system identification number.
11.10
Configuring notification icons

Nemo Analyze allows you to configure notification icons for all measurement events.
These icons can
be displayed in graphs and maps to alert you when something interesting happens.
See viewing
notification icons in maps and viewing notification icons in graphs. The
notification icons can be
configured using the Parameters view. Alternatively, notifications can also be
configured using the
Notification Configuration functionality.
11.10.1
Configuring notifications using the Parameters view
The parameter-specific notification icons are displayed in connection with the

relevant parameter (e.g.
with the parameter Call connected) in the Parameters view. The parameters that have
not been
assigned with a notification icon are indicated by the
icon. To change the default icon of a
parameter, right-click on the parameter and select Change Defaults from the popup
menu.
Page 499
The Change Defaults dialog opens.
To select a new notification icon, click the browse (…) button.

The Open dialog opens. Select the new notification icon and click the Open button.
The Image field of the Change Defaults dialog now displays the directory path of
the selected icon.
Click OK to set the selected icon as the default notification icon for the
parameter. The icon is
displayed in the Parameters view in connection with the parameter.
Page 500
11.10.2
Notification configuration
You can access the Notification Configuration tool by selecting Tools |

Notifications.
In the Notification Configuration dialog you can define icons for all measurement
events. These
icons can be displayed on graphs and maps to alert you when something interesting
happens. See
viewing notification icons on maps and viewing notification icons on graphs. There
are a number of
default notifications for you to choose from but you can also modify the default
notifications or make
new ones. Select a notification from the list and click the Modify button.
In the Notification Properties dialog, browse a new bitmap in the Icon field and
click OK.
11.11
Menu Editor
With the Menu Editor you can add workbooks to the Workspace menus and edit the
groups in which
queries and workbooks are organized. These groups are visible, for example, in the
workspace when
you right-click on a device.
You can open the Menu Editor by selecting File | Menu editor, or by right-clicking
on a folder in the
Workspace and selecting Customize Menu.
To edit groups, first select a group from the Groups section in the Menu Editor
dialog. These are the
group labels that are visible in the user interface. Under Menus, select the
workbooks are shown in
the group menu. For each group you can select from the right-hand side in the Menu
Editor dialog
Page 501
the cellular systems for which the particular group is available. For example, if
you have a file
measured in the TETRA network, you do not necessarily need to see the UMTS or CDMA
groups.
To add a new workbook, click Add and select a workbook from the Workbooks dialog.
Click OK.
The workbook will appear in the Menu Editor and in the selected menu.
Page 502
Rename workbooks by right-clicking on a workbook in the Menu Editor and selecting

Rename
workbook.
You can add workbooks to three different menus in the Workspace: Device, Folder,
and Measurement
menus.
The Device menu is the popup

menu that opens when you rightclick on a device. It contains
items, such as, Correlate
Parameters and Network
Parameters.
Page 503
The Folder menu is the popup

menu that opens when you rightclick on a file folder under the
Measurements folder.
The Measurement menu is the

popup menu that opens when you
right-click on a measurement file.
It contains items, such as,
Timeline and Adjust Coordinates.
Page 504
11.12
Configuring system settings

In the Options dialog you can make some general system settings. Select View |
Options to open
the dialog.
11.12.1
Options – Environment
Hide advanced UI features hides and displays advanced features that are not needed
in basic use.
Hide advanced SQL functionality hides and displays advanced SQL features that are
not needed in
basic use.
Change ribbon contents dynamically, when selected ribbon contents are changed
dynamically,
according which functionalities are being used.
Display web content using Internet Explorer, when selected, enables displaying HTML
files in the
Nemo Analyze workbooks.
When the Maintain workspace state when application is closed and restarted option
is
selected, also items in the workspace that are not in the database, i.e., maps and
reports, are loaded
when you start Nemo Analyze.
When the Clear query clipboard when application is closed option is selected, the
Query
Clipboard is emptied when you exit Nemo Analyze.
When a number of minutes is entered into the Auto-save default workspace every X
minutes
field, all open workbooks are auto-saved as the default workspace on regular
intervals. This prevents
loss of work, e.g. in the event of a system crash, as the latest auto-saved
workbooks are always
automatically reopened in the program startup. To prevent the default workspace
from opening during
startup, hold down the Shift key.
Page 505
JPEG compression quality defines the quality of images exported from Nemo Analyze.
You can save
workbooks as images by selecting Edit | Send as Image to.
Image to clipboard fixed size enables you to define a fixed size for pictures
placed on the
Clipboard.
Layout defines the layout and position options for workspace and side panel.
Default paths defines the default locations of different types of files. Nemo
Analyze will automatically
look for the defined file types in these folders.
Page 506
Proxy defines the proxy server, username and password. This setting may be needed
when using Live
maps.
Page 507
Throughput defines the unit of measure for throughputs

Base station identification code defines the number format for base station
identification codes.
Cell identification defines in which mode the parameters are presented.
Distance defines the unit of measure for distance.
Velocity defines the unit of measure for velocity.
Hide date from timestamps option hides and displays the date in timestamps.
Limit number of decimal digits in UI to defines the maximum number of decimal
digits displayed.
Page 508
Drill Down enables you to set a time range from which log entries are to be
included in a drill-down
Before and After a selected event in the measurement data.
Header title is displayed at the top of the page when you print views from Nemo
Analyze.
Page 509
Server defines the SMTP server IP address.

Port defines the SMTP port.
Username defines the SMTP server username.
Password defines the SMTP server password.
From defines the sender email address.
To defines the recipient email address for notification emails sent by the event
scheduler.
When Use SSL is selected, emails are sent using an encrypted connection.
Test sends a test email from the defined sender email address to the defined
recipient email address.
Page 510
11.12.2
Options – Database
The Server control enables you to switch between different database configurations
and databases
(e.g. between the standalone database and the database server). It also enables you
to Add, Delete,
and Modify configurations. Analyze-Local is the default standalone database of Nemo
Analyze.
Modify opens the Add Server dialog with existing database settings, enabling you to
modify an
existing database configuration.
Add opens the Add Server dialog, enabling you to define a new database
configuration.
The Additional data sources control enables you to configure connections to other
ODBC databases
on your computer. It enables you to Add, Delete, and Modify configurations.
Title defines the title of the server.

Server host defines the server’s IP address.
ODBC port defines the ODBC port.
Page 511
Server port defines the server port. By default, Nemo Analyze uses the server port
12001.
User defines the username.
Password defines the password.
Name selects the data source.

User defines the username.
Password defines the password.
Auto-hide columns from queries option hides query data that is not relevant.
When the Enable query memory usage warning option is selected, Nemo Analyze will
warn you
when the query memory usage exceeds the Threshold value limit.
When selected, Allow queries to be run in parallel allows you to enable queries to
be run in
parallel and select the maximum amount of parallel queries.
Allow overlapping when joining measurements, when selected, enables Nemo Analyze to
join
files even if they are overlapping in time. This feature may be needed when
processing TEMS log files
that have been cut to multiple adjacent log files during the measurement. Even
though they are
adjacent, there might be an overlap of a few seconds between consecutive log files
that will prevent
joining the files if this option is not selected.
Page 512
Add description to loaded, when set to Prompt user or Project name, automatically
adds or
prompts the user to add a description to a new measurement file when it is loaded
to the database.
This feature is useful if the description field is used to filter or categorize log
files later on in post
processing.
Auto rename duplicate file names, when selected, automatically renames a file if
the filename is
the same as of an existing filename in the database.
11.12.3
Page 513
Options – Color
The Palette is used, for example, to determine colors for neighbor-style graphs and
routes.
Clicking on a color enables you to select either a basic color or to define custom
colors.
11.12.4
Options – Scheduler
The Scheduler is used for defining event template settings.
Page 514
11.12.5
Options – Statistics
Statistics enables you to specify a default basis for statistics calculations (i.e.
whether the
calculations are based on Time, Distance, or Sample), whether Nemo Analyze should
ask you to
select the basis each time a calculation is performed. You can also choose whether
color legend
statistics are calculated based on time, distance or sample, and whether the dB-
parameter statistics
are calculated using linear math.
Area binning enables you to define the bin size in horizontal X steps and vertical
Y steps. To set the
bin in meters, select Bins in meters.
Distance binning enables you to set the binning segments of a route in meters. Note
that the
statistics collected in distance binning are based on the measuring point GPS
coordinates closest to
the midpoint of the defined segment, not necessarily the mean value.
Page 515
11.12.6
Options – IP Trace
When Autoload pcap files is selected, Nemo Analyze automatically uploads the IP
trace (*.pcap)
files attached to the measurement file on the server/local device. Note that the
file is saved on the
local device as such, it is not saved into Nemo Analyze database. In the client the
pcap file is
displayed on the IP Trace tab.
Note that in a server environment the IP traces are not automatically uploaded to
all clients, but other
users have to upload the traces through Workspace | Measurement | popup menu | Open
trace
file, and the file is saved on the local client.
Time offset enables you to adjust the pcap file time difference caused by e.g. time
zones.
♦
Note that processing .pcap files requires a Microsoft Network Monitor tool to be
installed (can be downloaded in Microsoft Download Center).
Page 516
11.12.7
Options – Graph
When the Smooth scrolling when synchronizing option is selected, the graph view
will scroll
smoothly instead of displaying a part of the measurement and then jumping forward
as the
synchronization marker moves out of view.
Palette defines the color palette style for graphs.
Sort bar graph by parameter enables you to group bars in bar graphs by parameter
rather than by
x axis values. For more information, see
Line Graph Filled
In line graphs, select the Filled option in the graph popup menu to show the graph
as "filled".
Page 517
Group Values.
Optimization reduces the time needed for the drawing of the graph.
Zoom all graphs enables you to set zoom to occur synchronously in all graphs.
11.12.8
Options – Map
Default map type defines the map that is opened by default when no other map file
is available.
Page 518
When the Open saved workbook with map type stored in workbook option is selected,
Nemo
Analyze opens the workbook in the same map type as previously saved.
When the Use MapX map defined in logfile header (use with indoor measurements) is
selected, Nemo Analyze always uses the MapX map defined in the logfile header if it
is found on the
workspace, even if Live Map is set as the default map.
Print ratio defines the print ratio in percentage.
Zoom all maps enables you to set zoom to occur synchronously in all maps.
When the Automatically zoom to first added layer option is selected, Nemo Analyze
will zoom in
on the map layer that is added first.
Automatic zoom margin defines the zoom margin percentage.
Draw defines how the route is drawn (line/symbol/image/image & background).

When the Automatically offset simultaneous measurement routes on the map option is
selected, an offset is automatically added to measurement routes that overlap each
other, as is the
case, for example, with multi measurements. You can define the default offset in x
and y directions.
When the Automatically add default BTS for measurement route option is selected,
Nemo
Analyze will check from the file header what BTS file was used when the file was
recorded and open
the same file if it is loaded in the database.
With the Hide distance lines longer than X km option you are able to hide unusually
long lines
which probably signify a problem with the GPS connection.
When the Hide default color line option is selected the route is hidden from the
map when the route
line has no color based on the current color set.
Default route thickness enables you to define the default thicknesses of high band
and low band
routes.
Page 519
When the Use default MapX map in workbooks option is selected, all workbooks use
the MapX
map defined in Default MapX map instead of their own default maps.
Default MapX map defines the MapX map used as default map.
When the Hide title window option is selected, Analyze automatically hides the
geoset title,
improving readability of the reports with MapX maps.
Default location defines the default location when using the live map
functionality.
Zoom slider, if selected a zoom slider will be displayed on the map.
Page 520
Default map defines which map type is used by default

Map service defines which map service is used. See Viewing in live map.
11.12.9
Options – BTS
BTS texts options allows you to define the size and style of BTS text.
Display BTS overlay on top of other layers sets BTS layers to be displayed over all
other layers.
Default BTS filter and Carrier allows you to define the default BTS filter and
carrier.
Optimization defines when cells and sites are drawn on a map.
Page 521
Cell size defines the size of the BTS cell icon in pixels. Fixed defines the fixed
size of BTS cells in
pixels. Dynamic, max size defines a maximum size for dynamic BTS cell icons (i.e.
icons which
change size based on zoom level).
Organize by name organizes BTS sites according to name.
Page 522
Show cell information option hides and displays the selected cell information.
When the Show Cell Information option is selected, by clicking Add you are able to
define which cell-specific information element is displayed on the map for each
cell.
Metric can be set per technology and band.
Hide cell texts on low zoom levels (performance optimization) option hides partly
or completely
the cell texts when the map is zoomed out so that the map can be drawn faster and
with less visual
distractions. The level is adjustable with a slider. Zoom levels are specific to
used maps.
beam range
station coverage
Default beam defines the default beam range in meters.
Default beam angle defines the default beam angle in degrees.
Default color defines the default color of the BTS icons.

Default beam color defines the default beam color.
Page 523
Default settings for BTS parameter allow you to define default color sets for BTS
parameters.
Gradient color enables you to choose whether cells or highlighted cells are
gradient colored.
BTS Technology Based Settings enable you to choose the color and the size of the
base station
depending on which network´s base station it is, or based on the carrier number.
When the Use technology based settings (overrides icon size settings) option is
selected, you
are able to open the Set Technology Setting view by clicking Add. By clicking the
Icon color option,
the size and the color of the base stations changes on the map. If this option is
not selected, only the
size of the base station changes.
11.12.10 Importing custom settings

It is possible to import custom settings (such as custom parameters, workbooks,
events, queries,
color sets, KPIs, etc.) from other users.
Select File | Settings (Import) from the Ribbonbar.
Page 524
The Open dialog appears.
Browse for the settings file (.aex) to be imported and select Open.
11.13
Exporting custom settings

It is possible to export custom settings (such as parameters, workbooks, events,
queries, color sets,
KPIs) to other users. All custom settings are saved in a single .aex file.
Select File | Settings (Export) from the Ribbonbar.
The Save As dialog appears.
Page 525
Select a destination for the settings file (.aex) and select Save.
The Export Settings dialog opens.
Select the settings you want to export and click OK. You can export e.g. database
settings, custom
queries, color sets, events, etc. It is also possible to do multiple selections and
select/deselect groups,
e.g. all workbooks, all queries, at once.
The settings file (.aex) is saved in the selected location and can be imported to
any other Nemo
Analyze Standalone/Client using custom settings import (see Importing custom
settings on page 524).
Page 526
11.13.1
Importing MapInfo polygons
MapInfo® polygons can be used e.g. when defining area-based search folders (see
Search folders on
page 42) and when limiting queries to measurement files from particular area(s)
(see Filtering based
on polygon area on page 100).
To import MapInfo polygons, click the polygons
icon at the bottom of the Workspace view, rightclick on the Workspace | Polygons |
Regions background, and select Import polygon from the
popup menu.
The Polygon Import dialog opens.
Page 527
File defines the MapInfo polygon (.TAB) file to be imported. Click the browse
button
a MapInfo polygon file.
to browse for
Available features allows you to select the polygon file features you want to
import. Clear a feature
to prevent it from being imported.
Selected features allows you to select the polygon file features you want to
import. Clear a feature
to prevent it from being imported.
To select a feature or a set of features, select it in the Available features field
and click the
button.
To select all available features, select it in the Available features field and
click the
The selected feature(s) are displayed in the Selected features field.
button.
Import name allows you to define a new name for the imported polygon.
To clear a feature or a set of features, select it in the Selected features field
and click the
button.
To select all available features, select it in the Selected features field and
click the
button.
Once all polygons to be imported have been selected, click OK.
11.14
Viewing log on system performance and SQL functions

To access the Log window, select View | Log window from the Ribbonbar.
The Log window is displayed on the bottom of the screen.
Show output from allows you to define the functions you wish to see the log on.
Log, if selected, displays log on general system performance.
Page 528
SQL, if selected, displays log on SQL queries and database functions.

Commander, if selected displays log on Commander events.
The Clear all
11.15
button clears the currently displayed log.
Loading Nemo CEM logfiles

♦
Note that support for Nemo CEM data is optional. Contact your sales
representative to update your license.
To load Nemo CEM files go to File | Measurement | Open measurement.
Page 529
Open file dialog opens. From the open file dialog, select CEM files as the file
type.
Next, you need to open the files. CEM files are csv. type.
♦
Note that files must be named in Nemo CEM format so that the file name begins
with one of the options below. CEM system names the file automatically this way.
Names can be changed by adding something in the end of the given file name,
however the beginning of the file names must be kept as created by the system.
• Automated names are:

• app_auto_explored
• app_monitored
• comlink
• connection
• coverage_isho
• coverage_netstat
• coverage_rssi
• data_ftp
• data_http
• data_ping
• data_sessions
• email
• messaging_mms
• messaging_sms
Page 530
• survey
• time_based_questionnaire
• video_streaming
• voice
• web
Files appear in the workspace. Each column of the imported CSV file is shown in the
parameter tree as
a separate parameter. “All values” returns all the columns.
Page 531
12 USER INTERFACE
12.1 Menus
This chapter describes the contents of the menu bar in Nemo Analyze.
Analyze Menu
You can access the Analyze menu by clicking on the
Analyze main window.
logo at the top left-hand corner of the
Open enables you to open measurement files, maps, BTS files, report templates and
data source files.
Workspace enables you to open, save and close workspace items.
Workbook enables you to save active workbooks and floating windows.
Export to… enables you to export workbooks to PDF, Microsoft Word or Microsoft
PowerPoint format.
This item is displayed only if you have a workbook open.
Page 532
Print… enables you to preview and print active documents, and change printer and
printing options.
This item is displayed only if you have a workbook open.
Recent Workspaces enables you to open saved workspaces that you have used recently.
You can close Nemo Analyze by clicking on Exit Application.
12.1.1
File menu
Open | Measurement enables you to load measurement files, maps, BTS files, report
templates, and
data source files to the database. Open | Workspace enables you to open saved
workspaces. Open
| Folder enables you to browse for a folder, the contents of which are to be loaded
to the database.
Save | Workspace enables you to save workspace files (.aws). Save | Workbook
enables you to
save workbooks (p. 267) and add workbooks as templates to the Workspace menus.
Organize enables you to organize measurement files loaded in the database.
Project manager enables you to manage workspace with projects.
Menu editor enables you to add workbooks to the Workspace menus.
Import enables you to import image files to be used as maps, custom settings files
(.aex) , and color
set files.
Export enables you to export workbooks in PDF format and custom settings files
in .aex format. Page
image to clipboard enables you to save an active workbook or map as an image. You
can either
save the image on clipboard to enable pasting to other applications, or save the
Image to file in .jpg
format. You can also set an Export Ratio (or an export size) for the exported image
in percentages
or in fixed pixel size.
Print enables you to preview and print active documents, and change printer and
printing options.
You can exit the File menu by double-clicking on it.
Page 533
12.1.2
View menu
Add Data View enables you to create empty workbooks, workbooks with selected empty
data views,
and floating windows. For adding parameters on empty data views, see Adding data
views.
Options opens a dialog that enables you to make some general system settings.
Panels enables you to display and hide the Workspace, Log window, Properties,
Window browser,
Query clipboard, Task Manager, and Activity views.
You can exit the View menu by double-clicking on it.
12.1.3
Tools menu
KPI workbench makes it possible to create custom KPIs by dragging and dropping
parameters,
correlations, various operations, filters and sort elements to the Workbench,
defining their properties,
and connecting them into a logical flow chart. The KPI Workbench is part of the
Troubleshooting
Toolkit option.
Query manager enables you to add and edit queries, query filters, properties,
statistics, aliases, and
correlation queries.
Color set editor enables you to edit and create color sets.
Notifications enables you to define icons for all measurement events.
Event scheduler enables you to schedule workbooks and reports to be run and
measurement files to
be loaded into the database automatically from a predefined folder.
Macro editor enables you to automate user interface functions. Macro reference can
be found
under the Help menu.
User manager enables you to manage users and user groups (Nemo Analyze Enterprise
Edition).
Operators enables you to manage operator settings. These settings are used as the
basis of
operations such as statistics per operator.
Database Browser can be used to display the table structure of the Nemo Analyze
Database and to
write and test custom queries.
CSV templates enables you to create a new CSV import template.
Server statistics enables you to view server statistics.
Spreadsheet enables you to create spreadsheet report template file.
Page 534
12.1.4
Utilities menu
Reconnect enables you to reconnect to the database if the connection is lost.

Synchronization enables you to play back measurement files.
Reset Source
button resets the synchronization source. The field after the button displays the
current synchronization source.
Go to beginning
button jumps to the beginning of the file.
Step backwards
button steps one step backwards in the file.
Play backwards
button plays the file from end to beginning.
Stop
button ends the playback.
Play forward
button plays the file from beginning to end.
Step forward
button steps one step forward in the file.
Go to timestamp
button jumps to a particular point in the file if timestamps were inserted when
the file was recorded.
Counter displays the current point in the file.
Playback speed defines how fast the file is played back.
Global Filters enables you to add and remove global filters applied to all
operations performed with
Nemo Analyze. For instance, if you are interested only in measurement data from a
certain restricted
area, you can select this area as a filter using polygon area selection.
12.1.5
Commander menu
Commander is an optional component of Nemo Analyze intended for the management of

Nemo
Commander. It will be discussed in further detail in the Nemo Commander user
manual.
12.1.6
Live Map menu

Please note that the Live Map Menu is only visible when a map is open on the
workspace.
Refresh enables you to refresh the map.

Properties enables you to define map-specific properties
Side panel
Arrow
enables you to hide and display the side panel on the right-hand side of the grid.
enables you to select items on the map view.
Zoom in enables you to zoom in on the map.

Page 535
Zoom out enables you to zoom out on the map.

Measure distance enables you to measure distances on the map.
Highlight value enables you to highlight chosen values on the map.
Draw polygon enables you to draw polygons on the map.
Generate colorset generates a colorset.
Export to KML enables you to export a measurement route from Nemo Analyze map to
Google Earth
in KML format.
Zoom to layers extends zoom to layers.
Folder from area creates a folder from an area.
Polygon region
enables you to specify an area of any shape, and run statistics over that area.
The results are displayed in the statistics data view.
Area binning
enables you to define an area on a map which you can run statistics on in the form
of bins. The results are displayed on the map as a new semi-transparent layer.
Distance binning
bins. The results
Delta plotting
enables you to compare the parameter values of two measurement groups from a
same route by defining an area on a map (e.g. a portion of the measurement route).
For more
information on Delta Plotting, see the topic Use Case 14: Comparing two groups of
measurements
from the same route on map.
Auto centering enables you to force the map to be always centered on the current
location.
Route names displays the name of the route(s) on the Workbook.
Current position option displays the current position and direction on the map.
Highlight active route highlights in frames the route selected in the Layers side
panel.Optimized
drawing improves the performance of the route drawing on the map. However, in rare
occasions with
some projections it may result in skewed route plot. In such case, deselect this
option.
Scale bar option displays a distance scale bar on the map.
Select map: The drop-down menu enables you to change the map type of the active map
workbook.
12.1.7
Layout menu
Note: The layout menu is only displayed when a workbook is open in Nemo Analyze.
When you close
all workbooks, also the layout menu is closed automatically.
Add | Page enables you to add a new, empty page in a workbook. By clicking Graph,
Map, Grid, etc.
you can add data views in the active page. For adding parameters on empty data
views, see Adding
data views.
Remove | Page enables you to remove an active page from a workbook.
Copy | Workbook enables you to create a copy of the active workbook for a selected
measurement.
Page 536
Organize item enables you to close all workbooks and floating windows, and organize
various
workbooks and views in the Nemo Analyze main view.
12.1.8
Help menu
In the Help menu, you will find access to the online help and also shortcuts to
some important
documents, such as, a description of the Nemo file format.
Page 537
13 SHORTCUT KEYS
Shortcut keys available in Nemo Analyze:
Command
Shortcut Key
Description
Close
alt+f4
Closes the program.
Close
ctrl+f4
Closes the active
Window
window (exc. main

window).
New
ctrl+n
Workbook
Next
Opens an empty
workbook.
ctrl+f6
Activates the next

open workbook (in
the order of last
appearance).
Print
ctrl+p
Prints the current

view.
Analyze Tools menu shortcut keys:
Command
Shortcut Key
Go to the
CTRL+SHIFT
Jumps to the
beginning
+ LEFT
beginning of the file.
ARROW
Step
CTRL+LEFT
Steps one step
backwards
ARROW
backwards in the
file.
Play
SHIFT+F5
backwards
end to beginning.
Stop
F6
Ends the playback.
Play
F5
Plays the file from
forwards
Page 538
Plays the file from
beginning to end.
Step
CTRL+RIGHT
Steps one step

forwards
ARROW
forward in the file.

14 TROUBLESHOOTING
Socket closed dialog appears when opening Nemo Analyze with laptop
If you have Virtual Machine program (commonly known as VMware) installed on your
laptop, it may
not be possible to execute Nemo Analyze properly. This is caused by a conflict
between VMware and
the HASP dongle used in Nemo Analyze that uses VMware for certain internal
processes.
In this case, the following dialog appears when executing Nemo Analyze:
It is recommended that VMware is removed from the laptop.
Page 539
15 FAQ
Q: How soon are changes in the Nemo File Format implemented to Nemo Analyze?
A: Changes in the Nemo File Format are implemented very quickly to Nemo Analyze and
there is no
need to reload any data in the database.
Q: Which database is used in Nemo Analyze?
A: Nemo Analyze uses the Object Store database.
Q: Which reporting tool is used in Nemo Analyze?
A: The Viewer version of Crystal Reports reporting tool is included in the Nemo
Analyze package but
you can also use other reporting tools. To create new report templates, you will
need the Crystal
Reports Designer tool or some other SQL-compatible designing tool.
Q: I opened a parameter on a map but the samples are shown without color coding?
A: If you opened data on the map through the Analyze Wizard (right-click on a
device in workspace |
Pick Parameter) and selected a map instead of the default view, only the selected
parameters or
events are displayed. You should first open a map and then drag and drop a
measurement file on the
map. Then use color sets to highlight parameter values on the route.
Page 540
16 TECHNICAL SUPPORT
If you have questions on or beyond this documentation about Nemo tools, please
contact our technical
support service through Nemo Support Portal at http://nemosupport.anite.com call us
(local phone
numbers can be found in chapter Phone and Email support) or send us an email at
http://nemosupport@anite.com. Note that for full support you need to have the
Maintenance
Agreement.
16.1 User Club

Nemo User Club offers several new ways to benefit from Nemo products. You can find
it from
http://nemouserclub.anite.com.
Access to the Nemo User Club is restricted to customers with SW maintenance and
Technical Support
agreements or partner agreements. If you are an existing Anite Finland customer
with SW
maintenance and Technical Support agreements, but you are without access to the
User Club, please
complete an on-line registration form.
After submitting the requested information, you will receive a personal access key
and password by
email in a few days time.
Once you are registered with our User Club, you will automatically receive e-mails
informing you
each time a new version of software for your Nemo Product is released. It is fast,
easy, and it is
available to you seven days a week, 24 hours a day.
16.2 Nemo Support Portal

Nemo Support Portal is a web interface for technical support, product-related
questions, and RMA
requests. It offers a fast and convenient way to reach our technical support team
and submit repair,
warranty repair, and calibration requests. Customers can open a support ticket,
follow the status of
existing tickets, and request technical support 24/7/365. Furthermore the Nemo
Support Portal
includes a Knowledge Base for the most frequent and latest topics on Nemo Products.
Submitting a
ticket via Nemo Support Portal ensures that our technical specialists have all the
necessary
information available to solve your support case, resulting in faster response
times.
Please go to http://nemosupport.anite.com to access the portal and click “Request
Access” to obtain
a password to the system.
16.3 Phone and Email support

During the warranty period, the phone support related to potential software errors
is free of additional
charge. Registered users with a valid Maintenance Agreement are entitled to full
support. Nemo
Support Portal is the preferred channel for technical support requests, but you can
also send us an
email. When emailing, please let us know the number of your Software Maintenance
and Support
Agreement.
Please contact us at the following locations (global email address
nemosupport@anite.com .
Global
Tel.
+358 50 395 7800
Americas
Tel.
+1 469 951 9105

+1 469 774 4608 (En español e
português)
APAC
Tel.
+65 9746 2431
P.R. China
Tel.
Page 542
+86 10 6567 8528

17 APPENDIX 1
17.1 Making MapInfo® maps

Using raster image files, you can bring paper maps, photographs, and other graphic
images into
MapInfo®. You can scan paper maps and then use paper maps as the foundation for the
maps you
create in MapInfo®. After scanning the paper map into a raster image file, you can
display it in a map
window.
Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze support only .TIF, .GIF, and .JPG formats. MapInfo®
can read the
following types of raster images:
- filename.TIF
- filename.GIF
- filename.JPG
- filename.PCX
- filename.BMP
- filename.BIL
Color options are:
Monochrome images: each pixel in map image can be black or white.
Gray scale images: each pixel in gray scale image can be black, white, or a shade
of gray.
Color images: each pixel can be of any color from a palette of available colors.
MapInfo® supports
256 colors. When using Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze, we recommend using gray scale
images.
Doing this, measurement route can be discerned better than with color map images.
17.1.1
Registering a raster map
If you want to overlay vector data on top of a raster image, then you must register
the raster map
image so that MapInfo® can position it properly in a Map window. You do this in the
Image
Registration dialog box. You must identify control point coordinates and projection
of the raster image
map. It is important to provide accurate control point information when registering
a raster map
image. Choose control points that can be easily identified and selected, such as
street intersections or
use the coordinates (latitude and longitude grid) for the selected point from a
paper map.
To register a raster map with MapInfo® SW:

1. Choose File | Open Table and Raster Image File Format. Select your raster map
image
file (.TIF, .GIF, .JPG) and open it. The Image Registration dialog box will be
displayed. A
preview of the raster map image appears on the screen.
2. Select the Projection button to specify the projection of the raster image map.
If you do not
know the right projection, the default value is Longitude/ Latitude.
Page 543
3. Start adding control points. Click on a location in the preview (raster image
map). The Add
Control Point dialog box will be displayed showing the location of the point in
pixels. Add Map
X and Map Y coordinates in decimal formats. For example, to specify the coordinates
65
degrees, 30 minutes, enter 65.5 degrees. Use negative numbers when specifying west
and
south coordinates. If you want to register a raster map, which does not use
longitude and
latitude coordinates, specify the appropriate projection in the Image Registration
dialog box.
Enter your coordinates in the native units of the coordinate system. For example,
if you are
registering a UTM map image, enter coordinates in meters. Using MapBasic® program,
you
can convert d/m/s coordinates into decimal format.
4. You must choose at least three control points. Select points that can be easily
identified and
selected in the map window.
5. After all control points have been defined, click OK in the Image Registration
dialog box. The
raster map will be displayed in the map window.
6. Move filename.tab and filename.tif/gif/jpg files to the map directory of Nemo
Outdoor or Nemo
Analyze.
7. Open filename.tab in Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze.
Page 544
18 APPENDIX 2
18.1 Adding CSV files to the database

In addition to files produced with Nemo tools, you can import any character-
separated value (CSV)
ASCII data into the Nemo Analyze database. The data can be post-processed and
visualized using the
data views available in Nemo Analyze.
Select Tools | CSV templates.
The CSV Templates dialog opens.
To create a new CSV import template, select Add. The CSV Import Wizard – CSV
Template File dialog
opens.
Template file enables you to select a CSV file to serve as a basis for the import
template. Click the
browse button
to browse for CSV files.
Extension enables you to define the file type the import template will apply to.
♦
Note: It is recommended that the extensions of CSV files with different content
structures are renamed to provide each type with a unique extension. For
instance, four different types of CSV files, all originally with the extension
.csv,
could be renamed as .csv1, .csv2, .csv3, and .csv4.
Once Template file and Extension have been defined, click Next.
The CSV Import Wizard – CSV Import dialog opens.
Page 546
Ignore defines the parts of the imported data set that are to be ignored when
uploading the data, i.e.
the parts that do not contain relevant data. Column row defines the number of top
rows to be
ignored. Rows allows you to define specific rows to be ignored. Rows starting with
allows you to
define rows starting with a specific string to be ignored.
Columns allows you to divide a CSV data set into columns. Fixed lines defines the
content of each
column based on the number of characters in a CSV string. For example, the setting
12, 22, 32
defines that the first twelve characters (including spaces) belong to column 1, the
next 22 characters
to column 2, and the next 32 characters to column 3. Fixed lines should only be
used if there are no
delimiters in the data set. Delimiter defines the character that separates columns
in the CSV data
set. You can use one of the default delimiters, i.e. comma, dot, semicolon, <TAB>,
or <SPACE>, or
you can define your own delimiter character by entering a character to the
Delimiter field.
Strip leading and trailing quotation marks removes leading and trailing quotation
marks from
each column of the imported data set.
File preview displays a preview of the CSV file contents.
Once the Ignore and Columns settings have been defined, click Next.
The CSV Import Wizard – Database Schema Definition dialog opens.
Table name defines the name of the template.

Columns enables you to select which columns are included in the imported data set
and to define the
properties of each column using Column, Column type and Format.
Decimal separator defines the decimal separator as comma or dot.
Column defines the name of the column selected in the Columns control.
Column type defines the data type of the column selected in the Columns control.
Keyword allows you to define the content type of columns containing some general
data types, such
as time and positioning data. Based on these defined content types, the data can be
correlated with
measurement files of other formats.
Format defines the required syntax for the column selected in the Columns control.
Page 547
To define a custom time column syntax element-by-element, click the … button. The
Time Format
dialog opens. To add syntax elements (e.g. YYYY) and delimiters (e.g. ;), double-
click the relevant
element. Custom syntax is displayed in the Format field of the Time Format dialog.
Data preview displays a preview of the data set structure.

Once the properties of each column have been defined, click Finish.
The new template is displayed in the Template field of the CSV Templates dialog.
To open a CSV file using an import template, select Import from the CSV Templates
dialog. You can
also open a CSV files using an import template by selecting File | Measurement |
Open
Measurement.
Page 548
Select a CSV import template (e.g. Template1) by using the Files of type drop-down
menu, browse
to a folder containing measurement files with the extension defined in the
template, select a file, and
click Open. For
Opening CSV files from the database, see below.
To export a CSV template, select Export. Then, choose under which name the exported
template will
be saved as from the file dialog.
18.1.1
Opening CSV files from the database
All CSV files within the database are displayed on the Measurements page of the
Workspace.
Files displays all the CSV files stored in the database.
Parameters displays all the parameters that are available for the file. The User
folder displays userdefined custom parameters. For creating custom queries for CSV
files, click here.
To open a parameter in its default view, select a CSV file in the Files view and
double-click a
parameter (e.g. Jerkiness [%]) in the Parameters view.
If you want to open the parameter in some other type of view, right-click on a
parameter (e.g.
Jerkiness [%]) in the Parameters view and select the view type from the popup menu.
Page 549
The Choose Graph Type dialog opens.
Select a graph type.

The Select Columns dialog opens.
Define the x and y axes and click OK.

The data view opens displaying the selected parameter data on the selected CSV
file.
Page 550
18.1.2
Opening CSV files without database import
Optionally, character-separated value (CSV) data can also be opened and viewed in
various data
views without importing the data into the database. Using this method, the CSV data
is loaded only in
the workspace.
Select File | Open | Measurement | Open Data Source File, and select the file in
the Open dialog.
In the Analyze Wizard, you need to define file import parameters. After you have
made the settings,
click Next and finally Finish.
Page 551
With Skip first you can

define how many lines are
skipped at the beginning
of the file.
Delimiter defines how
columns in the source file
are separated.
Columns displays a list of
columns detected in the
source file.
Column type defines the
data type of each column.
Column aliases define how

data is displayed in the data
views. You can define a
parameter for the axes of
each view type.
Page 552
The imported file is added to the Data Source Files page in the Workspace. You can
view the data
by right-clicking on the file and selecting Open in Data View.
18.1.3
Creating custom queries for CSV files
Correlating and creating custom queries for CSV files is possible using SQL. The
Database browser can
be used in examining the table structure of the database.
To open the Database browser, select Tools | Database browser in the Ribbonbar.
Page 553
The Database browser view opens. CSV import templates (e.g. Template1) can be found
in the folder
Views | User.
Page 554
The CSV import template folder displays both the columns that were imported and
some extra
columns containing database structure data, such as the_file_title and
the_file_extension.
If multiple CSV files have been imported to the database using a particular
template, each column in
the directory structure will display all rows from the corresponding columns of all
the files that match
the template. In order to make it possible to identify the file to which each row
belongs, the column
the_file_title displays the name of the file from which the row was retrieved.
APPENDIX 3
19
19.1 Event-based data recording principle of Nemo Tools

The underlying data recording principle of all Nemo measurement tools is that the
data is written to
the log file only when values change, i.e. values are not written periodically.
More precisely, if any of
the information elements of a given event change, the event is written to the log
file.
In practice, many of the data elements are written to the log file in a periodic
manner with the
minimum sampling interval. For example, signal strength and quality of serving and
neighboring cells
are all written in the same event with GSM, UMTS, and other technologies. In other
words, an event
containing information on all of them is written whenever the signal strength of
the serving or one of
the neighboring cells changes. In a real-life scenario, these values are constantly
changing, and hence
signal strength is in practice written to the log file in a periodic manner.
However, with certain parameters the event-based data recording can have practical
effects. For
example, GSM parameter Rx Quality behaves in a fairly stable manner in good network
conditions.
The value is 0 (the best possible quality) for long constant time intervals,
interrupted by short peaks
of interference during which higher Rx Quality values are recorded.
In good signal conditions, the following pattern could occur: At the beginning of
the call, an event with
the time stamp 0 seconds and the Rx Quality value 0 is recorded. After 90 seconds,
an interference
peak occurs and the RX quality value 5 is recorded. After 10 seconds, with the time
stamp 100.5
seconds, the call ends. In this case, only three RX Quality values are written
during the whole call. The
values, and their durations are: 0/90s, 5/0.5s, 0/10s. The average of the three
samples would be (0 +
5 + 0)/3 = 1.667. However, this result would be incorrect because the three samples
are not of equal
weight. The value 5 was valid only for 0,5 seconds; the value 0 was valid for a
total of 100 seconds.
Thus, the correct average is calculated by weighting each sample with its duration:
(0*90+5*0.5+0*10)/(90+0.5+10) = 0.025. More generally, the weighted average of
values in a
Nemo log file is calculated in the following manner:
∑S *d
=
∑d
i
S Mean
i
i
, where d is the duration of the sample, in time or distance.
To process data produced by Nemo logging tools correctly, one must take the event-
based nature of
the data into account, and weight each value with its duration. This is done
automatically in Nemo
Outdoor and Nemo Analyze. In practice this means that in a line graph, the line
drawn based on a
sample remains constant until the next sample, i.e. for the duration of the sample.
With map plots, a stretch of measurement route is colored based on the duration of
a sample. When
calculating averages, cumulation, or density histograms in Nemo Analyze and Nemo
Outdoor, each
sample is weighted with its duration. It should be noted that the duration can be
in time or in
distance, depending on how the data is to be used. If the samples from the entire
measurement route
are to have equal weight and for instance the weighting effect of time spent at
traffic lights is to be
excluded, the samples should be weighted by distance. Otherwise, weighting based on
time can be
Page 556
used. In Nemo Analyze, the statistics weighting method can be selected from
software options and
from the report configuration of each Crystal Reports template separately.
Page 557
20 APPENDIX 4
20.1 Difference between Nemo call events and ETSI call events
Nemo call events refer to the trigger points of the different phases of voice/video
call setup and
teardown, as written in Nemo measurement tool logfiles (.nmf) and defined in the
Nemo Fileformat
specification. ETSI call events are based on the trigger points as defined in ETSI
TS 102 250-2
specification.
Picture below illustrates the difference between Nemo and ETSI call events. The
major difference
between the two call events is that Nemo events consider call as connected when
traffic channel over
the air interface is allocated to the mobile, while ETSI events consider call as
connected when
ALERTING is reached (or when call is answered if ALERTING is not used). This
difference impacts the
call setup success rate and dropped call rate KPIs. If a call fails after traffic
channel is assigned, but
before Alerting is reached, it is considered as dropped call in Nemo events. The
same call is
considered as call attempt failure in ETSI events.
Nemo measurement tools are writing the Nemo call events to the logfile. However,
Nemo events are
compatible with the ETSI events, and in post-processing it is possible to convert
the Nemo events to
ETSI. As can be seen from the picture, ETSI uses a subset of trigger points
compared to Nemo, and
there is one to one equivalent trigger point in Nemo events for every ETSI event.
Nemo Analyze and
Nemo Outdoor have both the Nemo call events and the ETSI call events available for
the user.
Which call events to use, ETSI or Nemo?
ETSI way of defining the call setup phases is a widely used industry standard.
Therefore we
recommend using the ETSI call events in call KPI reporting. Nemo call event logic
inherits from the
1990s, early stages of networks and measurement tool development. The Nemo logfile
format is used
in many 3rd party tools and therefore it is important to maintain the backward
compatibility of the
logfile format and not to change the call event logic. Moreover, Nemo events can be
converted to ETSI
events as discussed. Therefore the Nemo call event logic will be maintained in the
raw logfiles also in
the future.
Page 558
Page 559
21 APPENDIX 5
End-User License Agreement

IMPORTANT - READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement ("EULA") is a legal
agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Anite Finland
Ltd for the Anite
Finland Ltd software product(s), in whatever form, identified above ("Software
Product" or
"Software"). The Software Product includes computer software, the associated media,
any printed
materials, and any "online" or electronic documentation. By installing, copying or
otherwise using
the Software Product, you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA. If you do
not agree to the
terms of this EULA, Anite Finland Ltd is unwilling to license the Software Product
to you. In such
event, you may not use or copy the Software Product, and you should promptly return
the unused
product(s) in their original packaging to the place of purchase within thirty days
of the date of
original purchase.
SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE
The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright
treaties, as well as
other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Software Product is licensed,
not sold.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following rights:
Software. You agree that the Software product is licensed to you to be used with
the mobile
phone(s) and software protection key designated by Anite Finland Ltd for such use
("Designated
Hardware"). You also agree that you shall not have more than one copy of the
Software Product in
use at a time for any Designated Hardware in which the Software Product is to be
used or to be
distributed except as expressly provided for in this EULA. You may use one copy of
the Software
Product in binary code form only on one computer at a time in order to conduct
system
measurements using the Designated Hardware at various locations to the extent
necessary for the
permitted operation of the application software but may not duplicate the Software
Product.
Storage/Network/Single Use. You may also store or install a copy of the Software
Product in
binary code form only over an internal network, and distribute the Software Product
to your other
computers over an internal network. However, you must acquire and dedicate a
license for the
Software Product for each Designated Hardware on which the Software Product is used
or to which
it is distributed. A license for the Software Product may not be shared or used
concurrently on
different computers.
2. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS.
Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and Disassembly. Removal,
emulation,
or reverse engineering of all or any part of this product or its protection
constitutes an unauthorized
modification to the product and is specifically prohibited. Nothing in this license
statement permits
you to derive the source or assembly code of files provided to you in executable or
object formats.
Limitations on Modifications, Adaptations and Other Changes. You may not modify,
adapt or
otherwise make any changes to the Software Product except and only to the extent
you are
© 2014
expressly permitted to do so under the applicable mandatory law notwithstanding

this limitation or
by Anite Finland Ltd's prior written consent.
Separation of Components. The Software Product is licensed as a single product. Its
component
parts may not be separated for use on more than one Designated Hardware and
computer as
designated above.
Not for Resale. This Software Product is “Not for Resale" or "NFR" and your license
only permits
personal use and you may not sell or otherwise transfer the Software Product for
value except as
specified below.
Rental. You may not rent, lease or lend the Software Product to any person or
entity.
Software Transfer. You may not otherwise give or permanently transfer any or all of
your rights
under this EULA without the express prior written consent of Anite Finland Ltd
which such consent
shall not be unreasonably withheld.
Security Mechanisms. Anite Finland and its affiliated companies take all legal
steps to eliminate
piracy of their software products. In this context, the Software may include a
security mechanism
that can detect the installation or use of illegal copies of the Software, and
collect and transmit data
about those illegal copies. Data collected will not include any customer data
created with the
Software. By using the Software, you consent to such detection and collection of
data, as well as its
transmission and use if an illegal copy is detected. Anite Finland also reserves
the right to use a
hardware lock device, license administration software, and/or a license
authorization key to control
access to the Software. You may not take any steps to avoid or defeat the purpose
of any such
measures. Use of any Software without any required lock device or authorization key
provided by
Anite Finland is prohibited.
Duration and Termination. This EULA is effective from the day you open the sealed
media
package or download and continues until termination. You may terminate this EULA at
any time.
Without prejudice to any other rights, Anite Finland Ltd may terminate this EULA if
you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. In either event, you must
destroy all copies of
the Software Product and all associated media, printed materials, updates and
component parts and
verify to Anite Finland Ltd in writing that such has been done.
3. SUPPORT SERVICES. Anite Finland Ltd may provide you with support services
related to the
Software Product ("Support Services"). Any supplemental software code provided to
you as part of
the Support Services shall be considered part of the Software Product and subject
to the terms and
conditions of this EULA. With respect to technical information you provide to Anite
Finland Ltd as
part of the Support Services, Anite Finland Ltd may use such information for its
business purpose,
including for product updates and development.
4. COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS. All title and copyrights in and to the Software
Product (including
but not limited to any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text
and "applets",
incorporated into the Software Product), the accompanying printed materials, and
any copies of the
Software Product, are owned by Anite Finland Ltd or its suppliers. The Software
Product is protected
by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. You may not copy the printed
materials
accompanying the Software Product. You may not remove, modify or alter any Anite
Finland Ltd
copyright or trademark from any part of the Software Product, including but not
limited to any such
notices contained in the physical and/or electronic media or documentation, in the
Anite Finland Ltd
Setup Wizard dialogue or 'about' boxes, in any of the runtime resources and/or in
any webpresence or web-enabled notices, code or other embodiments originally
contained in or dynamically
or otherwise created by the Software Product.
The Software Product may include following licenses with related copyrights and
titles:
Page 561
WinWAP. Copyright © Winwap Technologies Oy. http://www.winwap.com

Perceptual Objective Listening Quality Analysis (POLQA) according to ITU-T
Recommendation P. 863
included in this product is protected by copyright and by European, US and other
International
patents and patent applications and is provided under license from
OPTICOM Dipl.-Ing. M. Keyhl GmbH, Erlangen, Germany, 2011 – www.opticom.de
POLQA® is a registered trademark of OPTICOM GmbH. Used by permission. © 2011 by the
POLQA
Coalition of OPTICOM GmbH, Germany - SwissQual AG, Switzerland - KPN, The
Netherlands - TNO,
The Netherlands.
www.polqa.info
Further statements shall be incorporated to prohibit additional copying of the
POLQA software in
whole or in part, other than is essential for the proper operation of the POLQA
software or for
normal security back-up purposes; prevent the End-User from modifying, translating,
reverseengineering or decompiling the POLQA software except to the extent permitted
by law; require that
the acknowledgement of the rights in the POLQA software shall not be removed from
the POLQA
software or any installation of it;
Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) measurement technology included in

this product is
protected by copyright and by European, US and other patents and is provided under
license from
OPTICOM Dipl.-Ing. M. Keyhl GmbH, Erlangen, Germany, 2008 - www.opticom.de
For further information please refer to www.pesq.org
Further statements shall be incorporated to prohibit additional copying of the PESQ
software in
whole or in part, other than is essential for the proper operation of the PESQ
software or for normal
security back-up purposes; prevent the End-User from modifying, translating,
reverse-engineering
or decompiling the PESQ software except to the extent permitted by law; require
that the
acknowledgement of the rights in the PESQ software shall not be removed from the
PESQ software
or any installation of it;
Evaluation of Talker Quality (ECHO) measurement technology included in this product

is protected
by copyright and is provided under license from
OPTICOM GmbH, Erlangen, Germany, 2011 - www.opticom.de
Further statements shall be incorporated to prohibit additional copying of the ECHO
software in
whole or in part, other than is essential for the proper operation of the ECHO
software or for normal
security back-up purposes; prevent the End-User from modifying, translating,
reverse-engineering
or decompiling the ECHO software except to the extent permitted by law; require
that the
acknowledgement of the rights in the ECHO software shall not be removed from the
ECHO software
or any installation of it;
Libresample library and libVLC library distributed under LGPL license. For detailed
information, see
license files located in the software installation directory.
The license management portion of this Licensee Application is based on:
Page 562
SentinelRMS*
© 1989-2006 SafeNet, Inc.
All rights reserved
SentinelRMSe*
© 1989-2006 SafeNet, Inc.
All rights reserved
Iperf copyright. Copyright (c) 1999-2006, The Board of Trustees of the University
of Illinois. All
Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
obtaining a copy of
this software (Iperf) and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal
in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons
to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
Redistributions of source code
must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimers.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and
the following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other materials provided with
the
distribution. Neither the names of the University of Illinois, NCSA, nor the names
of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without
specific prior
written permission. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
CONTIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
5. DUAL-MEDIA SOFTWARE. You may receive the Software Product in more than one
medium.
Regardless of the type or size of medium you receive, you may use only that one
medium that is
appropriate for the systems you use to operate the Software Product. You may not
use or install
the other medium on any system. You may not loan, rent, lease or otherwise transfer
the other
medium to another user, except as part of the permanent transfer (as provided
above) of the
Software Product.
6. CONFIDENTIALITY AND NON-DISCLOSURE. You agree to keep in confidence and not to
disclose
in any manner or form to any third party nor publish any such data or information
related to the
Software Product. You agree to protect all information and data provided to you by
Anite Finland
Ltd related to the Software Product with the same degree of care that you use to
protect your own
like data and information, but with not less than that due care exercised by a
reasonably prudent
person under the same or similar circumstances.
7. U.S. GOVERNMENTAL RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software Product and documentation are
provided with Restricted Rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government
is subject to
restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical
Data and Computer
Software clause at DFARS 252.277-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the
Commercial
Computer Software - Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52-227-19, as applicable.
Page 563
8. LIMITED WARRANTY. Anite Finland Ltd warrants that (a) the Software Product will
perform
substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of
three (3)
months from the date of receipt, and (b) any third party hardware accompanying the
Software
Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use
and service for a
period of one (1) year from the date of receipt. To the extent that implied
warranties are
disclaimable, they are disclaimed in paragraph 10. Some states/jurisdictions do not
allow
disclaimers of or limitations on duration of an implied warranty, so the above
limitation may not
apply to you. Any implied warranties on the Software Product and, as applicable,
third party
hardware that is not disclaimable are limited to three (3) months and one (1) year
respectively.
9. CUSTOMER REMEDIES. Anite Finland Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability and
your exclusive
remedy shall be, at Anite Finland Ltd option, either (a) return of the price paid,
or (b) repair or
replacement of the software or hardware that does not meet the Limited Warranty
contained in this
EULA and which is returned to Anite Finland Ltd. The Limited Warranty contained
herein is void if
failure of the software or third party hardware has resulted from accident, abuse,
misapplication or
events beyond the control of Anite Finland Ltd including, but not limited to Acts
of God, acts of
nature or acts of war. Any replacement Software Products or hardware will be
warranted for the
remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer.
Anite Finland Ltd
is not responsible for ensuring adequate backup and storage for your data or
records.
10. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, Anite
Finland
Ltd disclaims all other warranties, either express or implied, including but not
limited to implied
warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, and non-
infringement of third-party
rights, with regard to the Software Product, the accompanying written materials,
and any
accompanying hardware. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You
may have others
which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction.
11. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. To the maximum extent permitted by
applicable law, in no event shall Anite Finland Ltd or its suppliers be liable for
any damages
whatsoever (including without limitation, special, incidental, consequential,
punitive or indirect
damages for personal injury, loss of business profits, business interruption, loss
of business
information, or any other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use of or inability to
use this Software
Product, even if Anite Finland Ltd has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. In any case,
Anite Finland Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability under any provision of this
EULA shall be limited to
the amount actually paid by you for the Software Product and/or third party
hardware
accompanying the Software Product. The Limitations of Liability contained in this
Section apply to
claims of every kind, whether based on contract law, tort law or otherwise, even if
these limitations
have the effect of exculpating a party from responsibility for its negligence,
fault or other conduct.
Because some states/jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of
liability for
consequential or incidental damages, the above limitation may not apply to you.
Page 564

Benchmarking Report - OTT Applications 1.3

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Benchmarking Report - OTT Applications 1.3

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

WWW.ANITE.

NEMO ANALYZE 7.30

Hardware and software

License Server (Floating

Adding files to the

Migrating Nemo Analyze database to a new laptop ................................ 35

Importing image files as

Drag & drop

Adding descriptions to measurement files and

Retrieving original files from the

Statistics/Statistics with filters over

Statistics by/Statistics with Filters By: No

Statistics by: Fixed Geographical Bin

Lee’s criteria sampling for scanner measurements ................................

Viewing measurement data in

Viewing measurement data on

Opening measurement files on

Opening BTS files on

Viewing notification icons on

Use Case 2: Viewing uplink voice quality server data .............................

Use Case 3: Viewing IP/UDP packet trace data .....................................

Filtering based on polygon

Use Case 4: Global parameter filtering based on a secondary parameter 104

Filtering data and creating custom

Drilling Down from Map Data

Layer properties for line

Layer properties for bar

Layer properties for scatter

Use Case 6: Notification icons in

Exporting workbooks as PDF/MS Word/MS PowerPoint files .................. 269

Exporting workbooks as image

10.1 Spreadsheet report templates

10.4.5 Modifying a spreadsheet report

10.10.1 Pick Measurement

10.12.1 Designing custom KPIs and adding input data

Time functions: Time

Reopening custom KPIs for editing ................................................

Defining KPI execution method and value constants ........................ 408

(S)FTP Log File

11.10.1 Configuring notifications using the Parameters

11.13.1 Importing MapInfo

Viewing log on system performance and SQL functions ............................

Loading Nemo CEM

18.1.2 Opening CSV files without database

1.1 Setting up the system

2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

Nemo Analyze is a powerful post-processing and reporting tool for planning,

2.1 End-User License Agreement

3 INSTALLING NEMO ANALYZE

3.1 Hardware and software requirements

3.2 Nemo Analyze installation

Installing Nemo Analyze

The Ready to Install the Program dialog opens. Select Install.

3.3.1 License Server (Floating License)

An unlimited amount of users in different physical locations can install Nemo

Installing the floating license server

Configuring the floating license server.

3.3.2 HASP USB key

Connecting the HASP USB key in the USB port:

3.3.2.1 No valid license detected

3.3.2.2 No valid technical support agreement

The old HASP USB key

The new HASP USB key

3.3.3 Technical support expiration